ED3051G542

Technical Manual
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100
MULTIPILOT 1100
Including Installation Instructions
Software Version 4.0
Display Electronics Units

GE3062, RADARPILOT
GE3064, CHARTRADAR and
GE3065, MULTIPILOT
Item No.: ED3051G542
Revision: 02 (2005-09)
Order No.: 390001631
This document is our property for which we reserve all rights, including
those relating to patents or registered designs. It must not be
reproduced or used otherwise or made available to any third party without
our prior permission in writing.
Alterations due to technical progress are reserved.
SAM Electronics GmbH

D - 22763 Hamburg
Service
Customer Support Center
Telephone: + 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 53
Telefax:
+ 49 (0) 18 03 00 85 54
e-mail:shipservice@sam-electronics.de
t_eu11_eti.fm / 06.09.05
RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

Technical Manual
List of Contents
List of Contents
List of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.1
Software Releases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.2
Hardware Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
1.3
General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.4
Safety Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.5
Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.6
Safety Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.1
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operating Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.3
Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.4
Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
User Chart Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2.6
AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.7
VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.2
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
General Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Maximum Cable Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Cable Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Electronics Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
Specific Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Recommendations Concerning the Ships Sensors / Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
4
4.1
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

List of Contents
Technical Manual
4.2
"Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.3
CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
4.4
Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.3.1
4.5.3.2
4.5.3.3
4.5.4
4.5.4.1
4.5.4.2
4.5.4.3
4.5.4.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.5.7
4.5.8
4.5.9
4.5.9.1
4.5.9.2
4.5.9.3
4.5.9.3.1
4.5.9.3.2
4.5.10
4.5.10.1
4.5.10.2
4.5.10.3
4.5.11
4.5.11.1
4.5.11.2
4.5.11.2.1
4.5.11.2.2
4.5.11.2.3
4.5.11.2.4
4.5.12
4.5.12.1
4.5.12.2
4.5.12.3
4.5.12.4
4.5.12.5
4.5.13
Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pentium Motherboard (PMB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboards Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service Switch of the RDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functional Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnection Box VS3034G030 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . .
Connection of Ships Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Interface GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Unit BD3027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball BD 3028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radar Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackpilot Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keyboard Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
47
48
49
50
50
51
53
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
62
64
64
65
66
66
67
68
72
72
73
74
75
76
76
77
77
78
79
79
80
80
81
81
83
Setting-To-Work/Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100) 86
Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100) . . . 88
5.2
CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.3
MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Installation and Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
List of Contents
5.4.3
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
5.5
Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Trackball and Cursor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Entering the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Service Log-in Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.7
Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Date & Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Map Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Map Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Track Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Diskette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.5
Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Map Storage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
RDC Test Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
ARPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Listing the System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Determining the Software Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.11
5.11.1
5.11.2
5.11.3
5.11.4
5.11.5
5.11.6
5.11.7
5.11.7.1
5.11.7.2
5.11.7.3
5.11.8
5.11.8.1
5.11.8.2
5.11.8.3
5.11.9
5.11.10
5.11.11
5.11.12
5.11.13
5.11.14
Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Navigation in the Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Configuration File Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
System Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
System / Ship Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Radar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Configuration of the Indicators (Administration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Configuration of the Indicators Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Configuration of the Transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander) . . . . . . . . . . 127
Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Serial Interface of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
AIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Planning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Conning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
ECDIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
VDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
5.12
5.12.1
5.12.1.1
5.12.1.2
5.12.1.3
5.12.1.4
5.12.1.5
5.12.1.6
5.12.1.7
5.12.1.8
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Monitor Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
RDC Service and Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Check RDC Alarm IO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Serial I/O Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Software Update (+PCBs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
PCB Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
RKE Software Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
RKE Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

List of Contents
Technical Manual
5.12.1.9
5.12.2
5.12.2.1
5.12.2.2
5.12.2.3
5.12.2.4
5.12.3
5.12.4
Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting-to-Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Magnetron Hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antenna Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.13
Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5.14
5.14.1
5.14.2
5.14.3
5.14.4
Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Entering the BIOS Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.15
5.15.1
5.15.2
Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Analog Interface Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
RGB Buffer Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
145
145
145
148
149
149
150
150
153
153
153
153
154
Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.1
Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . .

System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure (System / Ship Parameters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure (Radar > Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure (Radar > Transceiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure (AIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure (Planning System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
160
161
162
164
172
173
173
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

COM Expander GE3044G210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
174
175
176
Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Repair/Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.1
Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.6.1
8.2.6.2
8.2.7
8.2.8
Trouble-Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only)
The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System . . . . . . . .
Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100): .
Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100): . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trackball Operation is Erratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3
8.3.1
8.3.2
Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 . . . . . . . . . . 186
System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
8.4
Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
181
181
181
182
182
183
183
184
184
184
185
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
List of Contents
8.4.1
8.4.2
8.4.3
8.4.4
8.4.5
8.4.6
8.4.7
Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Console Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
SCC C4 Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.5
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.6
8.6.1
8.6.2
8.6.3
8.6.4
8.6.5
8.6.6
8.6.7
8.6.8
8.6.9
8.6.10
8.6.11
8.6.12
8.6.13
8.6.14
8.6.14.1
8.6.14.2
Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Exchange of the Main Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Exchange of the Motherboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Exchange of the Memory Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exchange of Ethernet Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Exchange of the IDE Memory Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Exchange of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exchange of the COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exchange of the Diskette Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exchange of the Electronics Units Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exchange of Filter Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exchange of Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exchange of the Processor Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8.7
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.8
8.8.1
8.8.2
8.8.3
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Spare Part Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Spare Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Spare Parts for Monitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.1
Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Performance Data of the Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Performance Data of the Electronics Units Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
9.3
9.3.1
9.3.1.1
9.3.1.2
9.3.2
External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Analog Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Analog Gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Pulse Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
COM Expander . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.1.1
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Operating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.5
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
9.6
Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
10
System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.1
System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

List of Contents
Technical Manual
10.2
AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
10.3
System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
11
Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12
Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
13
Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_IVZ.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
List of Figures
List of Figures
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
1-1
1-2
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-16
4-17
4-18
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
4-27
4-28
4-29
4-31
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
Version label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pcb labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Preparation of the cable endings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Cable glands with grounding inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Typical connection of ships sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation . . . 34
Typical connection of ships sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation . . . . 35
Typical connection of ships sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy . . . . . . . . . 36
Typical connection of ships sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Block diagram with wiring concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
"Power on" concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
CAN bus concept and termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board) . 45
Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander) . . . . . . 45
Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
The TVA signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
IDE memory module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Example for a Graphics And Video Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Power supply cable GE3050G020 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Analog Interface, Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
SH3014T203 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
RS422 signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
TTL plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
RS232 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Diskette drive brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Mounting of the diskette drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Disconnection of the drive cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Dismounting of the drive module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Turning the brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Interfaces for ships sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander . . . . . . . . 94
Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface . . . . . . . 94
System position (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
System Maintenance Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

List of Figures
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-14
6-15
6-16
6-17
6-18
6-19
6-20
8-3
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
12-19
12-20
12-21
12-22
12-23
12-24
12-25
12-26
Technical Manual
Menu structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System fault list (present faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of software versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRACKPILOT configuration manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PMA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1 . . . . . . . . . .
Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COM Expander pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RDC pcb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Analog Interface Rev. 03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection of log and gyro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unmounting the front frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4
X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1 .
S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
101
109
110
111
113
134
146
147
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
173
174
175
176
177
178
189
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
12-27
12-28
12-29
12-30
12-31
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
13-9
13-10
13-11
13-12
13-13
13-14
13-15
13-16
13-17
13-18
13-19
13-20
13-21
13-22
13-23
13-24
13-25
13-26
List of Figures
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7 . . . . . . . . . . . 271
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7 . . . . . . 273
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3 . . . . . . . 279
Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
19" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3068G056MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
19" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3068G057MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyards installation), BD3028O000 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05
11

List of Figures
12
Technical Manual
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_AVZ.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
List of Abbreviations
This list also contains abbreviations which are not used in this manual but in additional documentation.
A
A/D
AFC
AGP
ARPA
ATA
AZS
Analog/Digital
Automatic Frequency Control
Advanced Graphics Port
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Automatic Tracking Aid
Azimuth Start
B
BSH
Bundesamt fr Seeschiffahrt und Hydrographie (Federal Maritime and Hydrographic Agency of Germany)
C
CAN
CD
CRR
CRT
CWL
Controller Area Network

Centred Display
Close Range Resolution
Cathode Ray Tube
Construction Water Line
D
DMA
Direct Memory Access
E
EPA
ECDIS
Electronic Plotting Aid

Electronic Chart Display and Information System
F
FIFO
FTC
First In First Out (Memory)

Fast Time Constant => Rain (Rain Clutter)
G
GPS
GVP
Global Positioning System

Graphics and Video Processor
H
HF
HM
HSC
HV
High Frequency
Head Marker
High Speed Craft
High Voltage
I
IDE
IEC
IF
IMB
ISA
Intelligent Drive Electronics

International Electrotechnical Commission
Intermediate Frequency
Interface and Memory Board
Industry Standard Architecture Bus
K
KBC
Keyboard Controller
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05
13

14
M
MMI
Man-Machine Interface
N
NACOS
NI
NMEA
NOB
n.c.
n.o.
Navigation and Command System

NAVIGATION INTERFACE
National Marine Electronics Association
Number of Bits
Not connected/normally closed (break contact)
Normally opened (make contact)
O
ONP
ONN
24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with positive potential

24 V ON/OFF signal, wire with negative potential (no ground potential)
P
PCB
PCI
PCI
PMB
PPI
PRF
PWM
Peripheral Component Interconnect

Pentium Motherboard
Plan Position Indicator
Pulse Repetition Frequency
Pulse Width Modulation
R
Rev.
RDC
RF
RGB
RKE
ROT
RPM
RSC
Revision (as-delivered status), see Section 1.2

Radar Data Converter
Radio Frequency
Red Green Blue
Remote Keyboard Electronics
Rate of Turn
Revolutions per Minute
Radar Scan Converter
S
SCSI
SI
SRAM
STC
Small Computer System Interface

Ships Interface = Interface Expander
Static Random Access Memory
Sensitivity Time Control => Sea (Sea Clutter)
T
TFT
T/R
TCU
TM
TVA
Thin Film Transistor

Transmitter/Receiver
Transmitter Control Unit
True Motion
Trigger Video Azimuth (Combined Video)
V
VDR
Voyage Data Recorder
Technical Manual
Printed Circuit Board

Processor-Controlled Interswitch, current designation: Interswitch
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_akv.fm / 06.09.05
1 General

Technical Manual
1.1 Software Releases
General
This Technical Manual is the technical reference manual for:
RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100
-
Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box

Operating Units
NOTE:
To avoid longwinded phrases, the MULTIPILOT 1100 and the RADARPILOT 1100 are named "radar" in
this manual. The names MULTIPILOT, CHARTRADAR and RADARPILOT are used when it is of interest.
1.1
Software Releases
As soon as important software updates can be delivered, they are mentioned in Section 7.
1.2
Hardware Versions
All pcbs and units are labelled with a sticker which shows the revision (Rev.) and the print version (for
pcbs only). Modifications on a pcb or a unit cause a new revision which is marked by a figure (-, 01, 02,
03...). The numbering of the revision is continuous, even when a new print is used for a pcb. If no revision
is marked, the first revision number on the label is valid.
ztr1_139.jpg
The print version of a pcb is marked by means of characters. The original version is marked with "-"; the
following versions are marked with A, B, C, ... . Sometimes it is possible to update pcbs with an older
print version to a higher revision, and so the print version is not a reliable characteristic for the revision
of a pcb.
Rev., marked by "X"
Fig. 1-1
Order No.
Item No. of Serial No.

the complete
pcb with all
components
Version label
ztr1_179.jpg
The pcbs are marked with their print version. The revision status is not recognizable.
Item No. of the pcb itself,

without any components
Fig. 1-2
Print version
Pcb labelling
If an item has to be exchanged, the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Refer to Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
15
1 General
1.3 General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work
1.3
Technical Manual
General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work

SAM Electronics gives advice and recommendations for the arrangement of SAM Electronics equipment
and the installation sites. A prerequisite is that the necessary drawings of the ship should be made available in good time.
This advice and these recommendations are given on the basis of our up-to-date practical experience
and to the best of our knowledge. However, they are given without any commitment. As far as is permissible, any liability on the part of SAM Electronics for resulting damage is expressly ruled out, regardless
of whether the damage is of a direct or indirect nature.
Unusual shipbuilding shapes, additions or superstructures as well as environmental influences can impair
the functioning of the equipment. We are, of course, willing to help the customer with optimizing solutions
subject to suitable commercial arrangements.
The customer is responsible for ensuring that SAM Electronics equipment is installed properly according
to our instructions and in compliance with the regulations issued by the relevant classification society and
national authorities.
1.4
Safety Warnings
WARNING
This unit contains electrostatic sensitive devices.
Observe precautions for handling.
The discharge of electrostatic energy into a semiconductor can destroy the semiconductor or change its
properties. Before a units housing is opened to remove or touch a board, the service equipment, Order
No. 586-5011, must be used.
1.
The mat must be positioned at the workplace.
2.
The potential equalization cable must be connected to the snap fastener and the clamp to a suitable
protective earth contact. The cable contains a 1 M resistor which must not be removed.
3.
The wrist band must be put on. When the spiral cable is connected to the snap fastener, the
discharge line is established.
4.
Thoroughly grounded soldering, measurement and test tools must be used. If these tools are
supplied with power from the 230 VAC mains, this supply must be protected by a fault current plug,
stock No. 593-8099.
Boards and units that contain ESD-endangered semiconductors are marked with the symbol shown
above.
All assisting persons who might come into contact with the endangered boards must also use the ESD
equipment.
16
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
1 General

Technical Manual
1.4 Safety Warnings
DANGER
It is not permissible to connect the ships mains to the
system before setting-to-work by a qualified technician.
The mains must be switched off (e.g. by means of a
common isolating switch or a circuit breaker) in the ships
supply or the mains cable must be disconnected until
setting-to-work takes place.
If a synchro or a stepper is connected, dangerous voltages
might be present, even although all supplies to the radar
system are switched off.
Capacitors and tubes can store dangerous voltages for
several hours, even when they have been disconnected
from the supply voltage.
The man aloft switch in the Gearbox switches only the
mains supply for the motor, and so dangerous voltages are
present, even when the switch is set to position 0.
WARNING
Pay attention to the regulations for the prevention of accidents.
DANGER
Even when the system is switched off, there might be a
dangerous voltage present on exposed contacts. Therefore,
before a unit is opened, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to all units is, and remains, disconnected from
the ships mains.
DANGER
If the Scanner is stationary because the system is switched
off or because the radar has been switched into stand-by
mode, then unless the man aloft switch is set to 0 the
Scanner might begin to rotate at any time.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
17
1 General
Technical Manual
1.5 Dangerous High Frequency Radiation
1.5
Dangerous High Frequency Radiation

DANGER
When the Scanner is rotating, there is a danger caused by
high frequency radiation. Do not connect the system to the
ships mains before setting-to-work by a qualified technician.
During normal operation, the transmitter is automatically
switched off with a delay of 30 s, before if the speed of the
Scanner continuously falls short of 50% of its nominal
speed. This function is disabled, if the service mode is activated (switch S1/8 on the RDC or S1/8 on the TCU)!
DANGER
Never look down into the open waveguide while the transmitter is active. Therefore, before any work in the cabling
is done, it must be ensured that the electrical supply to the
unit is, and remains, disconnected from the ships mains.
There are no international standards concerning the danger caused by high frequency radiation of the
kind produced by the radar antenna. In most countries, a radiation density exceeding 100 W/m is
regarded as dangerous. In some countries, values over 10 W/m are regarded as being not completely
safe.
The distances from the various antennas of the radar at which the radiation density is 100 W/m and
10 W/m, respectively, are stated in the following table.
Distance
Scanner type
5 ft X-Band
8 ft X-Band
14 ft S-Band
1.6
Transceiver
Radiation density
100 W/m
Radiation density
10 W/m
NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A
1.4 m
14 m
NG3028, 25 kW, Version A
2.1 m
21 m
NG3028, 25 kW, Version B
1.65 m
16 m
NG3028, 12.5 kW, Version A
0.65 m
7m
1.3 m
13 m
0.9 m
9m
1.3 m
13 m
0.7 m
7.8 m
Safety Switches
The safety switches are located inside and below the Gearbox/Transceiver. Refer to the technical manual
of the Gearbox/Transceiver for further information.
18
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e01.fm / 06.09.05
2 Overview

Technical Manual
Overview
The following drawing shows the structure of the radar system. It consists of 3 main groups of assemblies:
The Indicator, consisting of the Display Electronics Unit, including the Monitor and the Operating Unit
(various versions available).
The Transceiver, which can be installed in the Gearbox (Version A, "Transmitter Up") or at a
distance from the Gearbox in a housing of its own (Version B, "Transmitter Down").
The Antenna Unit, consisting of the Gearbox and the Scanner.
8 ft X-Band
5 ft X-Band
14 ft S-Band
Gearbox/
Scanner
Gearbox
X-Band
Gearbox
X-Band
Gearbox
S-Band
Transceiver
X-Band
Transceiver,
12.5 kW
X-Band
Transceiver,
25 kW
Version A
(Transceiver mounted
in the Gearbox,
"Transmitter Up")
S-Band
Transceiver,
30 kW
or
X-Band
Transceiver,
25 kW
Display
Electronics Unit
Display
Electronics Unit
ARPA
EPA
Interconnection
Box
ztr1_007.eps
19
Monitor
Interconnection
Box
250 mm
PPI,
TFT
23.1"
Monitor
Radar
Keyboard
(optional)
BD 3027
Gyro
Log
Position
NMEA
AIS, Analog Gyro and Pulse Log
via optional Analog Interface
COM-Expander
Audio Alarm Off, Alarm (reserve)
Dead Man Alarm, ARPA Alarm,
Chart Alarm, System Alarm
Interswitch (PCI)
CHARTPILOT (via Ethernet LAN)
Slave Monitor via
optional Video Buffer/RGB Buffer
340 mm
PPI,
TFT
Version B
(Transceiver mounted
in a bulkhead housing,
"Transmitter Down")
Display Electronics Unit

and Interconnection Box
GE 3062/64/65
VS 3034G030
Indicator Electronics
as console version, desktop
version or shipyard kit.
Monitors/
Operating Units
TRACKPILOT
Keyboard
(optional)
BD 3027
Trackball
BD 3028
Fig. 2-1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band
Transceiver,
30 kW
System overview
19
2 Overview
Technical Manual
2.1 Nomenclature
2.1
Nomenclature
The nomenclature shows the versions of Gearbox, Transceiver and Indicator for the Radar 1100 series.
ztr1_166.eps
RADARPILOT
CHARTRADAR
MULTIPILOT
Options:
0 = no options
1 = TRACKPILOT
Display Size (TFT Monitors):
PPI
Size
2 = 250 mm 19.0"
9 = 340 mm 23.1"
Plotting Aid:
AIS/EPA = manual (not for MULTIPILOT)
AIS/ARPA = automatic
Fig. 2-2
20
1102 / ARPA - 2A8X
Antenna Size:
5 X = 5 ft X-Band
8 X = 8 ft X-Band
14S = 14 ft S-Band
Transceiver Position:
A = Gearbox (up)
B = Bulkhead (down)
Transceiver Type:
1 = 12.5 kW X-Band
2 = 25 kW X-Band
3 = 30 kW S-Band
Nomenclature
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2 Overview
Technical Manual
2.2 Indicator
2.2
Indicator
2.2.1
Versions
The Indicator consists of the Display Electronics Unit GE3062 (RADARPILOT 1100), GE3064 (CHARTRADAR 1100) or GE3065 (MULTIPILOT 1100), the Interconnection Box VS3034, the Monitor AZ30XX,
the Operating Unit with the Trackball BD3028 and the optional Keyboards BD3027. Depending on the
version, the Display Electronics Unit is mounted together with the Interconnection Box in a console
housing or it is mounted separately. The Interconnection Box can be mounted below the Display Electronics Unit or separated from it (stand-alone version with cover).
The Display Electronics Unit for the RADARPILOT is available in two different electronic versions:
ARPA (corresponding to IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to
IEC 60872-2)
On customer request, it is possible to configure the radar as True Motion (TM) radar (contains
EPA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-3)
The Display Electronics Unit for the MULTIPILOT always has the ARPA functionality (corresponding to
IEC 60872-1, also contains ATA functionality corresponding to IEC 60872-2)
The following mechanical versions are available:
TFT shipyard installation kit:
Chassis-monitor with mounting kit
Operating Unit (consists of the Trackball or a holder plate equipped with Keyboards / Trackball
corresponding to the order with additional shielding plate)
Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a separate Interconnection Box.
Desktop version prepared for horizontal surfaces:
Desktop housing with integrated monitor with or without Operating Unit
Display Electronics Unit in a separate housing with mounted Interconnection Box or with a separate Interconnection Box.
Console versions:
19" TFT version completely mounted in a 550 mm console
19"/23.1" TFT version completely mounted in a 700 mm console
The following monitors are available:
Radar (PPI) size
Resolution
TFT Monitor type
250 mm
340 mm
1280x1024
1280x1024 (960)
19" AZ3068G051
23.1" AZ3063G050
or
AZ3069G040
It is possible to connect up to three slave monitors via the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 or further slave
monitors via an additional Video Buffer SH3023. The required technical specifications for these slave
monitors depend on the settings of the Graphics And Video Processor. Ask the SAM Electronics
customer support for suitable combinations. A slave monitor can get damaged if it is driven with the
wrong parameters.
Depending on the installation location, the Display Electronics Unit can be installed as a package with the
Interconnection Box (e.g. in the console housings) or both units separately. In both versions, the housings
of the units stay the same. The Interconnection Box is given an additional cover as a stand-alone unit.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
21
2.2 Indicator
Technical Manual
ztr1_013.jpg
2 Overview
Fig. 2-3
2.2.2
Display Electronics Unit with Interconnection Box, disassembled
Interfaces
Indicator Serial Interfaces for Ships Sensors

The Display Electronics Unit provides four serial interfaces (RS422), which are compatible with
IEC 61162-1 and IEC 61162-2. For a dual installation, these interfaces are available for other purposes,
such as redundancy or extension, because the data of the sensor inputs of one radar are available for
the other radars of a system, too.
By means of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216, the four interfaces can be adapted also to RS232,
RS422, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY). The type of each interface can be defined by means of plugin interface cards.
The interfaces are available at the Interconnection Box. See Section 4.5.9 on page 64 for further information.
Additional Sensor Interfaces
It is possible to install an Analog Interface or a COM Expander (it is not possible to install both in the
same Interconnection Box) in the Interconnection Box.
22
Analog Interface for log/gyro, AIS

The Analog Interface GE3044G207 offers a gyro interface (AC/DC), a pulse log interface and a
serial interface for the connection of an AIS. It is mounted inside the Interconnection Box. For further
information, see Section 4.5.10 on page 68.
COM Expander with serial interfaces

The COM Expander GE3044G210 offers five serial interfaces (inputs/outputs) which can be adapted
to RS232, RS422, RS485, TTL and 20 mA current loop (TTY) or for the connection e.g. of an AIS,
a unit with an NMEA interface or a bridge alarm system. For further information, see Section 4.5.12
on page 88.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
2 Overview
Technical Manual
2.2 Indicator
Interswitch
If the system exceeds the size of a dual installation, an Interswitch (former called PCI) must be integrated
to switch the video signal (TVA) of the chosen Transceiver to the Indicator actually being operated.
The Interswitch is mounted in a separate housing (GE3023).
RGB Buffer/Video Switch
As a further option, an RGB Buffer, e.g. for the connection of up to three slave monitors, can be installed.
It is mounted in the Interconnection Box. Alternatively, it is possible to connect more slave monitors via
the 5-Channel Video Switch SH3023.
If slave Operating Units are needed or in case of a distant installation, the so-called RKE is needed. A
separate technical manual exists for the RKE.
Alarm Outputs
For the connection of an external (central) alarm system, there are potential-free switch contacts (inputs
and outputs).
2.2.3
Operating Units
ztr1_017.jpg
The Operating Unit is divided into three sections. To operate the radar functions, only the Trackball unit
is necessary. To improve the handling, an additional Radar Keyboard is available. For the integration into
a NACOS system, the Operating Unit is extended by addition of the Trackpilot Keyboard, which includes
the steering joystick.
Fig. 2-4
Console Operating Unit with all Keyboards
For service purposes, the Radar Keyboard and/or the Trackpilot Keyboard can be replaced by a standard
PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector. By means of this keyboard, it is possible to enter numeric values
and to parameterize the system in a more convenient way.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
23
2 Overview

Technical Manual
2.3 Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment
2.2.4
Monitors
The monitors are not covered by this manual. For further information, see the technical manuals
for the monitor.
Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS 1) equipment
2.3
For the CHARTRADAR 1100, see Section 2.5.

RADAR equipment:
The following combinations with SAM Electronics equipment are possible/not possible:
The RADAR 9xxx transmitter or transmitters of older radar series cannot be used with a 1100 series
Display Electronics Unit.
The RADAR 9xxx Display Electronics Unit or display electronics of older radar series cannot be
used with a 1100 series Display Electronics Unit.
The RADAR 1000 transmitter can be used with the 1100 series Display Electronics Unit if the hardware components are of a specified revision status (see the technical documentation of the antenna
(GR3017/GR3018) and Transceiver (NG3028/NG3029)).
NACOS equipment:
-
Connection of a TRACKPILOT 1100 or ENGINE INTERFACE

The TRACKPILOT 9401 cannot be connected.
The RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT 1100 cannot be integrated in the NACOS xx-2, xx-3

and xx-4 systems.
2.4
Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100

A CHARTPILOT 1100 must be integrated in a system with a MULTIPILOT 1100, because the chart maintenance can be performed only at a CHARTPILOT.
1)
24
Navigation and Command System
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
2.5
2 Overview
2.5 CHARTRADAR 1100
CHARTRADAR 1100
The hardware of the CHARTRADAR 1100 is the same as the hardware of the RADARPILOT 1100, but
it is necessary to enable the CHARTRADAR software functionalities by means of an authorization code.
Either the radar can be delivered as a CHARTRADAR 1100 ex works or a RADARPILOT 1100 can be
updated if the prerequisites of Section 2.5.2 are fulfilled.
2.5.1
Functionalities
-
Display of vector seacharts additionally to the radar video in the PPI.
Conning Display
2.5.2
2.5.3
Prerequisites
-
The radar must be licensed by means of an authorization code ex works, or the authorization code
must be ordered from the manufacturer. See Section 5 for further information.
Ethernet network adapter to connect the CHARTRADAR by means of the Ethernet LAN to a
CHARTPILOT 1100.
At least one CHARTPILOT 1100 must be installed in the system.
Vector chart data installed at the CHARTPILOT
The conning display should be activated only, if a TRACKPILOT and an ENGINE INTERFACE are
connected, because without these systems there is not enough data available to be displayed.
User Chart Objects

User Chart Objects which have been generated on a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 can be displayed on
the radar without the CHARTRADAR licensing. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT must be configured
as a connected planning system (see Section 5.11.5 on page 114) and the CHARTPILOT must be configured as a chartserver (see the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05
25
2 Overview
Technical Manual
2.6 AIS
2.6
AIS
It is possible to connect an AIS electronics unit to the radar. For further information, see the operating
manual of the radar and the technical manual of the UAIS Electronics Unit DEBEG 3400. If other AIS
systems are used, the minimum demands concerning functionality and interfacing corresponding to the
regulations are fulfilled.
SAM
SAM
GPS
Antenna
VHF
Antenna
Ship's
sensor data
RS 422
Ship's
sensor data
Display
Electronics Unit
CAN Bus
Interconnection
Box
Ship's
sensor data
Interconnection
Box
1
Sensor Input
2
)
3 Channels *
RS 422
Display
Electronics Unit
RS 422
UAIS
Electronics Unit
with Analog Interface

Prim. Display
or COM Expander
Port
or
Ethernet
LAN
Ethernet LAN
24 VDC
)
Gyro: HDT, ROT

Speedlog (bottom-track): VBW
Position Sensor: GLL, VTG, DTM
CHARTPILOT 1100
ztr1_601.eps
All data are transferred with a

repetition rate of 1 Hz (IEC 61162-1)
except of DTM (0.1 Hz)
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR/
MULTIPILOT 1100
Fig. 2-5
RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR
/MULTIPILOT 1100
Connection of an UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 is connected to the Interconnection Box. The ships sensors are connected to
the radars/MULTIPILOTs. The sensor data are transferred from the radar(s) to the AIS (in dual or multiple
installations, from two radars or MULTIPILOTs as redundancy, if possible).
The repetition interval of the ships sensor data is set automatically if the Indicators serial interface is
configured as the AIS Navigation Data interface.
It is also possible to connect the AIS by means of the Ethernet LAN. All CHARTPILOT systems receive
the AIS data via the Ethernet LAN. If the AIS Electronics Unit is not connected to the LAN, only the activated targets can be displayed at the CHARTPILOT. If the AIS Electronics Unit is connected to the LAN,
the complete AIS functionality is also available at the CHARTPILOT.
2.7
VDR DEBEG 4300

The VDR DEBEG 4300 can be connected to the Ethernet LAN. For the configuration of the 1100 series
system which is necessary for the connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300, see Section 5.5 on page 97.
For the configuration/setting-to-work of the VDR, see the documentation of the VDR.
26
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e02.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Installation Recommendations
3.1
General Recommendations
3.1.1
Cables
3 Installation Recommendations
3.1 General Recommendations
Cable types, cable data, maximum cable length, special instructions for cable laying and connection
details are defined in the Cabling Documents of the corresponding equipment (consisting of schematic
diagram, remarks, cable list and connection diagram).
Interface connections should be discussed and agreed with SAM Electronics.
In order to ensure proper functioning of the equipment, the cable types should be selected according to
the cable lists.
In general, the following points must be taken into account:
-
For the cables inside the units (cabinets), an extra length of 1 metre is necessary at each end. If
the height of the unit exceeds 0.5 metre, an extension by 1 m plus the height of the cabinet is necessary.
The cables must be marked by the electrician at both ends with the cable numbers corresponding
to the SAM Electronics cabling documents.
Where necessary, particular cable glands - marked with letters and/or numbers - are assigned to
the cables.
The identification letters and numbers are stated in the connection diagrams; they are either fixed to
the unit or can be seen from the outline drawings (...BZ or ...MB).
All cables should be kept as short as possible, especially coaxial cables to minimize attenuation of
signal.
All connectors installed outdoors (e.g. on coaxial cables) should be waterproof by design to protect
against water penetration into the cable.
Coaxial cables should be installed in separate signal cable channels/tubes and at least 10 cm away
from power supply cables. Crossing of cables should be done at right angles (90). Coaxial cables
should not be exposed to sharp bends, which may lead to change the characteristic impedance of
the cable. The minimum bend radius should be 5 times the cables outside diameter.
It must be ensured that all cables - including their screens - are passed into the units in continuous lengths and are not terminated before reaching the destination equipment. This is not valid
for the use of cable glands with grounding inserts.
The cables must be prepared by means of a wire (0.5...1.0 mm, length: 800 mm) as shown in Figure
3-1. The wire has to be connected at the shielding terminal contact.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
27
Technical Manual
1.
ztr1_196.jpg
3.
4.
ztr1_198.jpg
ztr1_197.jpg
ztr1_153.jpg
2.
Fig. 3-1
Preparation of the cable endings
When putting the cables into cable glands with grounding inserts, the procedure described must
be followed (see Figure 3-2).
Coaxial cables must be grounded at the cable gland or cable entry of the
housing and at the suitable terminal.
The internal diameter of the sealing ring (1) must be adjusted to the cable diameter. The screen
braiding (2) must be pushed over the anti-cone (3) of the grounding insert. Then the cone (4)
must be put into position. The screen foil (5) must be protected against tearing by means of
28
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
insulating tape (6) before it is unwound. Form a kind of wire from the unwound part of the foil
and crimp a connector (7) to the end. The gland must be screwed tight. If the gland is screwed
tight with too much strength, it can happen that the screen braiding is cut.
ztr_176.jpg
as short as
possible
ztr_180.jpg
Fig. 3-2
ztr_178.jpg
Cable glands with grounding inserts
With the use of cable glands without grounding inserts, the screen braiding inside the unit must
be plaited to form a "pigtail", terminated by a cable terminal, and connected to the prescribed
grounding terminal. It must be ensured that the grounding lead is kept as short as possible.
In the case of a unit whose cable inlet consists of a hole with brackets attached on the inside
and outside, the cable must be dressed as shown in Figure 3-3.
With multicore cables, it is useful to strip down and lace the single wires according to the terminal
sequence.
Receptacle-type cable terminals included in the delivery must be crimped to the connecting leads
by means of a suitable pair of AMP pliers. If a terminal board of a unit has no tabs for the abovementioned receptacles, other suitable cable terminals must be used.
Existing cable grippers in the units must be used.
All cable connections must be carefully checked after completion of the cable work and all cable
screens must be grounded via the shortest possible connections - if not stated otherwise in the
Cabling Documents/Connection Diagram.
All cables must be secured by means of suitable clamps (pull-relief) before entering the units.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
29
Technical Manual
When soldering stripped coaxial cables to connectors, it must be ensured that the central
conductor and the screening do not produce a short circuit. A short-circuit check after installation is
advisable.
It must be ensured that cables do not block any moving parts within a unit.
Stuffing tubes exposed to the open air must, without fail, be sealed with compound.
Power leads must be protected by "slow-blow" fuses according to their cross section.
Brackets
Installation cables
FMGCH, FMKHC, MGCH etc.
Metal clamp inside
ztr1_072.gif
35+5
Fig. 3-3
3.1.1.1
Screen braid laid back over outer sheathing;

contact with the brackets via metal clamp
Metal clamp outside
Cable inlet consisting of a hole with brackets
Maximum Cable Length
Coaxial Cable for TVA Signal

The maximum length of the TVA cable must not exceed 300 m. For a length of more than 150 m, see
the description of the IF-Amplifier in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
CAN Bus
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 0 must not exceed a length of 500 m between the termination resistors
when a cable FMGCH or FMKHC is used.
The CAN bus cabling of CAN 1 must not exceed a length of 100 m.
Ethernet LAN
The Ethernet LAN thin wire cabling must not exceed a length of 185 m.
Video Cable (RGB Buffer)
The video cable (VGA) which is connected to the RGB Buffer must not exceed a length of 50 m.
30
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
3.1.1.2
Cable Sets
Cable sets for the standard-cables of X/S-Band installations are no longer available. The cables can be
ordered in the required length by means of the following order numbers:
Cable type
3.1.2
Order No. of the individual items
Coaxial Cable
Draka 1.0/4.8 AF FRNC
(former TELASS 100 PE)
300006082
(535-1708)
Cable (8-core)
FMKHC 4x2x0.75
(former FMGCH)
300005306
(535-4461)
Electronics Units
Dimensions, weights, spaces required for service and maintenance and special installation instructions
are stated in the outline drawings and installation drawings of the corresponding unit. In general, the
following points also apply:
-
The useful life of the components of all electronics units (display units, pulse generators, Transceivers etc.) generally decreases with increasing ambient temperature; it is therefore advisable to
install such units in air-conditioned rooms. If there are no such facilities - e.g. deckhouse or space
near or below the water line - these rooms must at least be dry, adequately ventilated and kept at a
suitable temperature in order to prevent the formation of condensation inside these units.
With most electronic units, cooling takes place via the surface of the casing.
The cooling must not be impaired by partial covering of the unit as a result of insulation (if any) of
the room (the wall on which the casing is mounted), or by installation of the unit in a confined
cabinet.
Furthermore, the distance from the ceiling and the floor or from a unit situated underneath must be
at least 500 mm.
For service purposes, a power socket (AC 220/230 V) and adequate lighting are necessary in the
vicinity of each electronics unit.
In the area of the wheel house, the distance of each electronics unit from the magnetic standard
compass or the magnetic steering compass must not be less than the permitted magnetic protection distance.
This distance is measured from the centre of the magnetic system of the compass to the nearest
point on the corresponding unit concerned.
Units which are to be used on the bridge wing must be installed inside the "wing control console" protected against the weather - if they do not at least comply with the enclosure type IP 56. In order
to avoid misting of the viewing screen, 25 ... 50 W console-heating (power depending on the volume)
is recommended.
When selecting the site of a unit, the maximum cable lengths have to be considered according to
the notes in the cabling documents (remarks, cable list).
The accessibility for maintenance and service (stated in the outline drawings or installation drawings) must be considered.
The impairment of a digital read-out or a display screen by direct light from lamps or the sun must
be avoided. Rear windows must be blacked out by means of roller blinds or venetian blinds.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
31
Technical Manual
Disturbing reflections on the screen of a display caused by pilot lamps and illuminated signs must
be prevented by suitable measures (screening or relocating).
When a unit is being installed, the base, floor or bulkhead must be checked to ensure that it is
flat in order to avoid twisting of the unit when the fixing screws are tightened, because such twisting
would impair mechanical functions. Any unevenness should be compensated for by means of
spacing-washers.
The grounding screws of the units must be connected to the body of the ship (ground); the wire
used should have a cross-sectional area of at least 6 mm.
Aboard fibreglass (GRP) vessels, a "grounding network" with a high conductance - taking into
consideration the working frequencies of the other equipment - must be provided in order to achieve
satisfactory EMC (electromagnetic compatibility).
In the interests of safety during maintaining or servicing, the shipyard should provide a common
isolating switch or circuit breaker (in conjunction with a contactor, if necessary) for all interconnected equipment.
Transportation damage, even if apparently insignificant at first glance, must immediately be examined and be reported to the freight carrier. The moment of setting-to-work of the equipment is too
late, not only for reporting the damage but also for the supply of replacements.
The equipment should never be switched on by the electricians who did the installation work
- not even just for a moment - never!
This is a job for the authorized SAM Electronics service engineer.
3.1.3
After hand-over of the equipment in good operating condition to the customer, the Installation
Report (Annex of the Warranty Certificate) should be filled in completely and then forwarded to SAM
Electronics as proof of such fulfilment. It is important that these requirements be fulfilled in order to
avoid the risk of losing the warranty.
Indicator
All radar indicators in the wheel house must be installed in such a way that the radar observer faces in
the forward direction of the ship.
In the case of ferries and special-purpose vessels, the authorities (e.g. the BSH) may permit exceptions
to this rule.
3.1.4
Monitors
General
32
1.
The SAM Electronics radar and navigation equipment monitors have been type-tested and are
approved only in the original as-delivered condition in accordance with IMO Resolution A.694(17);
they fulfil the test and approval conditions as per IEC 60945 and DIN EN 60945 ("B - protected from
the weather").
2.
Changes in the monitors, such as the removal of casings or the closing of existing ventilation openings, or improper mounting of the monitors, such as installation in a different casing, will lead to loss
of approval; furthermore, our warranty for any resulting damage or malfunctions will become null and
void.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
3.
Please note: Even although the test conditions for bridge units provide for a maximum operating
temperature of 55C, continuous operation of all electronic components should, if possible, take
place at ambient temperatures of only 25C. This is a necessary prerequisite for long life and low
service costs.
Installation, Mounting of Monitors

1.
Most monitors are intended for various methods of installation or mounting (mounting on the
pedestal/panel, desktop or fixed mounting, or bracket mounting to allow tilting for service purposes);
for details, please see the relevant installation drawings.
When monitors are mounted side by side or next to a panel wall (for example), the tilting bracket for
service purposes is mandatory.
2.
Existing vibration or shock absorbers must not be removed.
3.
Adequate ventilation is a necessary prerequisite for the life of the electronic components. The air
inlet and outlet openings marked in the installation drawings must definitely be kept clear; coverings
which restrict ventilation are not permissible.
4.
Exposure to direct sunlight can cause a considerable increase in the temperature of the unit, and
might under certain circumstances lead to excess temperature. This point should already be borne
in mind when the bridge equipment is being planned (sun shades, distance from the windows, ventilation, ...).
5.
The space stated in the installation drawings as being necessary for ventilation, for cable inlets, for
the operating procedures and for maintenance, must be provided.
6.
If the pushbuttons of the monitor are not illuminated, an external, dimmable illumination (e.g. gooseneck light) is required for navigational use.
7.
The installation of additional active electronic components in the units or in the pedestals is not
permissible.
8.
Information about necessary pull-relievers for cables is given in the installation drawings. Attention
must be paid to this information so that cable breaks will not occur, e.g. during service work.
Ergonomics
1.
For observation of the screens both from a sitting position and from a standing position, a monitor
inclination of about 30 to 40 (mounting of the monitors on a surface inclined at an angle of about
30 to 40) has turned out to be favourable. This does not apply to monitors in bridge wing panels.
For this purpose, as well as for the operating areas, the rules of the classification society concerned
must in all cases be incorporated into the planning.
2.
The brightness of monitors is limited. Sunlight passing directly through the bridge windows - or its
reflection - which falls upon the screen workplaces must be reduced by suitable means (negatively
inclined window surfaces, venetian blinds, distance from the windows, dark colouring of the deckhead, ...).
3.
Monitors in the bridge wing area must be installed or mounted by suitable alignment or bulkhead/
deckhead mounting in such a way that reflections of light from the front pane of the monitor are not
directed into the observer's viewing direction.
4.
The use of ordinary commercial filter plates or filter films is not permitted for items of equipment that
require approval (by optical effects, "aids" of that kind can suppress small radar targets, for
example).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
33
Technical Manual
3.2 Specific Recommendations
3.2
Specific Recommendations
3.2.1
Internal Cabling / Prefabricated Cables

The cables between the Display Electronics Unit, the Interconnection Box and the monitor are prefabricated. They are marked with numbers which correspond to the numbers of the connectors. See also
Section 4.5.3.3 on page 51.
3.2.2
Recommendations Concerning the Ships Sensors / Redundancy

The RDC offers 4 RS422 interfaces for ships sensors which can be converted to RS232, RS485, TTL
and TTY by means of plug-in pcbs on the Interconnection Board. It is advisable to use the interfaces as
shown in Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-5, which describes the connection of the ships sensors to the Interconnection Board in a single installation and in a dual installation.
Single Installation
Gyro
Interface 1
Log
Interface 2
ztr1_118.eps
Interconnection
Board
Fig. 3-4
34
Position Sensor 1
Interface 3
Position Sensor 2
Interface 4
Typical connection of ships sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, single installation
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Dual Installation
Display Electronics Unit 1
Gyro *)
Output 1
Output 2
Interface 1
Log *)
Output 1
Output 2
Interface 2
Interconnection
Board
Position Sensor 1
Interface 3
Other Sensors
Interface 4
*)
with two electrically
separated outputs

Redundancy
Redundancy
Interface 1
Interface 2
ztr1_637.eps
Interconnection
Board
Fig. 3-5
Position Sensor 2
Interface 3
Other Sensors
Interface 4
Typical connection of ships sensors with serial interfaces to the RDC, dual installation
For further information, see the cabling diagrams in Section 12 and the description of the RDC in Section
4.5.4, page 53.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
35
Technical Manual
For ships sensors with Analog Interfaces, the Analog Interface must be used. The system can also
contain two Analog Interfaces for redundancy purposes.
Single Installation without Redundancy
Position Sensor 1
Output
Connection Board
RDC pcb
ztr1_162.eps
Nav Bus
Gyro
Gyro interface
Log
Log interface
Analog
Interface
AIS
Fig. 3-6
Typical connection of ships sensors to the Analog Interface without redundancy
Dual Installation with Redundancy

Output 1
Position Sensor 1*) Output 2
*)
with two electrically
separated outputs
Interconnection Board
RDC pcb
RDC pcb

Nav Bus
Gyro
Gyro interface
Log
Log interface
ztr1_638.eps
Analog
Interface 1
Fig. 3-7
36
Gyro interface
Log interface
AIS
*)
Analog
Interface 2
*)
Connect to Analog Interface 2
The AIS must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces
Typical connection of ships sensors to the Analog Interface with redundancy
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
3.2.3
Recommendations Concerning the Connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400
Connection via RS422 Interface:

In a single installation, an Analog Interface or a COM Expander must be provided to connect the AIS
system. If a second Analog Interface exists (usually in dual or multiple installations for redundancy
connection of an analog gyro), the AIS must be connected to the Analog Interface 2 (usually at Indicator No. 2).
The AIS electronics unit must not be connected to both Analog Interfaces!
In dual or multiple installations with an analog gyro it is recommended that two Analog Interfaces be
used to achieve redundancy of the ships sensors (see Section 3.2.2).
Connection via Ethernet LAN:
The AIS can be connected via Ethernet LAN, so that it is not necessary to install an Analog Interface.
3.2.4
Recommendations Concerning the Compass Interface

ATTENTION
Setting the compass input to serial IEC 61162-1 data
(HDT message with 4800 Baud and 1 Hz repetition rate) will
result in degradation of stabilization smoothness. Therefore such compass installations should only be used for
stabilization purposes of EPA radars.
For any installation which is required to meet the IEC 60872-1 (ARPA) or
IEC 60872-2 (ATA) specification, the serial data of the gyro compass
must conform to the IEC 61162-2 standard. The interface shall provide a
heading data update rate of at least 20 Hz for normal radar and 40 Hz for
HSC radar.
ATTENTION (compass systems with synchro transmission)
Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degradation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore
this setting should not be used where:
-
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
the radar installation has to meet the IMO/IEC Radar Performance

Standards
type approval certification is required
the ARPA option is fitted.
37
3.2.5

Technical Manual
Recommendations Concerning the Position Systems

It must be noted that the necessary accuracy is achieved only if all positions used relate to
the same chart datum, preferably WGS 84.
1)
38
When using a planning system, position coordinates obtained from a chart with a datum deviating
from WGS 84 can be converted to WGS 84 map and track data.
The only position receivers that may be connected to the radar system or NACOS system are those
that output the position values in the geographical reference system WGS84 via an interface as per
IEC 61162-1 1).
If the radar is installed in conjunction with a navigation system (NACOS/TRACKPILOT), see the
appropriate manuals.
This part of IEC 61162 is closely aligned with NMEA 0183 Version 2.3 dated March 1, 1998
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e03.fm / 06.09.05
4 Functional Description

Technical Manual
4.1 Block Diagram
Functional Description
4.1
Block Diagram
The radar system can be extended to up to five MULTIPILOT or RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100
units. If there are more than two Display Electronics Units or Transceivers in one system, it is necessary
to use an Interswitch in a separate housing to switch the radar videos (TVA signals). The "power on"
concept stays the same.
The optional Interswitch and the Analog Interface are permanently connected to the ships mains.
SAM
SAM
Gearbox
Gearbox
Transceiver
(Version A/B) with power supply
and relay
Transceiver
(Version A/B) with power supply
and relay
1-ph / 3-ph
Ship's Mains
1-ph / 3-ph
Ship's Mains
AIS
CAN 1, Nav Bus

CAN 0, Radar Bus
Ships
Data
Log
GPS
NMEA
Ships
Data
TVA 1 out
TVA 2 out
Gyro
TVA
CAN 0
Power On
Mains
TVA 1 out
TVA 2 out
Gyro
in
Display Electronics
GE3062/64/65
CAN 1, Nav Bus

CAN 0, Radar Bus
CH1...5 CAN 0
CH1
...
CH5
out
Interswitch
3 Radars
(optional)
Log
GPS
NMEA
Mains
TVA
CAN 0
Power On
Display Electronics
GE3062/64/65
with optional
Analog Interface or
COM-Expander
with optional
Analog Interface or
COM-Expander
RGB
RGB
Buffer
(optional)
PowerOn
Signal
PowerOn
Signal
RGB
RGB RGB
Mains
Mains
Monitor
AZ 30xx
Monitor
AZ 30xx
To SlaveMonitor
Data (PS/2)
ztr1_005.eps
Data (PS/2)
Operating Unit
BD3027
Fig. 4-1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Operating Unit
BD3027
Block diagram with wiring concept
39
Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept
4.2
"Power On" Concept
Transceiver Electronics Unit 1
Transceiver Electronics Unit 2
Mains
Input Unit
Mains
Input Unit
Ship's mains
24V ON/OFF (ONP/ONN)
Ship's mains
Monitor
Monitor
Power
switch
Power
switch
Ship's mains
TB13
Ship's Mains
TB10
T1
TB4
Interconnection
Box
CR1
TB13
TB5
Ship's mains
TB3
TB4
Ship's mains
Interconnection
Box
CR1
24V ON/OFF
(ONP/ONN)
TB3
K1
TB11
Ship's mains

ztr1_060.eps
TB5
T1
24V ON/OFF
(ONP/ONN)
from/to
other
units
TB10
K1
TB11
Ship's mains
Fig. 4-2
"Power on" concept
The system is switched on by means of the mains power switch of the master monitor. The master
monitor is supplied with power by the Interconnection Box. If the mains switch of the monitor is switched
to position "On", the mains supply is led back to the transformer T1 in the Interconnection Box. The transformer and a rectifier generate the voltage 24V ON/OFF. In contrast to the name, the voltage is about
30...36 VDC without load. In the circuit diagrams, the two wires of 24V ON/OFF are also called ONP and
ONN. The signal is not connected to a ground potential. It is not permissible to use ONN as a GND line
or to use ONP as a power supply line. 24V ON/OFF is connected as an output to TB3 and switches the
relay K1 in the Interconnection Box. K1 switches the mains power supply of the Display Electronics Unit
and of an optional slave monitor. If there are more radars or MULTIPILOTs in the system, the 24V ON/
OFF signals of these units are connected as an input on TB3, too. The signals are connected by strip
40
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
4.2 "Power On" Concept
conductors, so that all radars/MULTIPILOTs of a system get the signal if only one radar has been
switched on. This is necessary to enable the user to obtain the radar video of a second system whose
Indicator has not been switched on. The remote video inputs and outputs are delivered by the Display
Electronics Unit.
The 24V ON/OFF signal is led to all Transceivers of a system. At Transceivers NG3028/NG3029, it is
connected to TB 3 of the connection board GR3017G200 and switches the mains supply relay for the
mains input of the mains input unit NG3028G204. In version A, the unit NG3028G204 is situated in the
Gearbox. In version B it is situated in the bulkhead housing.
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started as described above. If the BIOS settings are
incorrect, the radar might not start.
NOTE:
If the Display Electronics Unit is supplied by a UPS, the Transceiver Electronics Unit must not be
connected to TB5. The mains supply for the Transceiver must be connected independently from the UPS.
Only if the capacity of the UPS is sufficient for the supply of the Transceiver and the motor (in 1-ph
systems), can TB5 be used.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
41
Technical Manual
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
4.3
CAN Bus Concept / Termination

Transceiver 1
Transceiver 2
CAN0
termination
TP53
1/2
TP53
1/2
TCU
J2
J1
TB3
J1
TB3
max. length of CAN 0

500 m between the
termination resistors
TP78
1/2
J7 J5 (CAN1)
Interconnection
Board
CAN1
term.
Connection Board
CAN0
J7 J5 (CAN1)
Analog
Interface
TCU
J2
Connection Board
CAN0
CAN0
termination
TB3
Interconnection
Box
Interconnection
Board
Analog
Interface
TP78
1/2
CAN1
term.
TB3
Interconnection
Box
J1
J1
CAN1
Interface Expander
(optional)
CAN0 & CAN1

CAN0 & CAN1
CAN0 & CAN1
CAN0 termination
TP161 1/2
CAN0 termination
TP161 1/2
CAN1 termination
TP162 1/2
CAN1 termination
TP162 1/2
RDC

This symbol shows an available connector for the termination of a CAN
bus in the drawing above. Do not connect jumpers to all termination
connectors. Each CAN bus must be terminated by means of only 2
jumpers. See the following descriptions to choose the correct units for the
termination. Never leave out the termination.
ztr1_175.eps
ztr1_125.eps
RDC
Fig. 4-3
CAN bus concept and termination
WARNING
If the termination is not performed, the system might work
unreliably!
42
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
4.3 CAN Bus Concept / Termination
Figure 4-3 shows the principle of the wiring of the CAN bus system. The example shows a dual installation, version A. The termination resistors must only be implemented at the beginning and at the
end of a CAN line. For further examples, see the technotes. The CAN wires should be as short as
possible.
Advice for the Termination of the CAN Buses
1.
Determine the beginning and the end of a CAN bus.
2.
Terminate the CAN bus only at the beginning and at the end.
3.
The CAN bus (CAN 1) is also connected to an optional trackpilot. It is possible that the TRACKPILOT is connected at the beginning or the end of a CAN bus wiring.
CAN0
CAN0 is also called the "radar bus". By means of the radar bus, the system is controlled; all orders and
parameters are sent via the radar bus.
For the example on page 42, CAN0 should be terminated at TP53 1/2 of both Transceivers.
If a direct CAN0 connection between the Transceiver electronics units has been performed, the termination must be performed at the TCU (TP53 1/2) of the last Transceiver in the CAN0 line and at TP161 1/
2 of the last RDC of one Display Electronics Unit in the CAN0 line. If an Interswitch (PCI) is used in a
separate housing, it might be necessary to terminate CAN0 at the Interswitch pcb.
CAN1
CAN1 is also called the "navigation bus" or "nav bus". The data of the ships sensors, such as position
data, speed data and gyro data, are sent via the nav bus.
For the example on page 42, CAN1 should be terminated at both RDCs TP162 1/2.
WARNING
If the cable connection between J5 of the Interconnection
Board and J7 of the Analog Interface or of the COM
Expander is not present (e.g. no Analog Interface is
installed), the CAN bus output terminals of TB3 have no
function.
In this case, the following pins of the Interconnection
Board must be short-circuited by means of jumpers:
J5 1/2
J5 3/4
J5 5/6
J5 7/8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
43
Technical Manual
4.4 Termination of RS422 Interfaces
4.4
Termination of RS422 Interfaces

Single Talker/Single Listener
In single talker / single listener systems via the Interconnection Board, it is not necessary to terminate the
RS422 interface, because the interface is always terminated at the IMB.
In single talker/single listener systems via the COM Expander, it is necessary to terminate the RS422
interface at TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. See page 78 for a description of TP3.
RS422 connected to interconnection board
Ship's sensor
Indicator
RS422
IMB
Internal
termination
RS422 connected to COM expander

COM Expander
Ship's sensor
RS422
Indicator
GE3044G218
ztr1_649.eps
TP3
Jumpers must be set to TP3
Fig. 4-4
Termination of a single talker/single listener RS422 connection
Single Talker/Multi Listener

Single talker/multi listener connections result from sensors which are connected to two Indicators (redundancy). The serial connection must be terminated at the Indicator with the longest distance to the ships
sensor.
For a RS422 connection via the Interconnection Board, the termination is given by the IMB, so that the
termination at the Indicator with the shorter distance must be deactivated. This must be performed by
means of an additional plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218. The pcb GE3044G218 must be connected to
the Interconnection Board and all jumpers on TP3 must be removed. See page 78 for a description of
TP3.
44
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Ship's Sensor
RS422
Indicator 1
GE3044G218
TP3
IMB
All jumpers from TP3
must be removed
internal
termination
Indicator 2
ztr1_650.eps
IMB
internal
termination
Fig. 4-5
Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via Interconnection Board)
For a RS422 connection via the COM Expander, the termination resistor must be deactivated at the Indicator which is closer to the ships sensor (all jumpers must be removed from TP3 of the plug-in adapter
pcb GE3044G218). It must be activated at the Indicator which is farther away from the ships sensor
(jumpers must be set to TP3 of the plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218). See page 78 for a description of
TP3.
COM Expander
Ship's Sensor
RS422
Indicator 1
GE3044G218
TP3
Jumpers must be removed

from TP3
Com Expander
Indicator 2
GE3044G218
ztr1_651.eps
TP3
Fig. 4-6
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Termination of a single talker / multi listener RS422 connection (via COM Expander)
45
Technical Manual
Separate Serial Interfaces

If the sensor has two separate outputs, then they must be used to install two single talker / single listener
connections and it is not necessary to modify the termination.
Ship's Sensor
Indicator 1
RS422
IMB
RS422
internal
termination
COM Expander
Indicator 2
GE3044G218
ztr1_652.eps
TP3
46
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5 Display Electronics Unit
4.5.1
System
ztr1_001.eps
4.5
LOG
Gyro
Serial
I/O
Position
NMEA
CAN0
CAN1
TVA1
TVA2
Radar alarm
Target alarm
Dead man alarm trigger
Chart alarm
Audio alarm ack.
Reserve
R
to
Monitor G
B
TVA1 out
(Remote video)
Buzzer
Graphics & Video

Processor
(GVP)
RDC
Reset
Monitor control (COM1)
Speaker
Debug port (COM2)
Parallel port
LAN
Trackball (PS/2)
Keyboard (PS/2)
Par.
PS/2 PS/2
COM
AGP slot
PCI
Power Supply
(ATX)
CPU Module
Pentium
On/Off
Mains
ISA
RAM
Diskette drive
ATX motherboard
Fig. 4-7
IDE1
IDE2
RADARPILOT: IDE flash module to IDE1

MULTIPILOT: Hard-disk/DVD drive to IDE1
IDE flash module to IDE2
Block diagram of the Display Electronics Unit
The block diagram does not show the correct order of the pcbs. This order depends on the type of motherboard which is used in the Display Electronics Unit. See Section 4.5.3 for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
47
Technical Manual
The Display Electronics Unit contains the following components:

-
Pentium motherboard (PMB)

Radar Data Converter (RDC)
IDE memory module
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP)
Power supply
LAN Network Adapter
RGB Buffer (optional)
Hard Disk drive, DVD-ROM drive for MULTIPILOT, diskette drive
The monitors are not dealt with in this manual. Separate technical manuals are available for all types
which can be serviced. The monitors can be connected to the Display Electronics Unit or to the RGB
Buffer.
The Display Electronics Unit has to process the radar video and to act as the interface to the user
together with the Operating Unit and the monitor. The functions are described in detail in the following
chapters.
4.5.2
Housing
The components of the Display Electronics Unit are mounted in a metal housing.
48
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.3
Pentium Motherboard (PMB)

CAUTION
The motherboard shown and described below is only an example
(version DFI CA64). The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with
a different motherboard to keep up with technical progress.
PCI slots
ISA slot
(not used) BIOS Slot 1
Slot 5 AGP slot
Memory banks
Main processor
with fan
Power supply
connector
ztr1_015.jpg
Slot 3 Slot 4
Slot 2
Power On, LED, Lock, Reset,

Speaker connectors
Fig. 4-8
IDE connectors Floppy connector

Example of a motherboard (ATX) in the Display Electronics Unit
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set in the factory.
WARNING
If different motherboards can be used, see Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w for further information about prerequisites.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
49
Technical Manual
4.5.3.1
Hardware Description, Types of Motherboards
The main processor is the Pentium processor on the motherboard. The motherboard is a PC board of the
ATX standard with sockets for CPU, BIOS, RAM, ISA cards and PCI cards.
The interfaces of the motherboard are shown in the block diagram in Figure 4-7. An example of the position of the connectors is shown in Figure 4-9. The location and the number of connectors depend on the
version of the motherboard. For the sequence of the pcbs in the PCI slots, see Section 4.5.3.2 on page
50.
Types of Motherboards
The Display Electronics Unit may be equipped with different motherboards to keep up with technical
progress. The different versions of the motherboards can be recognized by means of the number of PCI/
ISA slots and some labels of the manufacturer. Some types of motherboards have an onboard sound
card. In this case, the sound option must be disabled in the BIOS settings (see Section 5.14) and, in case
of exchange, the covers must be removed from the openings for the sound card connectors in the electronics units housing. At present, the following type of motherboard is used:
Type of motherboard
Number of
ISA slots
Number of
PCI slots
DFI CA64
Position of the manufacturers label

- On the housing of the parallel interface
Connection of the Buzzer

The speaker output of the motherboard is connected to E20/1 of the RDC. The position of the connector
on the motherboard depends on the version of the motherboard. Usually, the motherboard pcb is
inscribed accordingly. See Figure 4-8 for an example. Only one contact of the connector is used. If the
cable is connected to the wrong connector, the buzzer does not work.
4.5.3.2
Position of the Pcbs in the Motherboards Slot
The pcbs which are described in the following sections have to be plugged in at a defined PCI slot. It is
not permissible to change the position of the pcbs on the motherboard. If a pcb has been plugged in at
the wrong PCI slot, then unforeseen faults will probably occur.
CAUTION
For the slot numbers, see Figure 4-8 on page 49. The
numbers printed on the motherboard pcb may be different
and are not valid. Start to count from the ISA slots onwards
in direction of the processor, as shown in Figure 4-8. The
number of ISA and PCI slots depends on the motherboard
type. The position of the pcbs must NOT be changed!
PCI Slot No. 1)
PCB
1)
50
DFI CA64
Ethernet module
GE3044G219 (RDC)
The slot numbers printed on the pcb are not valid! See Figure 4-8 on page
49 for the correct sequence.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.3.3
Connectors at the Rear of the Display Electronics Unit
ztr1_078.jpg
Fig. 4-9
No. of
Contact
1)
10
11
12
13
14
15
Interface connectors at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
Function
Mains connector
Voltage selector (115/230 V). If this switch is not provided, the power supply unit adapts automatically to the mains supply voltage.
Mains switch (Important: The system must be switched on / off by means of the monitor mains
switch! This switch should be used for service purposes only.)
Supply connector for the Operating Unit (= 5)
Supply connector for diskette drive or Operating Unit or Interconnection Board GE3044G216 if
plug-in pcbs are used (= 4). This connector is currently not delivered ex works. It must be mounted
additionally (GE3044G052, order No. 2776376) if necessary.
Trackball connector
Keyboard connector
USB connector, not used
Parallel port, not used
10
Serial port, for monitor OSD data (depending on monitor type), to J3 of the Interconnection Box
11
Serial port, not used
12 1)
VGA connector for Monitor or to RGB Buffer in the Interconnection Box or the 5-Channel Video
Switch
13 1)
VGA connector for RDC input (TVA1, TVA2, TVA1 out), to J4 of the Interconnection Box
14
1)
RDC connector, to J1 of the Interconnection Box
15
1)
Ethernet module (optional)
The positions of the connectors depend on the motherboard type. See Section 4.5.3.2.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
51
Technical Manual
ztr1_101.jpg
The connectors for the supply of power to the keyboard and the plug-in adapter
pcbs are similar. The 12 V supply is not needed.
52
12 V
5V
If plug-in pcbs for the interface conversion are mounted, the Interconnection
Board needs a separate power supply cable, which must be connected at one of
these connectors. The second connector is currently not delivered ex works. It
must be mounted additionally (kit VS3034G035, Order No. 390002198) if necessary.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.4
Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219
DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indicator Number

On=closed=0; off=open=1
DIP
Switch
S1/5...8
Switch No.
Sets Indicator No. to 1
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
All other settings are not admissible
1)
TP162 1/2
Speaker
TP161
E15 E20 E2 TP151TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6
DS5 DS7
1
1 E28
1 E25
J2
1 1
OFF
Boot from IDE

memory module
(default)
Boot from diskette drive

(the software update
routine is started while
booting).
Monitor resolution
1024x768
Monitor resolution
1280x1024
Monitor frequency
72 Hz
Monitor frequency 60 Hz
Normal operation
(default)
Service Mode On 1)
See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.

Settings for the Different Monitor Types
TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1

Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus terminated
No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not
terminated
See also Section 4.3 on page 42.
ON
CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2
Function
Monitor
S1/6
S1/7
AZ3069G040
Off
Off
AZ3063G04x/5x
Off
Off
AZ3068G04x/5x
Off
Off
AZ3065G040
Off
Off
S1
E10/
1 E11 1
1
Monitor
S1/6
S1/7
AZ3066G040
On
Off
AZ3056G04x
Off
Off
DS8 DS10 DS2 E18

DS9 DS1 DS3
E1
E4
DS12
DS11 DS13
1 E12 1
1
1
1
1 E27
E14
E16
ztr1_623.jpg
1 E26
E17
E19
TP103
TP102
TP101
TP100
Termination of
serial interface 4
serial interface 3
serial interface 2
serial interface 1
E5 E3, ext. Reset contact
Motherboard
ztr1_011.jpg
J4
E5/2
E5/1
E20/1
Fig. 4-10
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
RDC pcb
53
Technical Manual
Watchdog
If an error is detected in the electronics units components, a red screen is generated and by means of
the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the motherboard is reset. In case of such a reset,
the system reboots. If the reset cable is not connected, the red screen is displayed permanently to indicate the error, because the reset cannot be performed.
Connectors/Jumpers/Test Pins
E1, E4, E10, E11, E12, E14, E16, E25, E26, E27, E28 are for the manufacturers use only. It is not
permissible to connect cables or jumpers to one of these contacts. Jumpers which have been set in the
factory must not be removed!
E2
1
2
Function
Not used
(1: speaker signal, 2,3: not connected, 4: GND
Output for an internal speaker)
3
4
E3
1
Function
Not used (a zero-potential touch contact can be connected as a reset button)
E5
Function
1
2
Watchdog functionality of the RDC. Reset output, zero potential. Must be connected to the reset
input of the Display Electronics Units motherboard.
For motherboard DFI CA64: E5/1 to the left pin of the reset input, E5/2 to the right pin.
E15
Function
AGND (analog GND)
TVA signal test point (TVA1, TVA2 or TVA test signal). Trigger=+2 V, Video=-2 V, AZIMUTHSTART=-4 V, AZIMUTHDAT=-2 V, see Figure 4-11 on page 57.
E17
Function
Trigger signal (TTL high pulse)
Synchronization start signal (TTL low pulse)
Synchronization data (TTL)
E18
1
Function
GND
E19
1
54
Function
AGND (analog GND)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
E20
Function
1...4
Speaker input, must be connected to the speaker output of the motherboard. Only pin 1 is used.
TP100...103
Function
1
2
Termination of the serial interfaces.

Jumper on 1/2 = termination with 120 (default)
No jumper on 1/2 = no termination
TP100 = serial interface 1, TP101 = serial interface 2,
TP102 = serial interface 3, TP103 = serial interface 4
TP151
Function
Jumper on 2/3 = alarm acknowledge input (Interconnection Board TB2 13/14) suitable for 20 mA
current loop (optocoupler driver input)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
2
3
4
TP152
Function
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB2 15/16) suitable for 20 mA current loop
(optocoupler driver input)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch)
This input can be used to turn the headmarker by 180 by means of an external contact. This
function must be configured in the System Maintenance Manager (Configure). If the external
contact is closed, the headmarker is turned. This function must not be used in NACOS systems.
2
3
4
LEDs
Function
While system booting
During operation
DS1 green
ON
ON = DSP2 selftest failed
DS1 red
OFF
ON = DSP1 selftest failed
DS2 green
ON
Toggle = DSP2 host communication failure
DS2 red
OFF
Toggle = DSP1 PCI overrun
DS3 green
ON
Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP2)
DS3 red
OFF
Toggles for each antenna turn (DSP1)
Function
ON
OFF
DS4 green
UART 1
Interrupt in process
Interrupt finished
DS4 red
UART 0
Interrupt finished
DS5 green
UART 3
Interrupt finished
DS5 red
UART 2
Interrupt finished
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
55
Technical Manual
DS6 green
CAN1
Interrupt finished
DS6 red
CAN0
Interrupt finished
DS7 green
Toggle on every interrupt entry
DS7 red
Not used
Function
DS8 green
On = PCI DMA running
DS8 red
On = PCI DMA inactive
DS9 green
On = DSPs are not held
DS9 red
On = DSPs are held
DS10 green
On = ARPA DMA running
DS10 red
On = ARPA DMA inactive
Function
DS11 green
No function
DS11 red
Syndat signal failure (TVA signal)
DS12 green
Manufacturers use
DS12 red
Trigger signal failure (TVA signal)
DS13 green
Manufacturers use
DS13 red
Synstart signal failure (TVA signal)
4.5.4.1
The
1.
2.
3.
4.
Alarm Contacts
alarm outputs are:
Radar alarm
Dead man alarm trigger
Target Alarm (formerly ARPA Alarm)
Chart alarm
The alarm inputs are:

1. Audio Alarm Acknowledge
2. Not used
The outputs are relay contacts. The maximum load of the contacts is 24 V/0.3 A. The inputs can be
switched by means of TP151 and TP152 to zero potential inputs (switch, relays) or suitable for 20 mA
current loop (optocoupler driver input).
For further information on the alarms, see the operating instructions.
56
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.4.2
Service Switch of the RDC
The service switch of the RDC (S1/8) also activates the service functions of the TCU, so that it is not
necessary to set the service switch S1/8 of the TCU additionally (see the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers). If the service switch of the TCU is activated, the service mode functions of the RDC
are not available, so that it is advisable to activate the service mode by means of the service switch of
the RDC.
If the service mode is activated by means of the DIP switch S1/8, the following functions are available:
-
Acquire targets without gyro data (to test ARPA functions).

Acquire targets without Radar Bus data.
Display the radar video although the Radar Bus is not working correctly.
Activation of a check mode during the start. The sequential start of the processes is displayed. When
an error crops up, the booting routine is stopped immediately and the faulty process can be recognized.
Access to Service Menus without password.
Activation of the TCU service mode with the following functions:
If the Scanner stops turning, the Transceiver is not switched off.
If the magnetron current exceeds or falls short of its limits, the Transceiver is not switched off.
If a communication time-out occurs in the communication with the master Indicator, the Transceiver is not switched off.
The maintenance menus can be entered and used without the use of the service switch. The switch offers
the additional functionalities described above, especially for the setting-to-work phase.
NOTES:
As soon as setting-to-work, maintenance or service work has been finished, the service mode must
be switched off!
-
The service mode must not be active during normal operation!
If the service switch is activated during normal operation, a frozen radar video might be displayed at
the Indicator if the Transceiver is switched off!
If the service mode is activated, the Transceiver is not switched off automatically when the Scanner
stops turning!
4.5.4.3
Adjustments
2 ms / 1 ms / 0.5 ms
U
+2 V/75 Ohm
100 s
5 s
5 s
Trigger
Trigger
Video
ztr1_024.ceps
-2 V/75 Ohm
~15 s
Azimuth data
LSB
MSB
-4 V/75 Ohm
Azimuth
start
Fig. 4-11
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
The TVA signal
57
Technical Manual
Figure 4-11 shows an idealized diagram of the TVA signal. In the Radar 1100 series, the adjustments
can be performed by means of the System Maintenance Manager software. The values are measured
and set automatically. For further information, see Section 5.12.1 on page 140.
4.5.4.4
Interfaces
The RDC contains inputs for the connected sensors and outputs for alarms.
4 serial interfaces RS422 for the standard sensors, 2 CAN bus interfaces (Radar Bus and Nav Bus), 4
alarm outputs (incl. 1 dead man alarm) and 2 alarm inputs are available.
It is advisable to use the serial interfaces as shown in Section 3.2.2, page 34 and in the cabling documents.
Radar Video Processing
The RDC unit transfers the processed radar video via the PCI bus with a frame rate of at least 15 Hz to
the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP).
The DSP software includes the functions Range Scale, North-Up Stabilization and True Motion Stabilisation.
The video processing includes gain adjustment, Rain (FTC), Auto Rain, Interference Rejection, Direct
Video, Video STC, Video Enhancement (if Clean Sweep is switched on) and turn-by-turn correlation.
ARPA Functions
The RDC is not responsible for the complete ARPA functionality. The ARPA processing (acquisition,
tracking, zone control, display of tracked targets) is done by the main processor on the motherboard
(PMB).
The RDC prepares the combined video signal and transfers it via the PCI bus to the main processor.
Memory
The RDC has a battery buffered memory which saves the radar status and configuration data, for
example the boot mode of the MULTIPILOT or the current operator settings during the power down of
the system, so that it can be started again with the same settings. The operating system, the application
software, the configuration data and data such as the map and track data are stored in the IDE memory
module and/or the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT.
58
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.5
IDE Memory Module (GE3062G001)
ztr1_625.jpg
Master/slave switch
Fig. 4-12
IDE memory module
In the RADARPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE1 connector of the
motherboard. In the MULTIPILOTPILOT 1100, the IDE memory module must be connected to the IDE2
connector of the motherboard (the hard-disk/DVD drive is connected to the IDE1 connector).
It contains the operating system and the application software of the radar. The operating system and the
application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In case of a hard-disk failure, the
MULTIPILOT can be booted from the IDE memory module and operates as a standard radar. See
Section 8.2.6 on page 183 for detailed information.
The configuration parameters are always saved in the IDE memory module.
Different versions of the IDE memory module will be used in accordance with the technical progress. The
modules have a switch or a jumper for the master/slave mode selection. They must always be configured
as master.
The power supply for the module is the same as for a hard-disk drive.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
59
Technical Manual
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) GE3044G213
ztr1_014.jpg
4.5.6
Fig. 4-13
Example for a Graphics And Video Processor
The Graphics And Video Processor is a standard video adapter card with the following specifications:
-
AGP bus interface

8 MB video RAM
Video output with VGA connector, synchronization coupled to green signal or separate signals
QNX-qualified
Depending on technical progress it is possible, that different versions of the Graphics And Video Processor are used.
The main processors software controls the overlay of the MMI graphics, the line graphics of the PPI area,
the ARPA/plot graphics and the radar video (generated by the RDC unit), by the use of "intelligent copy
commands to the graphics processor of the GVP unit.
The function Centred Display and the calculation of the afterglow lines of the trails and targets are
performed by software through the main processor and the GVP.
No settings or adjustments have to be performed at the pcb.
60
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.7
Power Supply
The power supply for the Display Electronics Unit is
a standard PC power supply corresponding to the
ATX specification. It supplies the following voltages:
+3.3 V
+5 V
+12 V
-12 V
-5 V
+5 V stand-by
ztr1_022.jpg
Power Supply
NOTE
The power supply is equipped with a protective against tottering
contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within 0.5 s, the
power supply does not start and it must be switched off for 5...10 s until
it can be switched on again.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
61
Technical Manual
4.5.8
Ethernet Module
The Ethernet network adapter is needed for the integration of the radar into a NACOS system. It is not
needed for a single, dual or multiple radar installation but it can be used to connect a DEBEG AIS or
VDR system.
The Ethernet module is plugged into the motherboard slot. The wiring must be done following Figure
4-14 with 50 coaxial cable (for example inside the
enclosures, RG 58, for ships cabling RG 213 / U,
see cabling diagrams). The network is a 10 Mbit
network with Thin Ethernet wiring.
Y-plugs are delivered instead of the T-plugs
formerly used. The BNC Y-plugs must be connected
directly into the Ethernet module. It is not admissible
to connect the Y-plug and the network adapter by
means of a coaxial cable.
The proper termination with a 50 BNC-termination
plug at both ends of the Ethernet line is very important.
It is not permissible to use cable with a characteristic impedance different from 50 .
ztr1_071.eps
No settings or adjustments have to be made on the

Ethernet module.
Fig. 4-14 Principle of wiring for LAN Network
NOTE:
If the Ethernet module is not used, it must be removed from the electronics unit. It must be
replaced by a slot cover with the order No. 5582688.
62
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Interconnection Units
RG58
RG213
RG58
RG213
RG58
RG213
RG58
RG213
ztr1_161.eps
Figure 4-15 shows the various TRACKPILOT Electronics Units or

possibilities for connecting the LAN RADAR/MULTIPILOT/CHARTPILOT Electronics Units
Ethernet. It is not admissible to
connect RG213/U coaxial cable
directly to the Ethernet module.
The cabling has to be converted into
RG58C/U by means of the adapter
bracket in the interconnection unit
and the RG58C/U coaxial cable
which must be used between the
adapter bracket and the Y-plug on
the LAN network adapter pcb. Direct
wiring with RG58C/U cable is
possible if the cables are routed
inside the console housings.
Fig. 4-15 LAN Ethernet wiring of a quadruple system
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
63
Technical Manual
4.5.9
Interconnection Box VS3034G030

The Interconnection Box provides the terminals
for the connection of the ships cables and for the
internal wiring to components of the Display Electronics Unit.
zt1r_016.jpg
The Interconnection Box contains also components for power supply and the systems power
switch. The pcb GE3044G216 offers four interfaces which can be adapted to 20 mA current loop
(TTY), TTL, RS422 or RS232 by means of plug-in
pcbs.
If the Interconnection Box is mounted below the
Display Electronics Unit. The optional RGB Buffer
and Analog Interface can be mounted in the InterInterconnection Box with RGB Buffer and Analog Interface
connection Box. Suitable bolts are provided.
The main signals which are connected via the Interconnection Box are:
-
4.5.9.1
TVA video (TVA1 in and TVA2 in)

TVA1 out (remote video)
Serial interfaces (ships sensors, AIS)
2 CAN buses
Alarm signals (input and acknowledge)
Mains supply
Power on/off switch signals
Connectors and Terminals of the Interconnection Box
J3
RGB OUT
J4
RGB OUT
J5
RGB OUT
zt1r_081.jpg
J2
RGB IN
RGB Buffer
connectors, see
Section 4.5.13
J4, TVA to RDC
Fig. 4-16
64
J3, monitor OSD data J2, monitor OSD data

to display el. unit
to monitor
J1, sensor
signals to RDC
Connectors at the rear of the Interconnection Box
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.9.2
Interconnection Board GE3044G216
TB2 Function
TB 2, Alarm Contacts
TB3
19
= TB3/5
18
= TB3/5
17
= TB3/5
Double End Ferry:
15, 16 closed = AFT
15, 16 opened = FWD
Audio Alarm Ack.:
14 Alarm Ack. M
13 Alarm Ack. P
Chart Alarm:
12
AL_out4 make
11
AL_out4 centre
10
AL_out4 break
Target Alarm:
(ARPA/AIS Alarm)
9
AL_out3 make
8
AL_out3 centre
7
AL_out3 break
Dead Man Alarm Trig:
6
AL_out2 make
5
AL_out2 centre
4
AL_out2 break
Radar Alarm:
3
AL_out1 make
2
AL_out1 centre
1
AL_out1 break
The alarm contacts are provided by

the RDC. See the RDC description for
technical data and configuration.
15
24V ON/OFF ONN
14
24V ON/OFF ONP
13
24V ON/OFF ONN
12
24V ON/OFF ONP
11
CAN0_A (IN)
10
CAN0_B (IN)
9
CAN1_A (IN)
8
CAN1_B (IN)
7
CAN0_A (OUT)
6
CAN0_B (OUT)
5
CAN_GND
4
CAN1_A (OUT)
3
CAN1_B (OUT)
2
24V ON/OFF ONN
1
24V ON/OFF ONP
IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus
are identical.
TB18
Function
For Remote Keyboard Electronics
6
CAN_KBC GND
5
CAN_KBC GND
4
CAN_KBC B Out ->
3
CAN_KBC A Out ->
2
CAN_KBC B in <1
CAN_KBC A in <-
J5
SB
3/4
Screen
TB15 Function
1/2
TVA1 in
3/4
Screen
J9, J91 Function

Supply input for plug-in
pcbs
1
Vcc
2
GND
3
Vcc
4
PE
Plug-in
pcb 3
F2
F1
Plug-in
pcb 2
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
L1 to interf. expander
N to interf. expander
PE to interf. expander
1
1
TB10 Function
1
2
3
T1
1 J100
S1
J6
J3
Function
to El. Unit serial port

1
n.c.
2
COM1_RXD
3
COM1_TXD
4
COM1_DTR
5
COM1_GND
6
COM1_DSR
7
COM1_RTS
8
COM1_CTS
9
n.c.
J2
Function
Serial interface to monitor

1
LKAP (Beeper +)
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
LKAM (Beeper -)
L1 out, displ. el.

N out, displ. el.
PE out, displ. el.
1
2
3
L1 in, switched
by monitor
N in, monitor
PE in, monitor
LED
Function
DS1 is lit when mains is

switched on at the monitor of
this radar.
DS2 is lit when the DC
voltage is available from the
transformer/rectifier.
Fuses
Drillings for the Video

Selector SH3023G222
F1
Systems Mains
Fuse
F2
Systems
Mains fuse
F3
Mains fuse monitor
F4
Mains T1
F5
24V ON/OFF signal
See also page 190.
J1
J2
J1
1
2
3
TB13 Function
F4
230 V
115 V
Drillings for the RGB Buffer
J4
L1 out, to monitor
N out, to monitor
PE out, to monitor
TB11 Function
F5
Function
Mains to Analog Interface

1
L1
2
N
3
PE
K1
TP11
Function
Ships mains
1
L1 in
2
N in
3
PE in
F3
J9
Function J3
Connector for the

RGB Buffer, See
Section 4.5.13.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Function
1
2
3
DS2
Drillings for the

LAN-BNC adapter
TB3
J6
Fig. 4-17
TB6
J7
ztr1_613.jpg
TVA2 in
SB
SB
1
to El. Unit (RDC)

1
TVA1
2
TVA2
3
4
5
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
TB16 Function
1/2
SB
J8
Plug-in pcb 1
J91
J4
L1 spare
N spare
PE spare
TB4
DS1
TB17 Function
Screen
Plug-in
pcb 4
Function
1
2
3
Position of the RKE pcb,

mounting by means of 4 bolts.
Ships sensors RS422

TB1
TB2
20
GND4
19
TXD43/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2
18
TXD4+
17
RXD416
RXD4+
15
GND3
14
TXD313
TXD3+
12
RXD311
RXD3+
10
GND2
9
TXD28
TXD2+
7
RXD26
RXD2+
5
GND1
4
TXD13
TXD1+
2
RXD11
RXD1+
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232,
see Section 4.5.9.3 on
page 66.
3/4
TB18, J100, J8, TP10

These connectors and testpins are
needed for the connection of a Remote
Keyboard Electronics. See the corresponding technical manual of the RKE
for further information.
TB5
Function
TVA1 out
break = normally closed (n.c.)

make = normally opened (n.o.)
If the Analog Interface

is not connected, the
following jumpers must
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN bus:
- J5 1/2
- J5 3/4
- J5 5/6
- J5 7/8
1/2
SB = Solder Bridges
These 5 solder bridges must be opened,
when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
power supply cable GE3050G020 must
be used (J9). See also TP11.
TP10
J5 CAUTION
TB1
Function
Function
to El. Unit (RDC)

1
RXD1+
2
RXD13
TXD1+
4
TXD15
GND1
6
RXD2+
7
RXD28
TXD2+
9
TXD210
GND2
11
RXD3+
12
RXD313
TXD3+
14
TXD315
GND3
16
RXD4+
17
RXD418
AL_out1 break
19
AL_out1 centre
20
AL_out1 make
21
AL_out2 break
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
AL_out2 centre
AL_out2 make
AL_out3 break
AL_out3 centre
AL_out3 make
AL_out4 break
AL_out4 centre
AL_out4 make
+5 V
TXD4+
TXD4GND4
GND
LKAP (Beeper +)
LKAM (Beeper -)
CAN0_A
CAN0_B
CAN1_A
CAN1_B
CAN_GND
VGND2
V12R
44
45
46
47
48
49
VGND1
V12M
n.c.
Audio Alarm
Ack. P
Audio Alarm
Ack. N
Alarm-ACK2 P
TP11
Jumper on 1/2 = default
Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
if the power supply cable
GE3050G020 is connected
(plug-in pcbs)
Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
65
Technical Manual
4.5.9.3
Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion with Interconnection Board GE3044G216
The ships sensors are connected to the terminals TB1 of the Interconnection Board GE3044G216. The
plug-in pcbs can be used together with the Interconnection Board GE3044G216 to convert the four serial
interfaces to TTL, 20 mA current loop (TTY) and RS232 for the connection of ships sensors with interfaces different from RS422. It is not necessary to use the RS422 plug-in pcb. See page 44 for further
information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
The plug-in pcbs must be fixed by means of a bolt and a nut.
4.5.9.3.1
Connection of Ships Sensors to GE3044G216 TB1
Plugin pcb
No.
RS422
TTL
TTY (20 mA current

loop)
RS232
TB1
No plug-in pcb or
GE3044G218
GE3044G211
GE3044G212
GE3044G214
20
GND4
GND
GND
GND
19
TxD4 -
GND
TxD4 -
GND
18
TxD4 +
TxD4
TxD4 +
TxD4
17
RxD4 -
GND
RxD4 -
GND
16
RxD4 +
RxD4
RxD4 +
RxD4
15
GND3
GND
GND
GND
14
TxD3 -
GND
TxD3 -
GND
13
TxD3 +
TxD3
TxD3 +
TxD3
12
RxD3 -
GND
RxD3 -
GND
11
RxD3 +
RxD3
RxD3 +
RxD3
10
GND2
GND
GND
GND
TxD2 -
GND
TxD2 -
GND
TxD2 +
TxD2
TxD2 +
TxD2
RxD2 -
GND
RxD2 -
GND
RxD2 +
RxD2
RxD2 +
RxD2
GND1
GND
GND
GND
TxD1 -
GND
TxD1 -
GND
TxD1 +
TxD1
TxD1 +
TxD1
RxD1 -
GND
RxD1 -
GND
RxD1 +
RxD1
RxD1 +
RxD1
NOTE:
1. If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, the additional connector must be mounted by means of
the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198). See page 67 for further information.
2.
66
If a plug-in adapter pcb is used, the five solder bridges on the Interconnection
Board below the plug-in adapter pcb must be opened by means of a sharp
knife.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
3.
Usually, it is not necessary to use a plug-in adapter pcb for a ships sensor with RS422 interface. If
the impedance of the interface is too low, the plug-in pcb can be used to have the termination resistors of the plug-in pcb available, which can be activated by means of TP3.
The pcbs are the same which must be used for the COM Expander. See the following sections for a
description:
Section 4.5.11.2.1, T T L P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 1 on page 76.
Section 4.5.11.2.2, 2 0 m A C u r r e n t L o o p ( T T Y ) P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 2 on page 77.
Section 4.5.11.2.3, R S 2 3 2 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 4 on page 77.
Section 4.5.11.2.4, R S 4 2 2 / R S 4 8 5 P l u g - i n P c b G E 3 0 4 4 G 2 1 8 on page 78.
4.5.9.3.2
Additional Power Supply Cable (Modification Kit VS3034G035)
If one or more plug-in pcbs are used, an additional power supply cable is necessary. Currently the
Electronics Unit is delivered with only one power supply connector at the rear (see Section 4.5.3.3 on
page 51). In this case, the Modification Kit VS3034G035 (Order No. 390002198) must be use. It is
included in the standard scope of delivery for new systems, if required.
The connector with cable (GE3044G052) must be mounted in the Display Electronics Unit. The cable
must be connected to an unused plug of the Power Supply Unit. If no suitable plug is available, the
adapter (976296-33) must be used. The cable GE3050G020 must be connected between the new
installed connector at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit and J9 of the Interconnection Board.
Furthermore, the jumper TP11 must be set to 2/3.
If a Keyboard Controller GE3048G200 is installed in the Interconnection Box (in case of a Remote
Keyboard Electronics), it is not necessary to install the Modification Kit. See the Technical Manual of the
Remote Keyboard Electronics for further information..
ztr1_641.jpg
ztr1_640.jpg
TP11
Fig. 4-18
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Power supply cable GE3050G020
67
Technical Manual
4.5.10
Analog Interface GE3044G207

For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.
TB
Function
10
AIS RxD - (Input -)
11
AIS RxD + (Input +)
12
do not connect!
13
do not connect!
14
AIS TxD - (Output -)
15
AIS TxD + (Output +)
16
AIS GND
(Rev 03 only)
J1
RS422 Interface
Connector for SH3014G203,

RS422 interface (Rev 03 only)
Function
Alarm out 1, make
Alarm out 1, centre
Alarm out 1, break
Alarm out 2, make
Alarm out 2, centre
Alarm out 2, break
TB
Function
30
31
32
33
ST1 status input for gyro

ST2 status input for log
TP5
TP1 TP74
1
TB10
TB11
TB12
TB13
TB14
TB15
TB16
TB30
TB31
TB32
TB33
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
Termination
Jumper on 1/2 = termination of CAN1 (Navigation Bus).

No Jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
TP99
Addresses
Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)

Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (for a second
Analog Interface)
TP75
TP90
TP70
TB52, PE
TB51, N
TB50, L1
1
1
1
1
TB
Function
TB
Function
25
24
Common (stepper)
Gyro REF 2 / reference common
(synchro)
Gyro REF 1 (synchro)
Gyro T
Gyro S
Gyro R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts)

Log BT (bottom track)
Log WT (water track)
Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
Log VX (speed)
Log VY (speed transversal (drift))
Log GND
23
22
21
20
Fig. 4-19
68
F1
ztr1_080.jpg
TB25
TB24
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20
TB40
TB41
TB42
TB43
TB44
TB45
TP78
TB
40
41
42
43
44
45
DS34 DS35
DS7
DS36
DS33
DS37
J7
TP2

Analog Interface, Rev. 03
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Connectors / Jumpers / Test Pins

TP1
1
2
Function
1 = VCC, 2 = LM, 3 = SPA_LOG
Set jumper on 1/2 to supply log outputs (zero potential) with voltage.
Set jumper on 2/3 to supply log outputs with external voltage.
TP2
1
Function
VCC, jumper must be set (default ex works).
TP5
1
2
Function
Jumper on 2/3 = ST1 (status input 1) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = ST1 signal as zero potential contact
3
4
5
6
Jumper on 6/7 = ST2 (status input 2) signal as optocoupler driver, 20 mA

Jumper on 5/6 and 7/8 = ST2 signal as zero potential contact
7
8
TP70
Function
n.c.
n.c.
n.c.
GND for serial interface, for manufacturers use
TXD, manufacturers use
RXD, manufacturers use
Activate bootstrap loader, active low, for manufacturers use
GND for bootstrap loader, manufacturers use
TP90
Function
RESET IN
GND
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
69
Technical Manual
J7
Function
CAN1 A to J5, Interconnection Board
CAN1 B to J5, Interconnection Board
5/6 connected
6
7
7/8 connected
LEDs
Function
DS7 green
DS7 red
DS33 green
DS33 red
DS34 green
C167 controller initialization finished

Flashing at 0.25 Hz = normal operation (only second Analog Interface)
Flashing at 1 Hz = normal operation (active Analog Interface, if two Analog Interfaces installed)
Flashing at 5 Hz = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Gyro signal: DS34 = R, DS35 = S, DS33 = T, the LEDs show the direction and the polarity of the
incoming signal. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave. 1-2 LEDs must be on. If no LEDs
or all of them are on, the incoming signal is not correct. See Section 5.11.8 for the configuration
of the analog gyro system and Figure 4-20 on page 71 for the connection of a gyro and a log.
DS34 red
DS35 green
DS35 red
DS36 green
Reference voltage for DC stepper with half wave. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS36 red
DS37 green
Reference voltage for AC gyro. Green = positive wave, red = negative wave
DS37 red
Fuse
Fuse
F1
70
For the fuses, see page 190.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
LOG
1-axis log connection to Radar
Analog Interface
TB
8 GND (common)
6 VX (speed)
2-Axis Log connection to Radar Analog Interface

TB
8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (Water Track)
2 BT (Bottom Track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
1.) DC Stepper System
( common - ground )
+
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing green
20
21
22
25
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red
20
21
22
25
In DC stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semiconductors. See the following example:
ztr1_124.eps
DC stepper system
( common - high )

( common - high )
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = DC Stepper Positive
AC System 50 Hz
AC System 60 Hz
Analog Interface
TB
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common
Parameter Analog Gyro System = DC Stepper Negative
R
S
T
common
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common
3.) DC stepper system

( common - high )

( common - ground )
-
R
S
T
common
Analog Interface
TB
23 REF 1
20 R
21 S
22 T
24 REF 2 (reference
common)
Gyro (Synchro)
+(-)
Gyro
Fig. 4-20
Connection of log and gyro
The interfaces have to be configured by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section
5.11.8 on page 127 for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
71
Technical Manual
The RDC is equipped with 4 serial interfaces for the connection of the ships navigation sensors. If no
sensors (gyro/log) with serial outputs are available, an interface extension like an Analog Interface must
be used. Two extension units (Analog Interface or COM Expander) can be connected for redundancy
purposes. For the correct installation, see the description of the jumper settings.
The AIS interface (TB10...16, J1) is available from Rev. 03 on.
The interfaces for an analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and a pulse log are described in Section 9.3,
E x t e r n a l I n t e r f a c e s on page 204.
If two Analog Interfaces are used in one system, they must be addressed by means of TP99.
4.5.10.1
Analog Gyro
By the detection of the inputs R,S and T, every change in the gyro state can be recognized. The detected
bit combination is coded in Gray Code. The direction of the turn can be calculated by means of a comparison with the value measured before. The measured difference of bearing is added or subtracted to/from
a defined start value. The typical resolution (changeable by parameterization) is 1/6.
The actual gyro value is written to the CAN bus (Nav Bus) as a 16 bit item of datum. If the value does
not change, it is transmitted to the CAN bus every 300 ms. New values are transmitted at least every
20 ms.
Gyro sensors whose R,S,T detection is synchronized by a reference signal have a reference timeout
control.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
4.5.10.2
Pulse Log
The ships speed can be processed from the pulse log signal. The Analog Interface measures the time
between two rising edges of the signal. By means of the formula v = s/t (t = measured time, s = distance
per pulse (parameter)) the speed can be calculated.
Inversion of the following signals is possible:
BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
72
Input
Function
XPM
X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
can be configured in the maintenance menus.
YPM
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage
can be configured in the maintenance menus.
BT
Bottom track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
configured in the maintenance menus.
WT
Water track. For zero potential contact. Polarity and internal (20 mA)/external voltage can be
configured in the maintenance menus.
ST2
External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
input by jumper settings.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.10.3
AIS Connection, RS422 INT Assembly SH3014G203 - RS422 Interface
This assembly is used for signal matching (hardware) to input-signals complying with the RS422
standard. An integrated circuit is used which converts the input signal to TTL level. It can be inserted in
Analog Interfaces Rev. 03.
This assembly processes signals in accordance with the RS422 standard for the connection of the
Primary Display Port of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit.
S1
Output Signal
Position 1
With handshake
Position 2
Without handshake
In the normal case, set position 2 - without handshake. The inputs are terminated by R1, R2 with 270 .
Pin 1, 2:
not connected
Pin 3, 4:
Default is no jumper on 3/4. Set a jumper on 3/4
to connect the ground of the signal source and
the ground of the Display Electronics Unit. See
Figure 4-22.
z_tr1_151.jpg
1
Standard = 2
S1
Fig. 4-21
SH3014T203
A
TTL
TTL
RS - 422
B
GND
Output
43
Input
+5V
+5V
Logic "1"
2 V min
Logic "0"
400 mV
B
0
z_si_013.eps
Fig. 4-22
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Mark
Start
Par. Stop
RS422 signals
73
Technical Manual
4.5.11
COM Expander GE3044G210

TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22
Manufacturers use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers, and do
not remove jumpers which have been set in the factory
TB1...5 Function
Sensor interface,
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218
1
RxD +
2
RxD 3
TxD +
4
TxD 5
GND
for all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1.
TB7
Function
TP12
TB2
ztr1_624.jpg
TB1
TB4
TB5
TB6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Plug-in pcb 3
1
2
3
F1
1
1
TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
1
2
3
4
S1
ON 8
TB6
Function
1
2
3
4
Digital input 1 (+)

Digital input 1 (-)
Digital input 2 (+)
Digital input 2 (-)
DS1 DS2 DS3
DS4 DS5 DS6
S1
1
Function
Function
DS1...6 Function
green : UART1 working, red: UART1 error, off: interface not used
red flashing at:
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 4-23
2
3...7
8
1 1
1
S1
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current
loop (optocoupler driver input)
Jumper on 1/2 and 3/4 = zero potential input (switch) (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4)
74
PE
N
L1
TB8
Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
Mains supply
1
2
3
TP41
TP42
TB8
TP13
TP11 1
1
1
1
TB7
2
3
4
5
TP21
1 1
2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2
3
4
5
Termination

No jumper on 1/2 = CAN1 is not terminated at this pcb.
Plug-in pcb 4
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
TP23
1
Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
2
Alarm out 1 centre
3
Alarm out 1 break (normally closed)
4
Alarm out 2 make (not used)
5
Alarm out 2 centre (not used)
6
Alarm out 2 break (not used)
The relays are switched on if the pcb is working!
ON
Function
OFF = COM Expander 1
ON = COM Expander 2
manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
no function (default = OFF)
manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
J7
Function
1
2
3
4
5/6
7/8

5 connected to 6
7 connected to 8
COM Expander pcb
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.11.1
Sensor Interfaces TB1...TB5 with Plug-in Adapter Pcbs
The interfaces TB1...TB5 can be converted in the same way as the interfaces of the RDC. The plug-in
adapter pcbs must be inserted and fixed by means of a nut on the COM Expander pcb. The interfaces
cannot be used without an plug-in adapter pcb.
Plugin pcb
No.
RS422
TTL
TTY (20 mA
current loop)
RS232
RS485
TB
GE3044G218
GE3044G211
GE3044G212
GE3044G214
GE3044G218
RxD1 +
RxD1
RxD1 +
RxD1
RS485+ 1
RxD1 -
GND
RxD1 -
GND
RS485- 1
TxD1 +
TxD1
TxD1 +
TxD1
TxD1 -
GND
TxD1 -
GND
GND1
GND
GND
GND
GND1
RxD2 +
RxD2
RxD2 +
RxD2
RS485+ 1
RxD2 -
GND
RxD2 -
GND
RS485- 1
TxD2 +
TxD2
TxD2 +
TxD2
TxD2 -
GND
TxD2 -
GND
GND2
GND
GND
GND
GND2
RxD3 +
RxD3
RxD3 +
RxD3
RS485+ 1
RxD3 -
GND
RxD3 -
GND
RS485- 1
TxD3 +
TxD3
TxD3 +
TxD3
TxD3 -
GND
TxD3 -
GND
GND3
GND
GND
GND
GND3
RxD4 +
RxD4
RxD4 +
RxD4
RS485+ 1
RxD4 -
GND
RxD4 -
GND
RS485- 1
TxD4 +
TxD4
TxD4 +
TxD4
TxD4 -
GND
TxD4 -
GND
GND4
GND
GND
GND
GND4
RxD5 +
RxD5
RxD5 +
RxD5
RS485+ 1
RxD5 -
GND
RxD5 -
GND
RS485- 1
TxD5 +
TxD5
TxD5 +
TxD5
TxD5 -
GND
TxD5 -
GND
GND5
GND
GND
GND
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
GND5
75
Technical Manual
4.5.11.2
Plug-in Pcbs for the Interface Conversion
4.5.11.2.1
TTL Plug-in Pcb GE3044G211

TTL
TTL
TTL
TP1
1
Output
5.0 V
Input
5.0V
Logic "1"
2.4 V
2.0 V
1
ztr1_614.jpg
0.4 V
0.8 V
ztr1_615.eps
Logic "0"
TP2
Fig. 4-24
0 V
0 V
Mark
Start
Par. Stop
TTL plug-in pcb
Function
76
TP1, Input
inversion
Jumper on 1/2 = default (RxD not inverted)

Jumper on 2/3 = RxD inverted
TP2, Output
inversion
Jumper on 1/2 = default (TxD not inverted)

Jumper on 2/3 = TxD inverted
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.11.2.2
20 mA Current Loop (TTY) Plug-in Pcb GE3044G212

+
TP1
1
20 mA
20 mA Logic "1"
ztr1_616.jpg
ztr1_617.eps
0 mA Logic "0"
TP2
Fig. 4-25
Mark
Start
8 Par. Stop
20 mA current loop (TTY) plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input
inversion

TP2, Output
inversion

4.5.11.2.3
RS232 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G214

TTL
RS - 232
TTL
TP1
1
+ 15 V
Output
Input
+ 15 V
Logic "0"
Space
+5V
+3V
-3V
ztr1_618.jpg
-5V
Logic "1"
Mark
1
TP2
Fig. 4-26
TP3
ztr1_619.eps
- 15 V
Mark
Start
- 15 V
Par. Stop
RS232 plug-in pcb
Function
TP1, Input
inversion

TP2, Output
inversion

TP3
Manufacturers use
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
77
Technical Manual
4.5.11.2.4
RS422/RS485 Plug-in Pcb GE3044G218
The conversion of RS485 is available at the COM Expander only.

TP2 TP1
TP4
1
ztr1_620.jpg
1
TP3
A
TTL
TTL
TTL
RS - 485
TTL
RS - 422
A
B
Output
Output
Input
+5V
Input
+5V
+5V
+5V
A
Logic "1"
2 V min
Logic "0"
Logic "1"
2 V min
400 mV
Logic "0"
400 mV
B
0
0
Mark
Start
Fig. 4-27
Par. Stop
ztr1_622.eps
ztr1_621.eps
Mark
Start
Par. Stop
RS422/RS485 plug-in pcb
Function
78
TP1, Input
inversion
RS422:
TP2, Output
inversion
RS422:
TP3,
Termination
Jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = termination resistor, jumper 3, 4, 5,6 must be set as described below
No jumper on 1/2 and 7/8 = no termination resistor
Jumper on 3/4 = termination with 1 k
Jumper on 5/6 = termination with 150
Jumper on 3/4 and on 5/6 = termination with 120
See page 44 for further information about the termination of the RS422 interface.
TP4
Jumper on 1/2 = set to 1/2 if the pcb is used for the COM Expander (default setting)
Jumper on 2/3 = set to 2/3 if the pcb is used for the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Operating Unit BD3027
zt1r_18.jpg
4.5.12
Fig. 4-28
The
-
Standard Operating Unit, integrated in desktop housing or console housing
complete Operating Unit consists of four parts:

Trackball BD 3028
Radar Keyboard
Trackpilot Keyboard
Keyboard Controller
The three parts can be mounted separately. All Operating Units are equipped with the Trackball as
standard. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard can be mounted as add-ons or ordered ex
works.
The Operating Unit is mounted in the console housings or in the desktop housing, or it can be delivered
separately for shipyard installation purposes. The Radar Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard have only
one common Keyboard Controller.
4.5.12.1
It is possible to connect up to four slave Operating Units or to install the Operating Unit at a distance to
the Display Electronics Unit. For these purposes, the Remote Keyboard Electronics is needed. See the
technical manual of the Remote Keyboard Electronics for further information.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
79
Technical Manual
4.5.12.2
Trackball BD 3028
The Trackball consists of a ball and three function keys. The

function keys correspond in their purpose to the function keys
of a PC mouse.
The interface of the Trackball unit is a PS/2 interface, which
is common for PCs.
The Trackball is connected to the Display Electronics Unit by
means of a cable of length 3 m with a standard PS/2
connector. The electronics unit of the Trackball cannot be
serviced. The setting of the jumpers must not be modified.
PS/2 connector pinning:
4.5.12.3
Function
Data
GND
+5V
Clock
zt1r_19.jpg
Pin
Trackball
Radar Keyboard
The Radar Keyboard is connected to the Keyboard

Controller in the Operating Units housing.
The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to the same
Keyboard Controller. The Keyboard Controller offers a
PS/2 interface for the connection to the Display Electronics Unit. This interface combines the Radar
Keyboard and the Trackpilot Keyboard.
zt1r_20.jpg
The keyboards require a separate DC supply for the

backlighting. The back lighting is adjusted together with
the back lighting of the Trackpilot Keyboard.
Radar Keyboard
80
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
Trackpilot Keyboard
The Trackpilot Keyboard is connected to a Keyboard

Controller in the Operating Units housing. The Radar
Keyboard is connected to the same Keyboard
Controller. The Keyboard Controller offers a PS/2 interface for the connection to the Display Electronics Unit.
This interface combines the Trackpilot Keyboard and
the Radar Keyboard.
zt1r_021.jpg
4.5.12.4
The keyboard requires a separate DC supply for the

back lighting. The back lighting is adjusted together
with the back lighting of the Radar Keyboard.
Trackpilot Keyboard
4.5.12.5
Keyboard Electronics
zt1r_086.jpg
Connection cable
Trackpilot Keyboard pcb Socket for

Controller
Trackball
Fig. 4-29
Keyboard Controller
GE3048G200
Radar Keyboard pcb
Keyboard pcbs with Keyboard Controller
Figure 4-29 shows the back of an opened Operating Unit. It is equipped with the Trackball and both
keyboards. The Keyboard Controller can be connected to both keyboard pcbs. The connection cable
transfers the signals from one board to the other.
The keyboards are connected to the Display Electronics Unit by means of a cable of length 3 m with a
standard PS/2 connector. The keyboards illumination is supplied with power via a separate cable.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
81
Technical Manual
The controller must be connected to the Radar Keyboard pcb. Only if no Radar Keyboard is installed, it
must be connected to the Trackpilot Keyboard.
The controller GE3048G200 is equipped with a PS/2 connector for the connection of an ASCII keyboard.
The shield cover has a hole for the connector.
PS/2 connector pinning:
Pin
82
Function
Data
GND
+5 V
Clock
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.5.13
RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)

For the installation of a
retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.
ON
J1
Supply
The RGB Buffer supplies up

to three monitors with the
incoming signal of the
Graphics And Video Processor (GVP).
DS2 DS1
ztr1_010.jpg
S1
The RGB Buffer receives the
TP3 TP2 TP1
video signals (RGB) and the
synchronization
signals
(HSYNC, VSYNC) via the
interface J2. The monitors
must be connected to the
S3
S2
S1
15-pin HD-Sub connectors
J3, J4 and J5. Unused
outputs must be terminated
by means of the DIPswitches
(output
RGB1
cannot be terminated). The
decoupling and amplification
J3
J4
J5
J2
RGB1 output
RGB2 output
RGB3 output
RGB input
of the signals are performed
by two circuits per video
channel with five outputs Fig. 4-30 RGB Buffer
each. The RGB Buffer circuits work with a constant amplification of 2 (+6 dB) and are optimized for monitors with internal termination.
The maximum cable length between the RGB Buffer and the monitor inputs is 50 m if an RGB coaxial
cable is used via an additional adapter. The length of the VGA cable must not exceed 3 m. The cable
must be terminated. Usually, the monitors have an input impedance of 75 , which is suitable for the
RGB Buffer.
The RGB Buffer must be supplied with +/-12 V via the connector J1. The two voltage regulators generate
an internal supply voltage of +/-5 V.
75 Ohm
75 Ohm
cable
Input of buffer,
J2_1
75 Ohm
AV=2
Output of
buffer,
J3_1
Red,
output of
GVP
75 Ohm
terminationresistor of
monitor1
75 Ohm
75 Ohm
AV=2
Output of
buffer,
J4_1
ztr1_012.eps
ztr1_012.eps
S3_1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
75 Ohm
AV=2
75 Ohm
S1_4
75 Ohm
cable
75 Ohm
monitor2
75 Ohm
Fig. 4-31
75 Ohm
cable
Output of
buffer,
J5_1
75 Ohm
cable
75 Ohm
monitor3
Block diagram showing one channel (red) of the RGB Buffer as an example
83
Technical Manual
Switches
S1, S2, S3 Termination
On 1)
1)
2)
Off 2)
S1_1
Inactive
S1_2
Output 3, J5, blue terminated
Output 3, J5, blue not terminated
S1_3
Output 3, J5, green terminated
Output 3, J5, green not terminated
S1_4
Output 3, J5, red terminated
Output 3, J5, red not terminated
S2_1
Output 2, J4, red terminated
Output 2, J4, red not terminated
S2_2
Output 2, J4, green terminated
Output 2, J4, green not terminated
S2_3
Output 2, J4, blue terminated
Output 2, J4, blue not terminated
S2_4
Inactive
S3_1
Output 2, J4, H-sync terminated
Output 2, J4, H-sync not terminated
S3_2
Output 2, J4, V-sync terminated
Output 2, J4, V-sync not terminated
S3_3
Output 3, J5, V-sync terminated
Output 3, J5, V-sync not terminated
S3_4
Output 3, J5, H-sync terminated
Output 3, J5, H-sync not terminated
Termination = 75 to AGND; select if no monitor is connected

No termination; select, if monitor is connected
Connectors
J1, Power Supply
Pin
Function
-12 V
-12 V
GND
GND
+12 V
+12 V
GND
GND
n.c.
10
n.c.
J2, Video Input; J3, Output Monitor 1;

J4, Output Monitor 2, J5 Output Monitor 3
Test Pins
84
Pin
Function
Pin
Function
RED
n.c.
GREEN
10
AGND
BLUE
11
AGND
AGND
12
n.c.
AGND
13
Horizontal sync.
AGND
14
Vertical sync.
AGND
15
n.c.
AGND
LEDs
Pin
Function
Signal
On
Off
TP1
VCC (Out)
+5 V
DS1
-5V VBB on
-5V VBB off
TP2
AGND (Out)
0V
DS2
+5V VCC on
+5V VCC off
TP3
VBB (Out)
-5 V
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e04.fm / 06.09.05
5 Setting-To-Work/Configuration
Technical Manual
Setting-To-Work/Configuration
The BIOS of the system is configured ex works. A description of the settings is shown in Section 5.14.
The system configuration and most of the adjustments and settings can be performed by means of the
System Maintenance Manager. All adjustments which have to be performed by means of hardware
elements are described in Section 4, F u n c t i o n a l D e s c r i p t i o n . For a guide through the setting-to-work
process, see Section 6.
WARNING
For the use of the different software versions, some prerequisites must be fulfilled. See Section 7, R e v i s i o n O v e r v i e w
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
85
5.1 Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
Technical Manual
5.1
Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position
5.1.1
Diskette Drive without Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100)

The drive module consists of the diskette drive and two brackets. Depending on the fitting position of the
Display Electronics Unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing or at the bottom
of the housing. The Display Electronics Unit is delivered with the drive module mounted at one side of
the housing. This version is needed in the case of console mounting. The diskette drive can be operated
through an opening in the cover of the housing.
Suitable openings and threaded bolts for the module exist in the side and in the cover of the housing.
The opening which is not used must be closed by means of a dummy plate. Follow these steps to modify
the fitting position of the drive module:
1.
Disconnect the electronics unit from the mains supply. Open the housing and disconnect the
grounding cable.
2.
Carefully disconnect the data cable and the power supply cable from the diskette drive.
3.
Remove the four screws of the drive unit.
4.
Dismount the brackets and mount them as shown in Figure 5-1.

For mounting at the bottom of
the housing (the diskette drive
is operated through an opening
in the side of the housing)
ztr1_602.gif
For mounting at the side of the

housing (the diskette drive is
operated through an opening in
the cover)
Fig. 5-1
86
Diskette drive brackets
5.
Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must be
used to close the first opening which has been used so far.
6.
A plate with adhesive tape is fixed inside the cover. This plate has to be stuck on behind the
opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Dummy plate
ztr1_605.gif
Inside of the cover
ztr1_607.gif
Diskette drive in the side
ztr1_606.gif
Diskette drive in the cover
Fig. 5-2
Mounting of the diskette drive
7.
Fix the drive module by means of the four screws.
8.
Connect the data cable and the power supply cable to the diskette drive.
9.
Connect the grounding cable and close the housing.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
87
Technical Manual
5.1.2
Drive Module with Diskette Drive, Hard-Disk and DVD-ROM Drive (MULTIPILOT 1100)
The drive module consist of the hard disk drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the diskette drive. Depending
on the fitting position of the electronics unit, the drive module must be mounted at the side of the housing
or at the cover of the housing. The electronics unit is delivered as a desktop version with the drive module
mounted at one side of the housing. This version is needed for the SCC console, the standard console
and for desktop mounting. For the compact console and for bulkhead mounting, the fitting position of the
electronics unit is different and the position of the drive module must be changed.
Follow the steps to modify the fitting position of the drive module:
1.
Disconnect the electronics unit from mains supply.
2.
Open the housing and disconnect the grounding cable.
3.
Carefully disconnect the data cables and the three supply cables from the drives. Depending on the
drives version, the cables of the hard disk drive and/or the DVD-ROM drive are connected by means
of an adapter. The adapter(s) may be fixed with hot melt adhesive and cannot be removed. Two
different types of supply connector are available in the electronics unit. The type which has to be
used depends on the drive and the adapter. See Figure 5-3.
Data cable for hard disk and
DVD-ROM drive. The cable is
always connected to the IDE1
connector.
ztr1_628_mp.jpg
NOTE:
The DVD-ROM drive is
connected as a slave drive on
the same data cable as the
hard disk. It has no separate
data cable.
Data cable of
diskette drive
Power supply
connectors for
5.25" drives
Power supply
connector for
3.5" drives
The power connector at

the adapter must not be
disconnected.
Fig. 5-3
88
Adapter
1
ztr1_632_mp.jpg
ztr1_636_mp.jpg
Disconnection of the drive cables
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
4.
Unscrew the 4 nuts (1) at the brackets. Pull the module out of the opening and then lift it carefully
at the front to get the shield out of the opening. Then lift the complete module out of the housing. If
necessary, the shield can be turned by removing the nut on top of the shield. When fastening the
nut again, ensure that the shield is adjusted in a way that the DVD-ROM drive can be opened
without rubbing against the shield.
ztr1_629_mp.jpg
ztr1_630_mp.jpg
Brackets
Fig. 5-4
5.
Dismounting of the drive module
Unscrew the nuts (2) (see Figure 5-4) and disassemble the brackets. Change the brackets from the
left to the right and vice versa (1)! The brackets are different from each other. The brackets must be
mounted with turning through 180 (2.). Do not fasten the nuts.
Shield
2. 180
ztr1_634_mp.jpg
ztr1_633_mp.jpg
1. Change brackets
For the electronis unit in SCC console,

standard console, desktop version
Fig. 5-5
6.
For the electronics unit in compact console
Turning the brackets
Break out the dummy plate in the second opening for the diskette drive. This dummy plate must be
used to close the first opening, which has been used so far.
A plate with adhesive tape is fixed on the power supply unit. This plate has to be stuck on behind
the opening. The dummy plate must then be pressed onto this plate through the opening.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
89
Technical Manual
7.
Connect the cables to the drives (the hard disk drive is the
master if only one data cable must be used for DVD-ROM
drive and hard disk) and mount the drive module at its
new position. Be careful with the cables. They must not
be squeezed under the brackets and must not be led over
sharp edges. Do not fasten the nuts (3).
Adjust roughly the position of the drives before fastening
one of the nuts (2) on each side. Check the position by
closing the cover. The drives must fit into the opening.
ztr1_635_mp.jpg
Then adjust the position of the drive module and fasten the nuts (3). Check the position of the
module by closing the cover. The surface of the diskette drive, the DVD-ROM drive and the cover
must be on the same level.
Then loosen the nuts (2) and adjust the drives so that they are at right angles to the opening (and
therefore at right angles to the brackets). Fasten the nuts (2).
WARNING:
It is important that the drives are mounted without any
tension. The drives must be mounted exactly in parallel and
at right angles to the brackets. Avoid any torsion of the
drive module while mounting and adjusting it in the electronics unit housing.
90
8.
The data cable must not cover the memory modules or the processor fan!
9.
Connect the grounding cable to the cover and close the housing.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.2
5.2 CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing
CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing

The RADARPILOT 1100 can be upgraded to be a CHARTRADAR 1100 or it is delivered as a CHARTRADAR 1100 ex works. If the radar is delivered as a CHARTRADAR ex works, the CHART Function
Licence Key is still stored in the radar and a sticker with the CHART Function Licence Key is fixed on the
radar housing (fan outlet)
To enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities of a standard radar, the licence must be ordered. The
licensing procedure must be performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key must
be ordered when hardware components of the CHARTRADAR have been exchanged.
1.
The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 on
page 120).
2.
The
-
Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by
e-mail (shipservice@sam-electronics.de, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),
fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or
phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).
The
-
following information must be added:

Date of Commissioning
Name of the Service Engineer
Vessel / Yard / Build No.
Shipping Company
Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit
3.
The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must be
entered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
User Chart Objects

Even if the licensing is not performed, it is possible to display the User Chart Objects, which have been
defined on the connected CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100. For this purpose, the CHARTPILOT
must be configured as chartserver (see the technical manuals of the CHARTPILOT for further information).
5.3
MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing

The charts are licensed, installed and maintained at a CHARTPILOT which must be connected. See the
technical manual of the CHARTPILOT for further information.
The CHART Function Licence Key is still stored in the MULTIPILOT ex works and a sticker with the
Licence Key is fixed on the radar housing (fan outlet).
If the licence key has not been generated so far, it must be ordered. The licensing procedure must be
performed as follows. It may also be possible that a new licence key must be ordered when hardware
components of the MULTIPILOT have been exchanged.
1.
The CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code must be read out (see Section 5.11.7.1 on
page 120).
2.
The
-
Identification Code must be send to the Customer Support Centre of SAM Electronics by
e-mail (shipservice@sam-electronics.de, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time),
fax (+49 (0)180 300 85 54, working days 08.00...18.00 German local time) or
phone (24 h HotLine (+49 (0)180 300 85 53).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
91
5.3 MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing
The
3.
92

Technical Manual
following information must be added:

Date of Commissioning
Name of the Service Engineer
Vessel / Yard / Build No.
Shipping Company
Serial Number of the Display Electronics Unit
The Customer Support Center calculates the CHART Function Licence Key. This key must be
entered in the corresponding data field of the radar to enable the MULTIPILOT functionalities.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.4
5.4 UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration
UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration

NOTE:
The radar and the AIS itself must be restarted after any change in the configuration for the AIS. Otherwise
these modifications may have no effect.
NACOS xx-5 and RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 Systems
In Radar 1100 series systems or if the radar is part of a NACOS xx-5 system, the radar must be parameterized for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400, because the interfaces of the radar are used for the
ships sensor data output. Follow the instructions in Section 5.4.1, 5.4.2 and 5.4.3.
5.4.1
Requirements
The following hard/software must exist for the connection of a UAIS DEBEG 3400:
-
5.4.2
Analog Interface GE3044G207 for the connection of the AIS Primary Display Port with SH3014G203,
RS422 interface adapter (plug-in pcb for the Analog Interface) or
Ethernet network adapter
Installation and Cable Connections

1.
2.
3.
Installation:
See the technical manual of the UAIS DEBEG 3400 for information regarding the installation of the
antennas and the electronics unit.
Power supply:
The power supply and the antennas must be connected as described in the technical manual of the
UAIS DEBEG 3400.
Sensor interfaces:
The sensor input channels of the AIS electronics unit (connector 3) must be connected to one of the
serial I/Os of the Indicator (Interconnection Board GE3044G216, TB1). The baud rate of the output
of the serial interface of the radar is always the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unit
which is connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.
ztr1_609.eps
(Each of the 4 serial interfaces of the

Display Electronics Unit can be used.
This is only an example.)
TB
5 GND
4 TxD 1 3 TxD 1 +
Fig. 5-6
4.
Ship's Sensor Data
(Each of the 3 serial interfaces S1,

S2, S3 of the UAIS can be used.
This is only an example.)
Connector 3
7 GND
6 Channel 1 5 Channel 1 +
Interfaces for ships sensor data, UAIS DEBEG 3400
Data link for display and operating data via Ethernet LAN:
The UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit must be connected to the Ethernet LAN of the radar/MULTIPILOT system. An Analog Interface is not necessary for the connection of the AIS in this case.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
93
Technical Manual
5.
Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (COM Expander):
The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to a serial
interface of the COM Expander (TB1...5). The plug-in adapter pcb GE3044G218 must be connected
to the corresponding socket of the COM Expander pcb.
ztr1_643.eps
MULTIPILOT 1100
COM expander
TB1...5
1 AIS RxD, Input +
2 AIS RxD, Input 3 AIS TxD, Output +
4 AIS TxD, Output 5 GND
Fig. 5-7
6.
Connector 2
7 Output +
8 Output 5 Input +
6 Input 1 GND
Data link for display and operating data via Primary Display Port (Analog Interface):
The Primary Display Port of the UAIS (connector 2, terminal 1, 5...8) must be connected to the serial
interface of the Analog Interface (TB10,11,14...16).
Important! See Section 3.2.3 on page 37 for systems with more than one Analog Interface.
ztr1_642.eps
Analog Interface
TB
10 AIS RxD, Input 11 AIS RxD, Input +
14 AIS TxD, Output 15 AIS TxD, Output +
16 GND
Fig. 5-8
5.4.3
UAIS DEBEG 3400
Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the COM Expander
MULTIPILOT 1100
7.
Primary Display Port
The
-
Primary Display Port
UAIS DEBEG 3400
Connector 2
8 Output 7 Output +
6 Input 5 Input +
1 GND
Connection of the Primary Display Port UAIS DEBEG 3400 at the Analog Interface
following interfaces of the UAIS are not connected to the radar:

Pilot Port (must be accessible for the pilot)
Long Range Port (must be connected to a long range communication system)
UAIS DEBEG internal position system (can be used as position sensor)
UAIS DEBEG internal alarm relay (can be connected to an alarm system)
Configuration
The following parameters must be set:
1.
94
System Layout
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > AIS
The AIS and its connection to the system must be defined by means of the settings Not Connected
(default), Connected to Sensor Interface or Connected to LAN.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
2.
Administration data:
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > Administration
Parameters (these data are transmitted via VHF and must be filled in):
Vessel
Call Sign
MMSI Number
IMO Number
Type of Ship or Type of Ship Coded as Number
The setting of the Type of Ship parameter influences the operators Voyage Data menu. The
list of the Cargo or Ship Type menu in the Voyage Data menu is adapted to the Type of Ship
setting. If the type of ship is not available in the list box Type of Ship, it is possible to select
the corresponding number in the Type of Ship coded as Number data field. This parameter
also influences the operators Voyage Data menu.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Ship Data > System
Position and other Ship Dimensions
Parameters (see Figure 6-4 on page 163 for further information):
Distance to Bow, Distance to Stern, Distance to SB, Distance to P
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System/Ship Parameters > Basic Radar
Parameter:
AIS Lost Target without Alarm
Default setting is 16.0 NM. If an AIS target is lost outside this range, no alarm is generated.
3.
Interface for the Ships Sensor Data:

The serial I/O to which the Sensor Input Channel of the AIS electronics unit is connected must be
parameterized as ship sensor data output.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial Interfaces 1...4 > Output
Parameter:
Serial Output used as (select AIS Navigation Data)
Note: The baud rate of the output is the same as the baud rate of the input, so that the unit which
is connected to the input must have the same baud rate as the AIS.
By means of this parameter, the repetition rate of 1 Hz is automatically set for the telegrams HDT,
ROT, VBW, GLL, VTG, DTM. It is not necessary to configure the Output > Transfer parameters.
4.
Interface for the Primary Display Port (not necessary if the AIS is connected via LAN):
Connection via Analog Interface:
The serial interface of the Analog Interface must be configured as AIS interface.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >
Serial I/O 1
Parameters:
Driver (set to AIS Automatic Ident System)
Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
95
Technical Manual
Connection via COM Expander:

The serial interface to which the AIS is connected must be configured as AIS interface.
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2 >
Serial I/O X
Parameters:
Driver (set to AIS Automatic Identification System)
Type of AIS (select DEBEG 3400)
5.
AIS configuration
Path:
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > AIS
Parameters:
AIS Channel (AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice)
Distance of GPS Antenna Longitudinal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96)
Distance of GPS Antenna Transversal (GPS antenna of the UAIS, distance to system
position; see Figure 5-9 on page 96))
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor Interface S1...S3 (select IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud)
10 m
8m
8m
-4 m 4 m
LT =
Log Transducer, defines the system position

10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS =
Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m distance longitudinal to system position
RX =
Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m distance longitudinal to system position
P1 =
GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m distance transversal and -85 m distance

longitudinal to system position
P2 =
GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m distance transversal and -85 m distance

longitudinal to System Position
PAIS =
AIS GPS antenna, -2 m distance transversal and -110 m distance

longitudinal to system position
-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
-110 m
120 m
- Longitudinal +
LT
RS
RX
P1
P2
PAIS
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 5-9
System position (example)
NOTE:
In addition, it is necessary to configure the AIS in the System Layout menu of a connected CHARTPILOT 1100 to enable the AIS functions of the CHARTPILOT.
96
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.5
5.5 Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300
Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300

1.
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > System Layout > VDR
Select Connected to VDR DEBEG 4300.
2.
System Maintenance Manager > Configure > VDR

The following parameters define from which Indicator the VDR (Voyage Data Recorder) is supplied
with radar pictures.
Parameters:
Main Radar:
Select Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s. The radar picture is
stored on the final recording medium and on the hard disk of the VDR.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture every 15 s additionally. The radar
picture is sent with an offset of 7.5 s to the picture of the main radar. If a further Indicator is
selected (see parameter below), the picture of that Indicator is transmitted alternating with the
picture of this Indicator, so that the additional pictures are sent by each Indicator every 30 s.
The radar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.
Additional Picture Stored from Radar:
Select None/Indicator 1...X.
The selected Indicator supplies the VDR with a radar picture additionally. The radar picture is
sent alternating with the first additional picture m.a., so that it is transmitted every 30 s. The
radar picture is stored on the hard disk of the VDR only.
3.
Interfaces of the radar must not be configured. The VDR is supplied with data via the Ethernet LAN.
For further information, see the documentation of the VDR.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
97

Technical Manual
5.6 System Maintenance Manager
5.6
System Maintenance Manager

ATTENTION
The window of the System Maintenance Manager partly covers the PPI.
Therefore, the System Maintenance Manager may be started only if the
system is not being used for navigation.
Some of the system maintenance functions must not be used by unauthorized persons. The registers
concerned are locked by means of a password.
Register
For the use of

an additional
ASCII keyboard
Restart the
radar
ztr1_104.gif
Exit the Maintenance Manager
Fig. 5-10
5.6.1
System Maintenance Manager window
Trackball and Cursor

If you are already familiar with graphic man-machine interfaces,
you might be able to skip this section. Before doing so, you
should have a look at the picture of the Trackball beside this text.
Do key
ztr1_102.jpg
Every operating step begins with the operator moving the cursor
by means of the Trackball to a particular place on the window (to
a text item, a numerical value, a symbol on the PPI or any
desired place on the PPI). The next step is always the pressing
of one of the Trackball keys. In the following, this brief pressing
of the key is called clicking. What then happens depends on the
key used, the element on which clicking took place, and the operating situation, and is the subject of these instructions.
More keys for lefthanded and righthanded people
The cursor has a resting position to which it goes 30 seconds

after the last operating process. This position is situated beside
the PPI, below the ACQ TGT area. This function is switched off in the service windows. If the cursor
98
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
is situated outside the PPI, it is shaped like a hand or an arrow. Inside the PPI, it is a cross. This
function is switched off if the System Maintenance Manager is opened, because its window can
partly cover the PPI.
Do Key
The most important key is the middle one. Almost all data areas react to this key, which performs
the functions that are needed the most frequently. In the following instructions, it is called the "Do
key". In the following, "clicking" always means clicking with the Do key unless stated otherwise.
MORE Keys
The two keys situated above the Do key are called "More keys". They have identical functions (for
ergonomical operation for left-handed people and right-handed people). Not all elements which can
be operated by means of the Do key react to the More key also, and if they do, then always with
functions other than those of the Do key. Furthermore, by pressing of the More key, open menus or
lists can generally be closed without any results, and inputs can be aborted.
-
If an ASCII keyboard is connected, the check box ASCII Keyboard in the lower left-hand part of the
window "System Maintenance Manager" must be set ( appears).
All windows and dialogue boxes can be left by clicking on the symbol
corner of the window or dialogue box or by clicking on the Exit button.
The windows and dialogue boxes can be moved. Place the cursor on the upper bar of the window
until the cursor changes from a single arrow to a quadruple arrow. Press the Do key and keep it
pressed while moving the window to the new position by means of the Trackball. Release Do to fix
the window or dialogue box at the new position.
If figures or letters have to be entered, a small window with a

keyboard appears. If an ASCII keyboard is connected
(suggested for convenient parameterizing), it can be used to
make all the entries needed. All entries are shown in the stylized display in the keyboard window. If no ASCII keyboard is
connected, the entries must be performed via the Trackball and the Do key. Place the cursor on a
button (figure or letter) of the keyboard window and click with Do on this button. The selected figure
or letter appears in the stylized display of the keyboard. To complete an entry, click on the Enter
button of the keyboard.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
in the top right-hand
99

Technical Manual
5.6.2
Entering the System Maintenance Manager
ztr1_130.gif
To enter the System Maintenance Manager, click on the Menu button. The message "CAUTION - System
will leave normal operation mode" appears. Click on Yes to enter the Maintenance Manager. The window
"System Maintenance Manager" is opened, where six different registers can be selected with the Trackball.
If the one of the registers is selected, a dialogue box for the password is displayed
(not for Selfcheck, Telemonitoring Data and Tools).
To enter the password, click into the data field and type the password by means of an
additional ASCII keyboard or by means of the virtual keyboard by using the Trackball
and the Do key. Confirm with Enter. If the service switch on the RDC is activated, the
input can be passed by clicking on OK without entering the password.
ztr1_133.gif
Each time the registers Service or

Configure are selected, the technician is
asked to fill in a service report. It is highly
advisable to state all modifications, repairs
and maintenance work in this report. The
request can be suppressed by activating the
checkbox Do not show again. The
checkbox is deactivated automatically by
leaving the System Maintenance Manager.
Service Report
5.6.3
Service Log-in Levels

Two log-in levels are available for the service technicians. The standard log-in level (service) offers
access to all relevant parameters. For more complex installations, the advanced service levels must be
selected.
The service log-in level is determined by means of the password.
The currently selected service level is displayed in the title of the System Maintenance Manager window.
100
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.7
5.7 Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager
Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager
Menu
Utilities...
Tools
See page 102
Date & Time

Diskette
Map Transfer/Delete
Track Transfer
/Delete 2)
Selfcheck
See page 105
Keyboard
Buzzer
Map Storage Test
RDC Test Pictures
ARPA
Telemonitoring Data
See page 109
Versions
Faults
Fault History
Maintenance
System Maintenance Manager
See page 98
Configure
See page 112
These three menus are also available for

operators, see also the Operating Instructions.
Config. File Info
See page 114
System Layout
See page 114
System/Ship Parameters Ship Data

Basic Radar
See page 115
Startup Sensor Selec.
Radar
See page 120
Indicator
Indicator 1...5
Transceiver
Transceiver 1...5
Sensor Interfaces
See page 127
AIS
Sensor Interface 1 ... 2
Gyro
Pulse Log
Serial I/O 1...5
NACOS 1)
See page 134
See page 134
Conning 3)
See page 135
VDR
Commissioning Data
See page 151
Fig. 5-11
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
TRACKPILOT
ENGINE INTERFACE
Planning System 1)
ECDIS 4)
See page 138
Service
See page 139
See page 93
Chart Database
See page 97
Indicator
See page 140
Monitor Adjust
RDC Service + Adjust
Check Alarm I/O
Serial I/O Monitor
Software Update (+PCBs)
PCB Software Update
RKE Software Update 1)
RKE Settings 1)
Run from Diskette
Transceiver
See page 145
Setting to Work
Advanced Settings
Magnetron Hours
Antenna Information
Interswitch
See page 150
Input Adjust
NACOS 1)
See page 150
TRACKPILOT
ENGINE INTERFACE
Config Transfer
Service Report
Administration
Serial Interfaces
Serial I/O 1...4
Magnetron
Tuning Offset
STC Compensation
1)
2)
3)
4)
Headmarker
Trigger Delay
STC Delay
Video MBS
PMA Display
PM Adjust
Appears depending on the system layout

Only if no CHARTPILOT is connected
For CHARTRADAR or MULTIPILOT
For MULTIPILOT
Menu structure
101
Technical Manual
5.8 Tools Menu
5.8
Tools Menu
5.8.1
Date & Time
ztr1_134.gif
By means of the menu Date &

Time the date and time of the
computer (motherboard) can be
set. The upper data field shows
the existing date and time. To Increase
modify the date and/or time, click Decrease
into one of the three data fields
of Set Time or Set Date and
enter a new value by means of
an optional ASCII keyboard or
with the aid of the up and down Data fields
buttons to the left of the data
fields. If the button Apply &
Save is clicked, the values are
saved, but the radar must be
restarted to activate the new
date and time. The date and time
of the computer are different
from the system date and time.
Tools / Date & Time
The system date and time is
detemined by the GPS data. The date and time of the computer are used for file operations (e.g. date
and time of the R10K.sam file) and in can be used if the system time from the GPS data is not available.
It is possible to set the system date and time with the computer date and time by means of the Set to
Computer Time button.
5.8.2
Map Transfer
By means of the function Map Transfer, the
maps which have been edited on the Indicator can be saved to a diskette or to another
Indicator connected to the system. The maps
can also be read from a diskette or from
another Indicator and saved onto the local
Indicator.
The destination for the transfer must be

selected from the Destination listbox. The
files to be transferred must be selected in the
Files in Source window. By clicking on
Add>> the files are copied with their directory
structure to the Files to Transfer window.
The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
102
ztr1_156.gif
To transmit maps to another Indicator or

diskette, the Transmit button must activated.
Tools / Map Transfer, Transmit
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.8 Tools Menu
To receive maps from another Indicator or to

restore them from a diskette, the Receive
button must be activated.
By means of the Clear button, the selected

files can be deleted from the Files for
Transfer window on the right. As long as files
are shown in this window, it is not possible to
change from Transmit to Receive or vice
versa.
ztr1_131.gif
The source of the maps must be selected

from the Source listbox. The files to be transferred have to be selected in the Files in
Source window on the left. By clicking on
Add>>, the files are copied with their directory structure to the Files to Transfer
window. The transfer is started by clicking on
Transfer.
Tools / Map Transfer, Receive
Existing files are overwritten with both functions. A warning message appears in this case and the transfer must be confirmed.
It is not possible to transfer maps from or to RADAR 9xxx Indicators.
5.8.3
Map Delete
If the memory of the RDC is not sufficient for
the map files or if maps are not needed any
longer, they can be deleted.
By means of the Clear button, the selected

files can be deleted from the Files to Delete
window.
ztr1_008.gif
First of all, the source must be selected from

the Delete in listbox. The files to be deleted
have to be selected in the Files in ... window
on the left. By clicking on Add>>, the files are
copied with their directory structure to the
Files to Delete window on the right. To start
the deletion, the button Delete... must be
clicked. The warning message that appears
must be confirmed.
NOTE:
The diskette can contain maps, tracks and
the configuration files. The free space on the
diskette can be checked by means of the Diskette function.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Tools / Map Delete
103
Technical Manual
5.8 Tools Menu
5.8.4
Track Transfer
If a planning system like the CHARTPILOT is
connected, the button Track Transfer is not
visible. The tracks must be handled by
means of the planning system in this case.
With Track Transfer, the tracks which have
been edited on the Indicator can be saved to
a diskette or to another Indicator connected
to the system.
The operation of the Track Transfer function

is the same as for the Map Transfer function.
ztr1_195.gif
Tracks can also be read from a diskette or

from another Indicator and stored in the local
Indicator.
Tools / Track Transfer
5.8.5
Diskette
The Floppy tools provide the following functions:
Info...: Shows the capacity, the used space
and the free space of the diskette in the
diskette drive.
Erase...: Deletes all files on the diskette in
the diskette drive. Caution: All files on the
diskette will be lost.
ztr1_157.gif
Format...: Formats the diskette in the diskette

drive. Caution: All files on the diskette will be
lost.
Tools / Floppy
104
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.9
5.9 Selfcheck Menu
Selfcheck Menu
Click on the register Selfcheck in the
System Maintenance Manager. Select
the unit that has to be tested from the
list and start the test with the Start Test
button. An additional window especially
for the selected selfcheck appears. To
close the window and stop the test, click
on the symbol
in the top right
corner of the additional window. The
test pictures can be stopped by clicking
on the Stop button in the additional
window.
ztr1_140.gif
If errors occur during a test, a corresponding message is shown in the field

Selfcheck Messages.
Selfcheck menu
5.9.1
Keyboard
The Keyboard Selfcheck tests the Trackball unit and the (optional) keyboard(s). After the start, a schematic picture of the operating elements appears.
When the keys are operated, the corresponding key of the schematic picture is pressed down virtually,
which means that this key is functioning properly.
If the boxes situated at the rotary knob symbols fill up in red in accordance with the operation of the rotary
knobs, this means that the rotary knobs are functioning properly.
5.9.2
Buzzer
After the start, a list of various acoustic alarm signals appears. If, when one of the buttons in the list has
been clicked, the relevant acoustic signal is sounded, this means that the acoustic alarm is OK.
5.9.3
Map Storage Test

The Map Storage Test generates test maps, stores them to the IDE memory module and deletes them
afterwards. Click on Start Test to begin the test. If the test has been passed successfully the message
"Map Storage Test : passed" appears in the display field. If the memory failed the test, error messages
appear and the IDE memory module must be exchanged.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
105
5.9 Selfcheck Menu
5.9.4

Technical Manual
RDC Test Pictures

After the start, a list of the various test pictures that can be displayed appears. By means of these test
pictures, you can determine whether the video processing of the radar data converter (RDC) is working
properly.
In the case of pictures 1 to 3, only the brilliance adjustment function is active; in the case of picture 4,
the adjustment functions for gain and range are also active.
Picture 1
In each row of blue to yellow squares, the
yellow intensity must increase from left to
right.
The squares move slowly downwards.
ztr1_105.gif
Each square must be uniformly coloured.
Picture 2
ztr1_106.gif
In the middle square, 16 colours are displayed

cyclically one after another.
106
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.9 Selfcheck Menu
Picture 3
Each of the four sectors has eight intensities.
ztr1_107.gif
They are moved round in the clockwise direction.
Picture 4
ztr1_108.gif
The illustration shows the test picture in the

following case:
Range: 6 NM
Gain: Normal setting
Picture 5
The illustration shows the test picture in the
following case:
Range: 6 NM
Gain: Maximum
The signal for this picture is fed into the RDC

behind the input potentiometer. If the test
picture is displayed as described, the analog
and the digital part of the RDC are working
properly.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_109.gif
If the gain is reduced, the intensity of the rings

decreases, beginning with the inner rings of
the sets of six.
107
5.9 Selfcheck Menu
5.9.5
Technical Manual
ARPA
By means of the ARPA function test, the
overall performance of the ARPA function
(generated by the RDC pcb) can be assessed.
This should be done periodically.
Select the 6 NM range and select ARPA from
the list. The individual echoes displayed are
synthetic targets:
-
ztr1_127.gif
It must be possible to acquire them

manually.
When the acquisition / guard zone is
placed over one or more targets, automatic acquisition must take place,
together with the associated symbols and
alarms. The targets must be tracked
automatically.
All targets travel along with the own ship.
Therefore, their true courses and true speeds must be the same as the own ship's course and
speed.
The ARPA test picture is not available if the system is not an ARPA radar.
108
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.10
5.10 Telemonitoring Data Menu
Telemonitoring Data Menu

All information which has been listed stays in the list. It is possible to scroll through this list by means of
a scrollbar. The list must be deleted manually by means of the Clear button.
5.10.1
Listing the System Faults

Existing system faults (which generate the alarm indication SYSTEM FAULT xxxxx) can be listed. This
function is also accessible to the operator because, in the event of a fault, a service visit can be better
prepared or omitted altogether if the service station can be informed of the fault code list beforehand.
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list. New information is added to the list, so that it is possible to scroll through this list. The list can be deleted by clicking
on the Clear button.
Present Faults
List of present
system faults
Generates a list of the

system faults that exist
Deletes the
display of data
Refresh switched on: The fault

list is continually updated
ztr1_111.gif
Generates an indication of the software version, see Section 5.10.2.
Fig. 5-12
System fault list (present faults)
To list the present system faults, click on Faults. All system faults that exist at the time are listed. New
faults are not added to the list.
If the Refresh function is switched on, new faults are added to the list and the error detection of the radar
is more sensitive. A small square lights up in the Faults button if this function is activated. To disable the
function, click on the Faults button again.
For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 and
Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
109
Technical Manual
Fault History, System Integrity Faults
History of the
system faults
Generates a history of the

system faults and deletes
the fault history (More key)
Deletes the
display of data
Saves the errors
and the version
data on a diskette
ztr1_600.gif
Generates an indication of the software version, see Section 5.10.2.
Fig. 5-13
System fault list (Fault History, System Integrity Faults)
To show the history of system faults, click on Fault History. All system faults that appeared so far are
listed. The column Count shows how often the error appeared in the past. The date and the time corresponds to the date and time when the error appeared for the first time.
For further information about the system faults, see Section 8.2.2, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 181 and
Section 10, S y s t e m F a u l t s on page 207.
Below the Fault History, the System Integrity Faults list shows the processes which have caused a
system crash.
Deletion of the Fault History
With the Clear button, the display is cleared, but not the history. To delete the error history, click on Fault
History by means of the More key.
Saving the Versions and Faults on a Diskette
By means of the Save to Disk button, the ship data, the software version list, the Fault History and the
System Integrity Fault list are saved as an ASCII file on a diskette. This ASCII file is also shown in the
Telemonitoring Data window (except of the ship data). The Fault History is deleted automatically.
Existing files on the diskette are overwritten.
110
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.10.2
Determining the Software Versions

To display the software versions, click on Versions. The software version of the radar version and some
of its main components are indicated on the display.
List of software versions
Software Version
of the radar
Software version of the

software in the IDE memory
module
Scrollbar
ztr1_142.gif
This deletes the

display of data
Fig. 5-14
List of software versions
The same list is used for the determination of software versions and for the fault code list so that new
information is added to the list when the Version button is clicked. It might be necessary to scroll through
this list. The list can be deleted by clicking on the Clear button.
For master/slave or remote installations, at least two Remote Keyboard Electronics units are needed.
These components are listed as follows (example for one master with three slaves):
RKE*/aMST 1
RKE /aSLV 5
RKE /aSLV 6
RKE /aSLV 7
GE3048G200
GE3048G200
GE3048G200
GE3048G200
=
=
=
=
Master with address 1, "*" = connected to this electronics unit

Slave with address 5
The software version of the pcbs is shown as well.

The mode (master/slave) and the numbers of the Remote Keyboard Electronics are set by means of DIP
switches on the Remote Keyboard Electronics pcb. For further information, see the corresponding technical manual.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
111

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11
Configure Menu
By means of the Configure menu, the system parameters can be entered. It is organized into several
submenus as System Layout, Radar, AIS, Sensor Interfaces or NACOS.
The size of the tree in the left-hand window depends on the settings which have been made in the
System Layout menu. Only components which have been defined in the system layout appear in the
tree.
5.11.1
Defaults/Reload/Save Buttons
Defaults Button
The button Defaults sets all parameters of the opened window/menu and of the submenus to the default
values. Menus in parallel or menus of higher levels are not set to the default values.
Save Button
To save modified parameters in the IDE memory module and in the component which has been selected
for configuration, click on Save.
Leaving without Modifications
If parameter settings have been changed, the operator is asked about saving the modifications when he
is leaving the menu. To save the settings, click on Save & Exit. To drop the modifications and keep the
old settings, click on Cancel.
Saving Parameters in the Analog Interface/COM Expander
The parameters are saved online in the IDE memory module and in the component. The parameters are
transmitted to the Analog Interface automatically each time while booting the system.
Saving Parameters in the TRACKPILOT
The parameters are saved by means of the Save button in the IDE memory module and in the TRACKPILOT. When the TRACKPILOT is selected, the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT are compared
with the ones in the IDE memory modules ones.
5.11.2
Restart for the Activation of TCU Parameters

By clicking Save, the parameters of the selected Transceiver are stored in the IDE memory
module and in the TCU. Some of the parameters work immediately after clicking Save (for
example, the parameter Azimuth Pulses per Revolution).
Some of the parameters only take effect after a restart (for example, the parameter Speed
Capability). When such a parameter has been modified and saved, a warning wich requests the
restarting of the system appears when the System Maintenance Manager is going to be exited. If the
restart is not performed, the parameter has no effect.
112
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11.3
5.11 Configure Menu
Navigation in the Menu Structure

On the left-hand side of the configure screen, the menu tree is displayed. This tree can be expanded by
clicking on the + symbols. Then the next level of the branch behind the symbol + is shown and the +
becomes a -. To hide the twig structure, click on the - symbol. Use the button Expand below the tree to
show the complete tree structure. Return to the simplified display with Collapse.
View with compressed tree and reduced list.
Shows all items (all
Browse buttons
disappear)
Shows the
complete tree
structure
Shows all items of

this menu item (this
Browse button
disappears)
ztr1_143.gif
Shows the following

branch
View with expanded tree and expanded list.
Reduces the list (all

Browse buttons
appear)
Hides the complete

tree structure
Click to open the

drop-down list box
with all available
settings
Scrollbars
Hides the
following branch
ztr1_144.gif
Click Exit to
leave the configurator.
Fig. 5-15
Configure menus
Select an item of the tree to display the appropriate list boxes on the right-hand side of the configure
window. The selected item is marked in the tree. The items can be selected directly by means of the
Trackball and its DO key.
Drop-down list boxes can be opened by clicking on . The arrow changes into if the list box is opened.
Click on to close the list box.
With the buttons Compress and Expand, the list of visible data fields or list boxes can be reduced or
extended. For example if one parameter has to be set for all Transceivers, the data fields of all Transceivers can be collected in a group by means of the button Compress and can be made visible in a
submenu of their own by clicking on the button Browse. If the buttons Expand and Compress have no
function, they are coloured.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
113
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.4
Configuration File Info

The data fields of the Configuration File Info show the date and the time of the last modification in the
configuration file and the number of the Indicator where the modification has been performed.
5.11.5
System Layout
This menu defines which components exist in the system.
System Layout
Configure > System Layout
Local Indicator Number (this one)
Shows the Indicator (number) of the operated Indicator. The Indicator number must be set by means of S1 on the RDC (see Section
4.5.4 from page 53 onwards).
Indicator
> Indicator 1... 5
Select Not Connected (default) / RADARPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100

Defines the type of Indicator. If MULTIPILOT 1100 is selected, the
ECDIS menu is available for this Indicator.
Transceiver
> Transceiver 1 ... 5
Interswitch (PCI)
Select Connected or Not Connected (default).

If more than two Indicators or Transceivers are connected in a
system, the Interswitch is needed to switch the TVA signals.
Sensor Interface
> Sensor Interface 1 ... 2
NACOS Configuration

Sensor interfaces are the
- Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface) for the connection of an
analog gyro, an analog log and an AIS, the
- COM Expander with 5 serial interfaces.
NOTE:
If "Not Connected" has been selected, it is not permissible to
connect an Analog Interface. This can cause problems on the
CAN bus.
(not for standard radar systems)
> TRACKPILOT

Defines whether a TRACKPILOT is connected to the system.
> ENGINE INTERFACE
Select Connected, Connected or Not Connected (default).

Defines whether an ENGINE INTERFACE is connected to the
system.
This is the NACOS Backup System 2
Select No (default) or Yes

In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems. This parameter should be set
to Yes only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Ethernet LAN
Select One Net (default) or Two Sub-nets

In case of a redundant TRACKPILOT in the system, the system
must be divided in two subsystems, or alternatively, the Ethernet
LAN can be divided in two sub-nets. This parameter should be set
to Two Sub-nets only, after consulting the manufacturer.
Planning System
114
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
System Layout ( cont. )

Configure > System Layout
> Connected Planning System
5.11.6
Select No/1/2/3 or more than 3

Select No for standard radar systems.
RADARPILOT:
Defines whether one or more CHARTPILOT 1100 or MULTIPILOT
1100 are connected as a planning system. User Chart Objects
which have been defined at a CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can
be displayed in the radar PPI or the radar can be licensed as a
CHARTRADAR.
MULTIPILOT:
If no CHARTPILOT is connected, it is not possible to perform the
installation, update and licensing of charts.
AIS
Select Not Connected (default)/Connected to Sensor Interface or

Connected to LAN
Defines whether an AIS is connected to the system and if it is
connected via LAN or to a sensor interface.
VDR
Select Not connected (default) or connected to DEBEG 4300.

Defines whether the radar supplies a VDR DEBEG 4300 with data
via Ethernet LAN.
System / Ship Parameters

By means of this menu, the basic data of the ship and of the system can be entered.
Configure > System / Ship Parameters
Ship Data
> Administration
Common ship data. Enter comments and names for:

- Vessel (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Shipping Company
- Flag
- Call Sign (must be set if an AIS is connected)
- Phone
- Fax
Ship Data for AIS: (values must be set!)
- MMSI Number
Maritime Mobile Service Identity Number for the Automatic
Identification System (AIS) (default = 0)
- IMO Number
IMO Number used for the Automatic Identification System (AIS)
(default = 0)
- Type of Ship
Select Not defined/Passenger Ship/Cargo Ship/Tanker/
High Speed Craft/Pilot Vessel/SAR Vessel/Tug/Port Tender/
Anti-Pollution Vessel/Law Enforcement Vessel/
Medical Transports/Fishing Vessel/Towing Vessel/
Sailing Vessel/Pleasure Craft/WIG or Only Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship which is transmitted by the AIS.
- Type of Ship Coded as Number
Sets the type of ship coded as a number for the AIS
The parameters Type of Ship and Type of Ship Coded as
Number are coupled with each other. If a type of ship has been
selected, the corresponding number is set automatically.
> System Position and other Ship

Dimensions
The system position defines a coordinate origin for the position

calculation (normally the location of the DOLOG transducer). These
values are also very important if an AIS is connected.
> Distance to Bow
Set a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m).
> Distance to Stern
> Distance to SB
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
115
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
System / Ship Parameters (cont. )

116
> Distance to P
> Length at Waterline
Set a value in 0.1 m steps

The parameter specifies the ships length between the perpendiculars for squat calculation.
> Nominal Speed
Set a value in 0.1 kt steps (default = 20.0 kt).

Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Acceleration
Set a value in 0.005 m/s steps (default is 0.020 m/s).

Parameter used for trial manoeuvres.
> Maximum ROT Alarm Limit
Set a value in 1 /min steps (default is 0 /min = no check).

The ROT sensor (gyro) is checked against this limit.
> Position Quality Check
Select Off (default) / Standard Quality / Medium Quality or Low

Quality.
The position sensor is checked against unexpected differences
between the position values.
> Minimum Radius
Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 0.03 NM...1.00 NM

(default is 0.25 NM).
Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Maximum Radius
Set a value in 0.01 NM steps in the range of 1.00 NM...3.00 NM

(default is 2.00 NM).
Specifies the smallest radius with which manoeuvres can be
performed.
> Gyro Monitoring
Defines the maximum values for the Gyro Monitoring functions

which can be set by the operator (SENSOR MONITOR).
> On/Off
The following menu items appear only if On is selected.
> Gyro against Magnetic Compass
Set a value in 1 steps (default = 0 = Off).

Gyro monitoring against the magnetic compass (HDG/MAG).
> Gyro against COG of Main

Position Sensor

Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the main position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the course
over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a drift (HDG/
COG).
> Gyro against COG of Redundant

Position Sensor

Gyro monitoring against the course over ground of the redundant
position sensor. A difference between the gyro value and the
course over ground can be caused by a compass failure or by a
drift (HDG/COG).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

> Ignore Gyro against COG above
ROT of:
Set a value in 1/min steps (default = 0/min = Off).

Ignore the difference between gyro and COG above a rate of turn
of this value. If the ROT value is large, the COG of the position
sensor usually lags behind the heading of the gyro which causes
an increase in the difference. This parameter has an effect on the
parameters Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor and
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor.
Factor
Heading/
COG
1.0
1 = actual ROT for the example

2 = value of parameter Ignore
Gyro against COG above ROT of
ROT
Example: ROT 1 = 30/min, ROT 2 = 120/min,

Difference Gyro/COG = 10, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5
- ROT 30/min: Factor = 0.75 -> 10.0x0.75 = 7.5, alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG below
Speed of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor
of that parameter.
> Ignore Gyro against COG below
Speed of
Set a value in 1 kt steps (default = 0 kt = Off).

Ignore the difference between gyro and COG below a speed of this
value. If the speed is reduced, an increasing difference between
the gyro value and the course over ground can be caused by a
drift. This parameter has an effect on the parameters Gyro against
COG of Main Position Sensor and Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor
1 = value of parameter
Ignore Gyro against
COG below Speed of
Factor
Heading/
COG
1.0
2 = value of parameter
Full Sensitivity Gyro
against COG above
Speed of
1
Speed
Below the speed "1", the difference between gyro and COG is
ignored. A factor is calculated for speed values between "1" and
"2". The difference between gyro and COG is multiplied by this
factor.
Example: Speed 1 = 5 kt, Speed 2 = 20 kt (Nominal Speed)
Difference Gyro/COG = 10, limit HDG/COG set by operator = 5
- Speed 20 kt: Factor = 1.0 -> 10.0x1.0 = 10.0, alarm triggered
- Speed 5 kt: Factor = 0.25 -> 10.0x0.25 = 2.5, no alarm triggered
- Speed 4 kt: Factor = 0 -> 10.0x0.0 = 0, no alarm triggered
If a value for the parameter Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT
of is set, the result is additionally multiplied with the factor of that
parameter.
> Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG
above speed of
> Speed Monitoring
This parameter is the value "Speed 2" which is shown in the

diagram above. Usually, the nominal speed of the ship should be
set.
Defines the maximum values for the Speed Monitoring functions
> On/Off
On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the

manufacturers development or service division. The following
menu items appear only if On is selected.
> Speed against Redundant

Speed Sensor

Speed monitoring against the speed of the redundant speed sensor
(SPD/...LOGx).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
117
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
System / Ship Parameters (cont. )

> Speed against SOG of Main
Position Sensor

Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
main position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Speed against SOG of

Redundant Position Sensor

Speed monitoring against the speed over ground measured by the
redundant position sensor (SPD/SOG).
> Position Monitoring
Defines the maximum values for the Position Monitoring functions

> On/Off
On should be selected only if this has been suggested by the

manufacturers development or service division. The following
menu items appear only if On is selected. The following menu item
appears only if On is selected.
> Position against Redundant

Position Sensor
Set a value in 1 m steps (default = 0 m = Off).

Position monitoring against the position measured by the redundant
position sensor (POS).
> Additional Alarms Setup Menu
Select No or Yes (default = No)

Enables the operators menu Alarms > Settings. By means of this
menu the alarms POSITION STATUS CHANGED, LOG STATUS
CHANGED and BRIDGE ALARM SYSTEM can be deactivated.
Basic Radar
> Video Anti Clutter Sea
Select On or Off (default = On).

This parameter is valid for all radars in the configuration.
> ARPA Lost Target without Alarm
Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...20.0 NM (default =

19.5 NM)
If an ARPA target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
> AIS Lost Target without Alarm
Set a value in 0.1 NM steps in the range 10.0...99.0 NM (default =

16.0 NM)
If an AIS target is lost out of this range, no alarm is triggered off.
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn
Select None (default) or Turn Headmarker by 180 deg

Turns the Headmarker by 180 caused by an external contact on
TB2/15, 16 on the Interconnection Board (used for double end
ferries).
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn
Select Not connected (default) / Double End Ferry, HM Turn

For double end ferries, an external contact at TB2/15,16 determines whether the AFT or FWD bridge is activated.
The following parameters are visible only, when Double End Ferry,
HM Turn has been set.
FWD Bridge is active String
A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,

when the FWD bridge has been activated.
AFT Bridge is active String
A text string can be entered which is displayed for the operator,

when the AFT bridge has been activated.
Startup Sensor Selection
118
Defines with which sensors the system works after a startup.
> Heading
Select Manual Heading or Heading Sensor 1 (default).

The use of manual heading is not permissible. This setting may
only be used for special purposes, such as exhibitions.
> Speed
Select Manual Speed / Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 /

Log 1 (default) or Log 2
> Position
Select Estimated Position / Position Sensor 1 (default) /.../ Position

Sensor 6.
> Time
Select Time from Internal Clock / Time from Position Sensor 1

(default) /.../ Time from Position Sensor 6 / Time Sensor 1 or Time
Sensor 2.
The ZDA message of the NMEA definitions is used to transfer the
data.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
System / Ship Parameters (cont.)

> Time from Selected Position
Sensor
Select Yes (default) or No.

The setting "Yes" overwrites the setting of the parameter Time
from Internal Clock. The time of the currently selected position
sensor is used if "Yes" is selected.
> Differentiated Heading
From Selected Heading Sensor is the only available choice.

ROT calculated by differentiation of the heading.
> Default Depth
Select Manual Depth / Depth Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Wind
Select Manual Wind / Wind Sensor 1 (default).
> Default Weather
Select Manual Weather / Weather Sensor 1 (default).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
119
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.7
Radar
Via the Radar menus, the Transceivers and the Display Electronics Units can be configured.
NOTE:
To avoid mistakes caused by different parameter settings originating from various Display Electronics
Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit.
Afterwards, all parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function or by means of a
diskette to the other radars or MULTIPILOTs.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
NOTE:
In the menus, the CHARTRADAR 1100 and the MULTIPILOT 1100 are often not mentioned explicitly.
The settings are the same as for the RADARPILOT 1100, except for the menus which are intended especially for the CHARTRADAR 1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100.
5.11.7.1
Configuration of the Indicators (Administration)
Admini stration
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration
Installed Type of Tracking Facility
Select ARPA or EPA (default).

EPA = Electronic Plotting Aid
ARPA = Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
If no ARPA hardware is installed and the parameter is set to
"ARPA", the systems works as an EPA system.
The MULTIPILOT is always an ARPA system.
Connected Monitor
Select Other Types (default) or select the type of monitor that is

connected to the Electronics Unit from the list.
Keyboard
Select Trackball only (default) / RADAR Keyboard or RADAR +

TRACKPILOT Keyboard.
Name
Name of Indicator; enter by virtual keyboard or by ASCII keyboard.
Alarm Relays Activation Delay
Enter a value in 1 s steps (default = 30 s), range = 1 s...120 s

Sets the delay for the activation of the alarm relays.
System Fault Alarm
120
Select Disable (default) or Enable.

Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if any system
fault occurs.
Dangerous Target Alarm

Specifies that the external alarm must be triggered if a dangerous
target has been detected, i.e. if the CPA value and the TCPA value
are less than the set values.
Lost Target Alarm
Select Disabled (default) / Enabled.

Specifies that the external alarm has to be triggered when a tracked
target is lost.
Guard Zone Alarm

Specifies that an external alarm must be triggered when a target
has been detected in the guard zone.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Admi nistrati on (cont .)

Allowed to be Sensor Master
Select Yes or No (default).

An Indicator can become Sensor Master if the sensors
- Gyro
- Log
- Position
are connected to the RDC of this Indicator, the Analog Interface
(GE3044G207) or the COM Expander.
If these three sensors are connected in redundancy to a second
Indicator, this second Indicator has to be parameterized as sensor
master, too. When such a system is started, the Indicator which
becomes operable first is determined to be sensor master.
In the case of a defect of the sensor master, the second Indicator
becomes the sensor master automatically.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Function
Select Available or Not Available (default).

For a RADARPILOT 1100 this parameter defines whether the radar
can be operated as a CHARTRADAR 1100 with a display of electronic seacharts in the PPI. The User Chart Objects of a connected
CHARTPILOT or MULTIPILOT can be displayed without activating
the CHARTRADAR functionalities.
For a MULTIPILOT 1100, this parameter must be set to activate the
full ECDIS functionality.
CHARTRADAR/MULTIPILOT Identification Code
Displays the Unique Identification Code of this CHARTRADAR

1100 or MULTIPILOT 1100 unit. Modifications of this number
cannot be saved. The number is used to generate the CHART
Function License Key. See Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further
information about the procedure.
CHART Function License Key
If the correct license key has been entered here, the chart/ECDIS
functionalities can be used at this Indicator. If no valid key is available, the access to the chart/ECDIS database is locked. See
Section 5.2 and Section 5.3 for further information about the procedure.
Conning
Select Available or Not Available (default).

This parameter defines whether the Conning Display is available or
not. This parameter is available at CHARTRADARs or MULTIPILOTS only. If the CHART Function License Key is not valid, the
Conning functions are not available.
Based on Specification
Select IEC 60936-1 (default) or IEC 60936-3.

The approval is based on the IEC specification. If IEC 60936-3 is
selected, the chart cannot be displayed in Head-Up mode and the
chart areas are always filled.
Radar PPI Radius
Select Use Default (default) / Standard or Maximize.

Always select Use Default. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturers
development or service division.
"Maximize" enlarges the size of the PPI display to fulfil the 16"
radar type approval requirements with the Monitor AZ 3063.
"Standard" shows the PPI in the standard size (which is smaller
than 16" with the Monitor AZ 3063). When "Use Default" is
selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corresponding to the monitor setting Connected Monitor. If a TFT
monitor which requires the maximized display is used together with
CRT monitors, it is possible to configure these CRT monitors with
"Maximize" to get the same display as on the TFT monitor.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
121

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Admini stration (cont.)

Monitor Aspect Ratio
Select Use Default / 4/3 or 5/4.

Select Use Default always. Standard or Maximize should be
selected only if this has been suggested by the manufacturers
development or service division.
Monitor resolutions of 1600x1200 or 1024x768 have an aspect ratio
of 4/3. A resolution of 1280x1024 has an aspect ratio of 5/4. CRT
Monitors can display resolutions with both aspect ratios, although
the CRTs own aspect ratio is usually 4/3. Consequently, if a CRT
Monitor is driven with the resolution of 1280x1024, not the
complete size of the CRT is used and a blank band appears. This
can be corrected by adjusting the screen size settings. As a result
of this "compression" from 5/4 to 4/3, circular objects on the screen
appear slightly oval.
TFT Monitors must be driven with their own 4/3 aspect ratio. When
"Use Default" is selected, the suitable setting is chosen automatically, corresponding to the Monitor setting Connected Monitor. In
case of the Monitor AZ 3063, the resolution which must be selected
with 1280x1024 by means of the DIP switches on the RDC is automatically processed to a resolution of 1280x960 which corresponds
to an aspect ratio of 4/3.
122
Head-Up PPI Orientation
Select Bow-up (standard) or Stern-up.

Bow-up is the default setting.
The stern-up PPI orientation should be used if the radar monitor is
installed the other way round, so that the operator is watching in
the direction of a stern window.
Monitor Control Interface
Select Indicator (COM 1) (default) or RKE (J2).

When a Remote Keyboard Electronics is used, the serial interface
of the monitor can be connected to the RKE or to COM 1 of the
Indicator. The interface which is used must be selected.
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to

CHARTPILOT

Defines whether ARPA alarms like Lost Target and Dangerous
Target are displayed at connected CHARTPILOTs. The alarms
cannot be acknowledged at a CHARTPILOT.
Central Dimming Adjustment
Select No (default)/Yes/User Controlled

No: Dimming must be set at every single Indicator.
Yes: Modifications of the dimming settings at one Indicator are
transferred to all other Indicators and they are set if the central
dimming function is enabled at these Indicators.
User Controlled: An additional button is displayed in the Brilliance
menus. By means of this button, the Operator can enable or
disable the central dimming function for the Indicator.
Double End Ferry
Select No (default)/Yes, FWD Bridge Indicator/Yes, AFT Bridge

Indicator/Yes, only one Bridge (at Centre)
Defines to which bridge the Indicator belongs (on double end
ferries).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.11.7.2
5.11 Configure Menu
Configuration of the Indicators Serial Interfaces (Serial Interfaces)
Serial Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4

Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Serial Interfaces > Serial I/O 1...4
Driver
Select None (default) / NMEA183 (IEC 61162-1/2) / C. Plath (serial

Gyro) / Anschuetz (serial Gyro).
Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the
driver which has been chosen.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2):

> Baud Rate
Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.

Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformal.
> Serial Gyro

> Serial Gyro

Defines whether a gyro using the NMEA message HDT is
connected.
> Channel of this Gyro
Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Display Selected Gyro
Select Yes or No (default)

Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch-over unit)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example, PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
> Position
> Position

Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL,
GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.
The following items appear only if Position has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel
Select 1 /.../ 6 (default = 1).

Channel (multiplexer) identification.
> Distance Longitudinal
Enter a value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).

Position sensor antenna, position distance (longitudinal) in m relative to the system position.
> Distance Transversal

Position sensor antenna, position distance (transversal) in m relative to the system position.
> Sensor Number
Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).

Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor
must be supplemented by a serial number, and if so, which number.
The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is
derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred
from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of
the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator
must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection
and in the status display. With the aid of the sensor number function, it can be arranged, for example, that one GPS system is
consistently called "GPS 1" and the other is consistently called
"GPS 2".
> GLL, GGA Selection
Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA

message.
Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the
GLL message.
> Use Speed from Position Sensor

The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the
speed sensor. Set to No for BSH or DNV-W1.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
123

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Serial I nterfaces > Serial I /O 1. ..4 (cont. )

> Use Time from Position Sensor

The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time
sensor.
> Speed
> Speed

Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW,
VHW is connected.
The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel
Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.

Sensor (speed log transducer) position distance (transversal) relative to system position.
> Log Type
Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter

Constant
Enter a value in the range 1...10 (default = 1).

Filter X Constant.
> Transversal Speed Filter

Constant

Filter Y Constant.
> Time
> Time

Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is
connected.
The following item appears only if Time has been defined as
Connected:
> Channel
Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.
> Output
> Output GLL
Select OFF / 1 s / 2 s / 5 s / 10 s / 30 s (default = OFF).
> Output DTM
> Output VTG
> Output HDT
> Output TTM
> Output OSD
> Output MWV
> Wind Reference
124
The following parameters set the repetition time of the output

messages.
Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA
> Output RSD
> Output DBT
> Output ROT
> Output MWD
> Output VBW
> Output MHU
> Output MMB
> Output MTA
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Seri al Interfaces > Seri al I/ O 1.. .4 (cont.)

> Output RTE/WPL
> RTE Mode
Select: Working Route (default) or Complete Route

Working Route: the last waypoint and the following 4 waypoints are
transmitted.
Complete Route: the complete route with all waypoints is transmitted.
> WPL Remark
Select: No Remark (default) or Append Remark

No Remark: the remarks of a waypoint are not transmitted.
Append Remark: the remarks of the waypoint are transmitted.
> RTE Message Route

Identifier
Select: With Track Number (default) or Track Number 0000

With Track Number: the original number of the system track is
transmitted.
Track Number 0000: the system track is always transmitted with the
number 0000.
> Output MTW
> Serial Output used as
Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 611621/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
> Depth

The following items appear only if Depth has been defined as
Connected:
> Depth Sensor 1
Depth Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Depth Value
Select Below Transducer (default) or Below Keel

Below Keel must be used only if the telegrams xxDPT, PSKPDPT
or PELACSDS are received. Otherwise use Below Transducer.
> Wind
> Channel
> Weather
> Channel
> Route

Wind Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Weather Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
Defines whether a system is connected which transmits tracks via
NMEA protocol, e.g. a GPS system. Set to Not connected if a
CHARTPILOT is connected to the system.
The following items appear only if Route has been defined as
Connected:
> Channel
Select Route Sensor 1/.../Route Sensor 4
> Catalog
The catalog name for the tracks of the route sensor must be
entered in this input field.
The name will be used by the operator. It is advisable to enter the
name of the sensor, for example GPS 1.
> TRACKPILOT Track Mode
Select Disable or Enable

If it is sure that the quality of the route data of this sensor is satisfactory, it can be admitted for use as a track for the TRACKPILOT.
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example, via a switch over unit)
are connected to the radar system.
125
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.7.3
Configuration of the Transceivers
When a Transceiver has been selected, it may happen that it takes a few seconds until the TCU parameters have been loaded. A message appears which shows the progress of loading data. If the Indicator
does not make contact with the TCU of the selected Transceiver, a warning appears. In this case, the
parameters shown in the menu do not correspond to the parameters which are actually set in the TCU.
Transceiver > Transceiver 1.. .5
Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5
Type of Generation
Select RADAR 1100 S-Band / RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW /

RADAR 1100 X-Band 25 kW
For 1000 Series Transceiver:

> Additional Information
Click into the data field and enter any comments.
> Frequency Deviation
Enter a value for the constant PRF deviation in the range -5% to
5% (default = 0).
This parameter changes the PRF to reduce the mutual influence
(interference) between several radars on the ship.
> Sector Blanking
(See form sheet on page 305)
> Number of Blanking Sectors
Select None / 1 /.../4.

The following two menu items appear only if at least one Blanking
Sector has been set. Each Blanking Sector has its own Start and
Stop Angle. Not allowed for the main navigation radar.
> Blanking Sector X Start Angle
Start angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Blanking Sector X Stop Angle
Stop Angle of the Blanking Sector X.
> Antenna
126
> Speed Capability
Select None / Single (Low Speed) / Dual (default) or Single (High

Speed).
Set to Single (High Speed) on HSC.
Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).

Distance between the installation location of the radar Scanner and
the system position along the ships longitudinal axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between bow and system position.
Enter the distance in metres in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).

Distance between the installation position of the radar Scanner and
the system position along the ships transverse axis.
+ = Scanner is situated between the starboard side and the system
position.
> Height above Sea Level
Enter the height of the antenna above the sea level in metres, in
0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m)
> Beam Width
Antenna Beam Width at the 3 dB points. Default for X-Band = 1.2,

S-Band = 1.8.
3 dB points:
5 ft X-Band Scanner:1.5
8 ft X-Band Scanner:1.0
14 ft S-Band Scanner:1.8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Transcei ver > Transceiver 1. .. 5 (cont .)

Configure > Radar > Transceiver > Transceiver 1...5
> Azimuth Pulses per Revolution
X-Band
1. Pulser HEDS-5605 at the intermediate shaft = 1920.0,
2. Modification Kit GR3017G027 with slotted wheel at the intermediate shaft = 540.0
3. Combined Azimuth / Headmarker Pulse Generator with slotted
wheel at the hollow shaft = 72.0
S-Band
1. Old pulser (34 teeth chopper wheel) = 830.0
2. New pulser (17 teeth chopper wheel) = 415
See the description of the different azimuth pulse generators in the
technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for further information.
> Antenna Motor Frequency

> Last Modification Date
5.11.8
Select 50 Hz or 60 Hz (default).
Displays the date of the last modification of the Transceiver adjustments.
Sensor Interfaces (Additional Interfaces via Analog Interface / COM Expander)

By means of the Sensor Interface menu, the optional Analog Interface or the COM Expander can be
configured. The interfaces can only be parameterized if they have been configured in the system layout.
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2
Configure > Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1...2
Sensor Interface 1...2
Click on Sensor Interface 1 or Sensor Interface 2 to configure the

sensor interface as Analog Interface (Gyro/Log Interface), Interface
Expander or COM Expander.
If the system is equipped with an Interface Expander and an
Analog Interface, the Interface Expander must become the
Sensor Interface 1 (the Interface Expander must be the master,
because it offers additional serial interfaces).
The following menu items Gyro and Pulse Log are available for
the Analog Interface and the Interface Expander only.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
127
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.8.1
Gyro and Pulse Log Interfaces of the Analog Interface
Sensor Int erfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2

Gyro and Pulse Log Interface of the Analog Interface
Gyro
> Heading Sensor Channel
> Analog Gyro System
Select No Analog Gyro Connected (default) / DC Stepper Positive

/ DC Stepper Negative / DC Positive Halfwave / DC Negative
Halfwave / AC Gyro.
DC Stepper:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal voltage is a smoothed DC voltage.
See Figure 4-20 on page 71 and the description of the LEDs DS
33, 34, 35 in Section 4.5.10.
Halfwave:
The heading signal is transferred by means of a stepper and the
signal is an unfiltered DC voltage, generated from the 50 Hz or
60 Hz supply voltage.
AC Gyro:
Input indicating that the signal is transferred by means of a
synchro.
> Increment
Select 1/6 deg Step (default) / 1/3 deg Step / 1/48 deg Step / 2/3
deg Step (not type-approved).
Matching the gyro interface of the Analog Interface to the transmission ratio (resolution):
1/6 degree Step:
- Stepper: 1 step corresponds to 1/6 degree course change.
- Synchro: 360 degree synchro revolution corresponds to 1
degree course change.
1/3 degree Step:
degree course change.
1/48 degree Step:
2/3 degree Step (not approved):
degree course change (90:1).
Setting the compass ratio input to 90:1 will result in degradation of stabilization smoothness and accuracy. Therefore, this
setting should not be used where:
- the radar installation is intended to meet the IMO/IEC Radar
Performance Standards
- type approval certification is required
- the ARPA option is fitted.
> Reference
Select Not Connected (default) / 50 Hz / 60 Hz.

Not Connected must be selected if REF1 and REF2 are not
connected to the Analog Interface.
> Gyro Input Voltage
Select Low (default) or High

Sets the gyro input voltage (exciter voltage of the stepper or
maximum stator voltage of the synchro signal). Always select the
"Low" setting. Set to "High" only if it is not possible to get rid of
appearing phase errors. After being set to high, the gyro must be
tested properly while turning.
> Error Input
Select Not Connected (default) / Connected / Inverted Input.

Sets the error input definition.
Pulse Log
> Speed Sensor Channel
128
Select Log1 (default) or Log2.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Interface 1.. .2 (cont.)

Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).

Position distance (of speed log transducer) (longitudinal) relative to
system position.
Enter value in 0.1 m steps (default = 0.0 m).

Position distance (of speed log transducer) (transversal) relative to
system position.
> Sensor Interface Identifier
Select Log (default) / Log 1 / Log 2.

Name of the sensor which is being displayed on the screen.
> Log Type
Select No Pulse Log Connected (default) / One Axis Log / Two Axis
Log.
Sets the log type
One Axis Log:
Speed in the longitudinal direction only is transferred (e.g.
DOLOG 21).
Two Axis Log:
Speed in longitudinal and transverse direction is transferred
(e.g. DOLOG 22 or DOLOG 23).
> Increment
Select 125 Pulses/NM / 200 Pulses/NM (default).

Resolution in pulses/NM.
> Error Input

Sets the error input definition.
> Bottom Track (BT) Input

Sets the Bottom Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The BT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The BT status input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
be interpreted as bottom track signals and
- the closed contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as bottom track signals and
- the open contact means, that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as bottom track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
129

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2 (cont.)

> Water Track Input (WT)

Sets the Water Track Input definition.
Not connected:
The WT status signal input is not evaluated.
Connected:
The WT status signal input is evaluated.
Inverted Input:
This function should be selected if
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must be
interpreted as water track signals.
not be interpreted as water track signals.
This function should not be selected if
be interpreted as water track signals.
- the open contact means that the existing speed signals must
not be interpreted as water track signals.
If both Bottom Track Input and Water Track Input are configured as
"not connected", the speed signals are interpreted as water track
signals.
> XPM Input

Sets the XPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is
transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the longitudinal speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Speed ahead corresponds to open contact.
> YPM Input

Sets the YPM Input definition. Specifies whether a sign signal is
transferred for the transverse speed.
- Not connected:
No sign signal is transferred for the transverse speed.
- Connected:
Sign signal is transferred.
- Inverted Input:
Drift to starboard corresponds to open contact.
130
> VX Input

Sets the VX Input definition, longitudinal speed.
> VY Input

Sets the VY Input definition, transverse speed.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant
Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).

Sets the VX Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the longitudinal speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter
of the 1st order).
> Transversal Speed Filter Constant
Set a value in the range 1 ... 10 (default = 1).

Sets the VY Filter constant. Specifies whether and (if so) how
intensely fluctuations of the transverse speed signal received from
the log are to be smoothed in the Analog Interface (low-pass filter
of the 1st order).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11.8.2
5.11 Configure Menu
Serial Interface of the Analog Interface

Serial Interface of the Analog Interface
Serial I/O 1 (for Analog Interface)
The following interface types can be parameterized:
Driver
Select None (default)/AIS Automatic Ident System or NMEA 0183

(IEC 61162-1/2).
Settings for AIS

> AIS Channel
AIS Sensor 1 is the only available choice.
> Type of AIS
Select DEBEG 3400 (default) or Other.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2)
5.11.8.3
> Baud Rate
Select 4800 (default) or 38400.
> Serial Gyro
Select Connected or Not connected (default).
Heading Sensor 1 is the only available choice..

Set to Yes if two or more gyros (for example via a switch over unit)
are connected to the radar system. If a NMEA message (for
example PPNSD) is received, the identifier of the active gyro is
displayed.
Serial Interfaces 1...5 of the COM Expander

Serial I/O 1...5
The following interface types can be parameterized:
Driver
Select None (default) / NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) /AIS Automatic

Identification System / Bridge Alarm System BAS 40P
Sets the driver for the UART. The following items depend on the
driver which has been chosen.
The serial I/O 5 can be used as NMEA interface only.
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1)

> Baud Rate
Select 4800 (default) / 9600 / 19200 / 38400.

Sets the baud rate for the UART. 9600 and 19200 are not NMEA
0183 (IEC 61162-1) conformant.
> Position
> Position

Defines whether a position sensor using the NMEA messages GLL,
GGA, VTG and ZDA is connected.
The following items appear only if Position has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel
Select Position Sensor 1 /.../ Position Sensor 6 (default = Position

Sensor 1).
Channel (multiplexer) identification.

Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (longitudinal) in
m relative to the system position.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
131

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Sensor Interfaces > Sensor Int erface 1.. .2

(cont.)

Sensor (position sensor antenna) position distance (transversal) in
m relative to the system position.
> Sensor Number
Select None, 1 /.../ 6 (default = None).

Specifies whether, in the display of the radar system, the sensor
must be supplemented by a serial number and, if so, which
number.
The position sensor name used in the menus and displays is
derived from the talker identifier of the IEC 61162 signal transferred
from the position sensor. If there are several navigation sensors of
the same type connected (e.g. two GPS systems), the operator
must be able to distinguish between them in the sensor selection
and in the status display. The sensor number function can be used
to arrange, for example, that one GPS system is consistently called
"GPS 1" and the other is consistently called "GPS 2".
> GLL, GGA Selection
Select Position from GLL message (default) or Position from GGA

message.
Specifies whether the position is taken from the GGA or from the
GLL message.
> Use Speed from Position Sensor

The NMEA message VTG of the position sensor is used as the
speed sensor. Select No for BSH and DNV W1 ships.
> Use Time from Position Sensor

The NMEA message ZDA of the position sensor is used as the time
sensor.
> Speed
> Speed

Defines whether a speed sensor using the NMEA messages VBW,
VHW is connected.
The following items appear only if Speed has been defined as
Connected.
> Channel
Select Log 1 (default) or Log 2.

Sensor position distance (longitudinal) relative to system position.

Sensor position distance (transversal) relative to system position.
> Log Type
Select 1 Axis Log (default) or 2 Axis Log.
> Longitudinal Speed Filter

Constant

Filter X Constant.
> Transversal Speed Filter

Constant

Filter Y Constant.
> Time
> Time

Defines whether a time sensor using NMEA message ZDA is
connected.
The following item appears only if Time has been defined as
Connected:
> Channel
> Output
132
Select Time Sensor 1 (default) or Time Sensor 2.

The following parameters set the repetition time of the output
messages.
> Output GLL
> Output DTM
> Output VTG
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu

(cont.)
> Output HDT
> Output OSD
> Output MWV
> Wind Reference
Select True North or Relative
> Output ZDA
> Output DBT
> Output ROT
> Output MWD
> Output VBW
> Output MHU
> Output MMB
> Output MTA
> Output MTW
> Serial Output used as
Select Not Defined (default) / NMEA 0183 Ser. Output (IEC 611621/2) / AIS Navigation Data.
Defines the type of the serial output.
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P:
5.11.9
> Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3)
Select Connected or Not Connected

The following item appears only if the Bridge Alarm System 1 has
been defined as Connected.
> BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier
Select a number from 1...31

The identifier usually corresponds to the number of the Bridge
Alarm System Device. The Bridge Alarm System Device 1 offers 20
alarm inputs altogether. 5 of them are used for internal purposes.
The Bridge Alarm System Devices 2 and 3 offer 20 alarm inputs
each.
AIS
See Section 5.4 from page 93 on for the connection and configuration of an AIS.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
133

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.10
NACOS
(Not available for standard radar systems)
ztr1_188.gif
The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT Electronics
Unit and in the RDC. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters from the
TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and compares them with the parameters which are stored in
the RDC. If the parameters are different, a dialogue box appears and it must be decided whether the set
of parameters from the RDC is to be loaded into the TRACKPILOT or vice versa.
Fig. 5-16
TRACKPILOT configuration manager
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be performed in the Configure
menus and/or in the Service menus. While performing the setting-to-work, the settings should be
performed in the Configure menus. During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any
menus and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box affects the TRACKPILOT
immediately, and so the Service menus should be used during trials.
For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE), see the technical manual
of the TRACKPILOT.
5.11.11
Planning System

> Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets
Select the Indicator from which the CHARTPILOT should get the ARPA targets.
> Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT
Select True or False (default)
Defines whether the sensor information is transferred to the CHARTPILOT via Ethernet.
134
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
> C-Map Identifier

Displays the C-Map Identifier of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.
> ARCS User Permit Number
Displays the ARCS User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.
> ENC User Permit No.
Displays the ENC User Permit Number of the system which has been entered at a connected CHARTPILOT.
> Security Unique Identifier (UID)
Displays the status information for the UID (UID existing, date and time of storage).
5.11.12
Conning
The Conning functions are available at a CHARTRADAR 1100, MULTIPILOT 1100 or CONNINGPILOT
1100.
By means of these parameters, the display of the conning data is configured. To use the Conning functionalities, some settings are necessary at the CHARTPILOT. See the technical manual of the CHARTPILOT 1100 (NACOS xx-5) for further information. The parameters are available only if the parameter
Configure > Radar > Indicator > Indicator 1...5 > Administration > Conning has been set to Available. If
no correct CHARTRADAR Function Licence Key has been entered, the conning display does not work.
Conning
Configure > Conning
Shaft Parameters
> Number of Shafts
Select None (default)/1 Shaft/2 Shafts

The following items appear only if the parameter Number of Shafts
has not been defined as None.
> Scale RPM Bar
Select the suitable RPM value (default = 200 RPM)

The scaling of the "RPM Bar" is defined by selection of the suitable
maximum value.
> Scale Rudder Display
Select 25 (default)/50/75
The scaling of the "Rudder Display" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
> Number of Clutches
Select None (default)/1 Clutch....6 Clutches

Defines the number of clutches.
> Clutch Label
Select Yes or No
Defines whether the clutch symbols are shown with a label or not.
> Display Power Bar
Select Yes or No
Defines whether the power bar is displayed or not.
> Display Pitch Bar
Select Yes or No
Defines whether the pitch bar is displayed or not.
Scale Off Course Bar
Select Auto (default)/5/15/30/50

The scaling of the display "Off Course Deviation Bar" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Off Track Bar
Select Auto (default)/50 m/100 m/250 m/500 m/1000 m

The scaling of the "Off Track Deviation Bar (XTD)" is defined by
selection of the suitable maximum value.
Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar
Select 10 kt/15 kt/20 kt/25 kt (default)/30 kt/35 kt/40 kt

The scaling of the "Longitudinal Scale Bar" (longitudinal speed) is
defined by selection of the suitable maximum value.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
135
Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Conni ng ( cont. )
Configure > Conning
Display Power Bar
Select MW Scale (default) or % Scale

Scaling of the power bar with % or MW.
Scale Shaft Power Bar
Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/

30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Shaft Power Bar" is defined by selection of the
suitable maximum value.
Generator Parameters
Number of Generators
Select None/1 Generator...6 Generators

The following item appears depending on the setting of the parameter Number of Generators. If Number of Generators has been
set to None, no parameter is available.
> Scale Generator Power Bar
Select 2 MW/5 MW/10 MW/15 MW/20 MW (default)/25 MW/

30 MW/40 MW/50 MW/100 MW
The scaling of the "Generator Power Bar" is defined by selection of
the suitable maximum value.
Availability of Additional Displays

> Display Weather
Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual weather display is available
> Display Draught
Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual draught display is available
> Display Consumption
Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual consumption display is
available
> Display Generator Power 1
Select On or Off
Defines whether an additional, individual generator power display is
available (Norcontrol interface)
Select On or Off
available (analog and ISL interface)
> Remaining Power Displayed

as Used Power
Displacement Table
Select On or Off
available (NMEA interface)
The displacement table should be used only, if the values for the
displacement have been calculated by the yard. If no values are
available, the table should not be filled in.
> Draught 1...10
Set the draught values in 0.1 m steps (default = 0 m)
> Displacement 1...10
Set the displacement value to the corresponding draught value in

1 t steps (default = 0 t)
Squat Coefficient
136

Defines whether the analog input for the remaining power is interpreted as input for the used power.
The squat coefficient should be filled in only, if the value has been
calculated by the yard. If no value is available, the default value 1.5
must be used.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
Conning (cont. )
Configure > Conning
Azimuth Thruster Parameters
> Azimuth Thruster 1...4
> Azimuth Thruster x
Bow
midship
For Azimuth Thruster 1:

Select Not connected / Stern Thruster / Stern Starboard Thruster
- Ships with a stern midshp AZT: select Stern Thruster
- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Starboard Thruster;
AZT 2 must be set to Stern Port Thruster.
Select Not connected / Stern Port Thruster
- Ships with two main aft AZTs: select Stern Port Thruster;
AZT 1 must be set to Stern Starboard Thruster.
Bow
port
Stern
Stern
port
Stern
starboard
Bow
starboard
Center
Behind
center
Before
center
3
4
3
ztr1 654.eps

Select Not Connected / Bow Midship Thruster / Bow Starboard
Thruster / Center Thruster / Behind Center Thruster
- Ships with one additional bow AZT: select Bow Midship
Thruster.
- Double end ferries with four main AZTs: select Bow Starboard
Thruster.
- Ships with one additional center AZT: select Center Thruster.
- Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:
select Behind Center Thruster.
AZT 4 must be set to Before Center Thruster.
Select Not connected / Bow Port Thruster / Before Center Thruster
- Double end ferries with for main AZTs: select Bow Port
Thruster.
- Ships with two additional AZTs at center line:
select Before Center Thruster.
AZT 3 must be set to Behind Center Thruster.
> Add a Label (Number) to the

Thruster Display
Select No (default) or Yes.

The number is added automatically and cannot be edited.
> Add a Propeller to the Thruster

Display
Select No (default) / Pushing Propeller or Pulling Propeller.

Defines what kind of symbol for a propeller is added to the thruster
display.
> Thruster Angle Display Mode
Select 0 to 360 (default) or 180.

Defines whether the thruster angle is displayed in a range of
0...360 or 180.
> Thruster Angle Display Color
Select No (default)/Red if Angle & RPM are positive/Green if Angle

& RPM are positive
Defines whether the thruster angle values are displayed colored
and the display colour for positive values of Angle and RPM.
> Colored Angle Display Limit
Enter a value in 1 steps (default = 1).

Input of the thruster angle at which the colour changes from white
to red/green if the parameter Thruster Angle Display Coloured is
set to Yes.
> Scale Orientation
Select 0 up (default) or 180 up.

Defines the orientation of the azimuth thruster scale.
> Maximum Thruster RPM
Maximum value for the scale in revolutions per minute.
> Maximum Thruster Power
Maximum value for the scale in MW.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
137

Technical Manual
5.11 Configure Menu
5.11.13
ECDIS
The ECDIS menu is available only if at least one MULTIPILOT 1100 has been defined in the System
Layout menus.
ECDI S
Configure > ECDIS > Chart Database
ENC Database
> ENC Database
Select Yes (default) or No

Defines whether the ENC database is available
ARCS Database
> ARCS Database

Defines whether the ARCS database is available
C-MAP CM93/2 Database


Defines whether the CM93/2 database is available


Defines whether the CM93/3 database is available
Direct ENC Database

Direct ENC Database

Defines whether the Direct ENC database is available
Own Database
Own Database
5.11.14

Defines whether the Own database is available
VDR
See Section 5.5 from page 97 on for the connection and configuration of a VDR.
138
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.12
5.12 Service Menu
Service Menu
The tree shows all available submenus.

By clicking on a + symbol, the tree is
expanded and the + becomes a -. By
clicking on -, the tree is compressed
again.
ztr1_135.gif
The Service register offers the possibility of making adjustments while the
radar is in operation. The settings which
can be made by means of the
Configure register are the basic
settings.
Tree
For the first-time setting-to-work, it is
necessary to keep to a particular
order when making the adjustments.
The order is shown in Section 6 on
page 157.
Service menu
To make the complete PPI visible for measurements and

adjustments, the main window of the System Maintenance
Manager is closed if a submenu has been selected. A dialogue
box is opened on the right-hand side of the screen. This
dialogue box contains an input field for the parameter value(s)
and a display field which shows important existing settings and
measurement values. By means of the list box, select the
parameter which is to be adjusted.
To return to the System Maintenance Manager, this dialogue
box must be closed.
Display field
Input fields
ztr1_136.gif
Parameter
selection
Dialogue box for transceiver adjustments

(example MBS)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
139

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
5.12.1
Indicator
5.12.1.1
Monitor Adjust
The monitor can be adjusted by means of an on-screen display. The

size of the monitor is displayed. With the buttons Up and Down, first
the OSD menu of the monitor is opened, then the parameter can be
selected. With + and - the values can be set. Depending on the radar
version, the monitors and the handling of their OSD menus are
different. Some types are equipped with a switch "OSM / RS232". If it
is necessary to operate the monitor with its own buttons or to adjust
"Brilliance", the switch must be set to "OSM". To be able to operate the
on-screen menus by means of the radar service menus, the switch
must be set to "RS232".
ztr1_137.gif
If the display color, the brightness or contrast are not correct or if there
are differences between monitors in one system, the monitor default
settings could be wrong. See Section 8.2.7 on page 184 for further
information.
Monitor Adjust dialogue box
5.12.1.2
RDC Service and Adjust
The RDC Service and Adjust offers facilities for an automatic

adjustment of the video offsets and tools for the advanced diagnosis
of the TVA signal.
ztr1_026.gif
Usually, only the ADC Threshold function is used for the setting-towork of the radar. The other functions are advanced tools for diagnosis in case of problems.
140
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
ADC Threshold Adjust (Video and ARPA Offset)

The following adjustment must be performed at every Indicator for all
Transceivers.
1.
The Transceiver must be selected (same way as in the normal

operational mode).
2.
The Transceiver must be switched on and operated as master.
3.
The Auto button must be clicked once. The values are measured and saved automatically (PPI video offset, ARPA video
offset, GND reference).
4.
The procedure must be repeated for all other Transceivers in the

system.
ztr1_027.gif
It is possible to modify the values manually. The effect on the radar

video can be watched in the PPI. The values can be reset to the
currently saved values by means of the Revert button. It is strongly
advised to use the values which have been determined by means of
the automatic measurement function.
A/Polar-Scope-Display
In A-scope mode, the video signal is displayed in an x/y system of

coordinates. The y-axis shows the video amplitude, the X-axis the
distance of the target. The parameters are the azimuth for the display
and the range. It is possible to set the range and the azimuth by
means of VRM and EBL 1 or 2. The resolution of the Y-axis can be
modified.
ztr1_028.gif
The scope functionality can be used to display the TVA signal as in

an oscilloscope.
A/Polar Scope Display
In polar scope mode, the TVA signal is displayed in a circular mode.

The azimuth of the displayed signals corresponds to the azimuth of the targets. The length of the signal
corresponds to the strength of the signal.
The ARPA PPI function shows the video signal which is used for the ARPA processing with the fixed
range of 20 NM.
Status displays
The status displays have the following meanings:
TRIGGER:
RDC SEA:
ARPA ON:
VIDEO:
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
green
green
green
green
=
=
=
=
trigger signal measured, red = no trigger system, insensitive = undefined

Video STC on, insensitive = Video STC off
ARPA working, insensitive = ARPA not working
video signals are transmitted to the main processor
141
Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
5.12.1.3
Check RDC Alarm IO
To check the function of the alarm relay, click on the buttons. The colour of the
activated buttons changes and the selected relay is activated.
The correct operation of the relays can be measured at the terminals of the
Interconnection Board.
ztr1_187.gif
The Indicators Ack Buzzer (In 1) and External Input (In 2) show whether an
alarm signal is active at the alarm inputs of the RDC.
5.12.1.4
Serial I/O Monitor
By means of the Serial I/O monitor, the data

communication between the 4 serial interfaces of the RDC or the 5 se
ztr1_077.gif
rial interfaces of the COM Expander and the

connected ships sensors can be monitored
and saved on a diskette. To monitor the
serial interfaces of the COM Expander, the
Indicator to which the COM Expander is
connected must be the sensor master. The
interface driver must have been configured
beforehand (Section 5.11.7.2). The interface
must be selected by means of the list box. By
means of the buttons Rx and Tx, it must be
selected whether the outgoing or the
incoming signals are monitored. If the button
Start is clicked, the data is read and
Serial I/O Monitor
displayed in the display field. If the button
Clear is clicked, the display field is cleared. The protocol can be saved to a diskette by clicking on Save
to Disk. Existing protocol files on the diskettes will be overwritten.
142
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.12.1.5
5.12 Service Menu
Software Update (+PCBs)
RADARPILOT 1100, CHARTRADAR 1100:
To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry

out the instructions on the screen. After the boot diskette has been
inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The
boot sequence is modified automatically for a diskette boot (no DIP
switches need to be set for the boot sequence). All other diskettes are
requested by messages on the screen.
ztr1_138.gif
The systems software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,
COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a diskette
drive. Five diskettes (GE3062G004, Order No. 390001277) are
needed:
Flash Update Facility Boot Disk
Flash Update Distribution Disk 1 of 4
After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set to the normal operation and the
radar must be switched off and then on again to reboot.
MULTIPILOT 1100:
The systems software (including the software of the pcbs TCU, RDC,
COM Expander, Analog Interface) is updated by means of a CD-ROM.
The CD ROM RP3065G010 (Order No. 390001627) is needed.
After the new software has been installed, all DIL switches must be set
to normal operation and the MULTIPILOT must be switched off and
then on again to reboot.
zmp1_138.gif
To perform an update, press the button Software Update and carry

out the instructions on the screen. After the CD ROM has been
inserted and the Yes button has been clicked, the system reboots. The
boot sequence is modified automatically for a CD ROM boot (no DIP
switches need to be set for the boot sequence).
NOTE:
The pcbs TCU, RDC, COM Expander/Analog Interface are automatically updated during the
process.
The TCU and the Analog Interface must not be updated at the same time from different Indicators.
This could cause problems on the CAN bus and the TCU could be set to an undefined status (and
would have to be exchanged in this case).
In a NACOS, the software versions of all components must belong to the same NACOS software
version. See the product notes for further information about SW upgrade kits.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
143
5.12 Service Menu
5.12.1.6

Technical Manual
PCB Software Update
During a system software update, the pcbs TCU, RDC, Analog Interface and COM Expander are also
updated with the relevant software version. If one of these pcbs has been exchanged, it must be checked
for the correct software version. With the function PCB Software Update, the following pcbs are checked
for a valid software version and updated if necessary:
-
TCU (all TCUs in the system)

RDC
Analog Interface (if connected)
COM Expander (if connected)
It must be ensured that the mains switches of all other electronics units are switched off before the check/
update is started.
To start the check/update, the OK button must be clicked. The system will reboot when the update has
been finished.
5.12.1.7
RKE Software Update
By means of this function, it is possible to update the software of the Remote Keyboard Electronics unit
(KBC pcb GE3048G200 with software version A or newer. For the determination of the software version,
see Section 5.10.2). The instructions on the screen must be followed.
Insert the update diskette and click on OK to start the update or click on Cancel to exit the update
routine. If the update is started, every connected Remote Keyboard Electronics is checked for the current
software version. An update is performed only, if necessary.
NOTE:
The update lasts about 8 minutes for the master Remote Keyboard Electronics unit. After the master has
been updated, the slaves are updated automatically. The update for each slave takes about 35 s. It is
definitely advisable not to use any Operating Unit in the system during the update. If the system is operated by means of the Operating Units during the update, it may happen that the update of the Remote
Keyboard Electronics currently being updated is restarted.
In case of any failure during the update, the message Software Update failed at RKE=x will be
displayed and the update must be repeated.
The Display Electronics Unit must be restarted after the successful software update. The correct software
update can be checked by means of the Telemonitoring Data menu.
5.12.1.8
RKE Settings
This menu appears only, if an RKE is connected.

By means of the RKE (Remote Keyboard Electronics) settings, the type of monitor connected can be
defined. This is necessary for the monitor driver settings (important for ECDIS) and the OSD monitor
adjustments (function Monitor Adjust) which can be performed also at the slave Operating Unit.
All RKEs of the system can be parameterized at one Display Electronics Unit. The RKE to be parameterized must be selected from the Selected RKE listbox. The RKE which is connected directly to the
operated electronics unit, usually the master, is marked by means of a "*".
The display window below the listbox shows the number and the status of the selected RKE.
144
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
The type of monitor can be selected by means of the Monitor Type (Control Protocol) listbox. If the
parameter Other types (Use RKE DIP Switch) is selected, the settings of the DIP switch on the RKE
pcb are valid. Any other setting (including the setting None) of the listbox overwrites the setting of the
DIP switch. For further information on the DIP switch, see the technical manual of the Remote Keyboard
Electronics.
NOTE:
In master/slave installations, the RKE of the master must be configured with None and the DIP switch
must be set to "no monitor", because the serial interface of the monitor is usually connected to the Display
Electronics Unit and not to the RKE. See also the parameter Monitor Control Interface.
5.12.1.9
Start Program (Diskette)
Starts maintenance/service programs from a diskette if available.
5.12.2
Transceiver
The Transceiver Adjust settings replace many adjustments which can also be performed by means of
the potentiometers on the Modulator or TCU boards.
5.12.2.1
Setting-to-Work
> Headmarker
Display field:
Input field:
Antenna Speed
Headmarker correction angle 180
The headmarker of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted in 0.1 steps by means of the
buttons. To store the values, click Save. The headmarker cannot be adjusted mechanically. It
can be adjusted in the complete range (180) by software.
Adjust the headmarker by modifying the value in the input field. A target at a distance of 2...4 NM
must appear on the PPI with the same azimuth as detected visually. The headmarker adjustment
must be performed with the Scanner in both speeds if available (dual speed Antenna Unit is
optional).
> Trigger Delay
Display field:
Input field:
No information available
Value for the Trigger Delay 0...150
The trigger delay of the currently selected Transceiver can be adjusted by means of the buttons.
To store the values, click Save. The trigger delay performs the correction of the range error. Adjust
the trigger delay by modifying the value in the input field. Targets at a known distance must be
displayed with the correct distance on the PPI. If no targets are available, straight lines near the ship
must be displayed correctly.
> STC Delay
Display field:
Input field:
Range, Status
STC Delay
The STC delay adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. The radar must be switched on and the SEA indicator must be set to 0%. Adjust the STC
delay so that the main bang largely disappears but the video starts immediately after the main bang.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
145

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
If the main bang is too large, the antenna matching and the RF installation must be checked, and
corrected if necessary.
> Video MBS
Display field:
Input fields:
Range, Status
MBS Amplitude, MBS Delay
Before the Video MBS adjustment is started, the trigger delay and STC delay adjustments must have
been performed. The main bang should be mostly suppressed by the STC adjustment. If the main
bang is still visible, it can be suppressed with the Video MBS adjust.
The video MBS adjustment must be performed in the ranges 0.25 NM, 1.5 NM, 3 NM, 6 NM and
12 NM. Set SEA to 100% and adjust the centre area without loss of targets.
> PMA Display
Display field:
Input fields:
PMA Display Start and PMA Display End
ztr1_172.eps
Defines the sector for the measurement of the Performance Monitor Amplitude. The default values
are 270...90. These values depend on the alignment of the Gearbox. The sector should be defined
as 180 wide. It must start with the azimuth value 90 before the azimuth of the beam when it lies
at right angles over the plastic window in the outer surface of the Gearbox. The window covers the
microwave detector diode. The sector must end 90 behind the beam azimuth.
Fig. 5-17
146
PMA Display
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
> PM Adjust
Before the PM settings are made, it is necessary to adjust the performance monitor oscillator. The
TCU allows the adjustment by means of the input field PM Tuning as described below.
Display field
Input field:
1.
2.
3.
PM Tuning buttons for PMV Adj and PMA Adj
Performance Monitor Oscillator

Select the 24 NM range.
Switch AFC OFF!
Tune the video display to the maximum.
Switch the performance monitor on.
Generate a strong noise by means of GAIN.
Adjust the PM signal by means of alternating adjustment of PM Tuning and reduction of
GAIN (reduce the brightness of the inner circle by means of GAIN until it is only faintly
visible and tune it to maximum brightness by means of PM Tuning; repeat as long as the
circle can be made visible by means of PM Tuning).
Start the measurement of the performance monitor video level by clicking on PMV Adj.
Performance Monitor Amplitude:
If possible, switch off all other radars.
Click on PMA Adj. The measurement takes about 6 seconds. Click the Save button.
PMA (16 NM)
ztr1_025.eps
PMV (6 NM)
Fig. 5-18
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Performance monitor display (drawing to illustrate the principle)
147

Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
5.12.2.2
Advanced Settings (Magnetron Current, Tuning Offset, STC Compensation)
> Magnetron
Note:
If the Modulator has been changed, a temporary
setting for the magnetron current must be
performed as soon as the radar is switched on
again. Follow the instructions for the exchange of
the Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers.
ztr1_653.gif
Note:
Before an adjustment or a check of the magnetron
current, the Transceiver should have been working
for about 20 mins in the 12 NM range.
Adjustment:
The adjustment must be performed only in the 12 NM range. When another range is selected,
the Start button is insensitive. After the 12 NM range has been set, click on Start to start the
adjustment. The result of the adjustment is displayed in the input fields and a comment is
shown. If no failure is detected, the values must be saved by clicking the Save button.
Usually, it is not necessary and definitely not advisable to modify the values of Imag1, Imag2
and Pulse Length Control manually when the automatic adjustment has been performed. All
ranges should be checked. Only when in ranges 1.5 NM the value of Actual Current is below
5 A and/or the display of the targets is not satisfactory, can the pulse length be increased carefully step by step. If the value of Actual Current is higher than 11 A in the 0.75 NM and 1.5 NM
range, the pulse length can be decreased. Manual modifications must be saved.
Note:
For short pulse lengths (ranges 1.5 NM), a deviation of 30% between actual and nominal magnetron current is tolerable. A deviation of -60%...+30% is tolerable in ranges of 3.0 NM.
CAUTION
Check the magnetron current (Actual) while modifying Imag1 manually.
The "Actual" value should not exceed the "Nominal" value.
The values of the heating voltage and the bias are shown for information only. The displayed heating
voltage is different from the voltage which can be measured at the Modulator. See the description of the
Modulator in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers for information in detail.
148
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
> Tuning Offset

Display field
Input field:
5.12 Service Menu
Tuning Offset
To adjust the tuning offset, switch the radar on and

select the 12 NM range. Set the operators Tuning
ztr1_165.cdr
indicator on the display to 50%.
By modifying the tuning offset value in the input field,
the tuning indication bar must be adjusted to maximum length.
Tuning Indication Gain
If modifications of the tuning adjustment causes only small deflections of the tuning indicator, it might
be difficult to find the maximum adjustment. In this case it is possible to increase the deflections by
means of a higher gain.
The following values proved to be practical:
Range 0.75 NM = 3, range 1.5 NM = 1.5, ranges 3, 6, 12 NM = 1.0
Default value is 1.0.
> STC Compensation
This parameter is visible only, if the parameter Video Anti Clutter Sea is set to off.
Input fields:
Amplitude, Length
To adjust the STC Compensation, select the 12 NM range. Set SEA to maximum and adjust GAIN
in a way that the noise is clearly visible.
The default settings are:
Amplitude:
30
Length (X-Band):
60
Length (S-Band):
40
Check that, at the end of the STC-affected area, neither a noise ring nor a dark ring appears. If
necessary, correct by means of Length.
5.12.2.3
Magnetron Hours
The function Magnetron Hours shows the working hours of the magnetron. The counter can be reset by
means of the Reset button.
5.12.2.4
Antenna Information
The function Antenna Info shows information about the rotary frequency of the Scanner. It displays the
status of the radar, the existing speed and pulse count of the Scanner, and the minimum and maximum
pulse counts.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
149
Technical Manual
5.12 Service Menu
5.12.3
Interswitch
By means of the button Input Adjust On/Off
the Interswitch (PCI) can be switched to the
service mode for the adjustment of the TVA
inputs. This function can be used only if an
Interswitch has been configured in the
system layout. If no Interswitch is available,
the message Not configured appears in the
data field.
ztr1_145.gif
If the Interswitch has been switched to the

service mode, a corresponding warning
message appears on all Indicators. For the
adjustments of the Interswitch, see the Interswitch service manual.
Interswitch menu
5.12.4
NACOS
The parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE are stored in the TRACKPILOT electronics
unit and in the IDE memory module. If one of the components is selected, the radar calls the parameters
from the TRACKPILOT electronics unit automatically and a small dialogue box is opened next to the PPI.
For the TRACKILOT, the parameters are split up into the groups User
Parameters, System Parameters and Special Parameters. By means of
the check box Trial Run, a trial program is started which helps to determine
the controller coefficients.
ztr1_189.cdr
The configuration of the TRACKPILOT and ENGINE INTERFACE can be

performed in the Configure menus and/or in the Service menus. During
setting-to-work, the settings should be performed in the Configure menus.
During the use of the Service menus, the PPI is not hidden by any menus
and every modification of the parameters performed in the dialogue box
affects the TRACKPILOT immediately and so these menus should be used
during trials.
For a description of the parameters (TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERTRACKPILOT service menu
FACE), see the technical manual of the TRACKPILOT.
150
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.13
5.13 Commissioning Data Menu
Commissioning Data Menu

NOTE:
It is advisable to parameterize the entire system always at one and the same Display Electronics Unit
and to transfer the parameters to the other Display Electronics Units subsequently. In this way, it is
possible to prevent an incomplete set of parameters from being transferred to a Display Electronics Unit
with an complete set of parameters, which is then overwritten.
Config Transfer
It is possible to store parameters which have been entered on one Indicator to a second Indicator (or to
all Indicators) without the use of diskettes. In this way, it is possible to parameterize all radars of a system
at one Indicator. By means of the function Transmit, the parameters can be transferred to the selected
Indicator via CAN bus (or stored on a diskette). By means of the function Receive, it is possible to load
the parameters from a selected Indicator (or to load them from a diskette).
The function Transmit writes the files
R10k.sam
(configuration
file),
R10kcom.rep (commissioning report),
version.txt (list of versions; only if a
backup onto a
floppy disk is
performed) and errorhist.txt (list of
errors; only if a backup onto a floppy
disk is performed) onto a diskette or
stores it to the selected Indicator. By
clicking on Transfer, the backup of the
files starts.
Existing files on a diskette are overwritten (a warning will appear). When

changes in the configuration have
been performed, the parameters
should be saved on the "Configuration
Backup" diskettes.
ztr1_146.gif
If
the
files
version.txt
and/or
errorhist.txt have not been generated
so far, this is performed automatically
when the transfer is started.
Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Transfer
NOTE:
If the configuration file R10k.sam has been sent to another Indicator,
it does not automatically replace the existing configuration of the
Indicator. A warning appears at that Indicator. This warning cannot
be acknowledged. The Indicator must be restarted to take over the new configuration and to acknowledge
the warning.
ztr1_141.gif
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
151
Technical Manual
5.13 Commissioning Data Menu
The function Receive loads the configuration files from the selected Indicator
or from the diskette to the operated
Indicator. Ensure that these parameters are valid. Click on Transfer to
start the restorage of the files.
ztr1_148.gif
The parameters are not taken over

automatically. The warning New Indicator Config File appears. This
warning cannot be acknowledged. To
take over the parameters and to
acknowledge the warning, the Indicator
must be restarted.
Commissioning Data > Config Transfer, Receive
If a TRACKPILOT is connected, the R10k.sam file can be transferred also to the TRACKPILOT (but not
received from the TRACKPILOT). The file contains the parameters for the conning display. The
R10k.sam file is also transferred to the TRACKPILOT, when "All Indicators" has been selected. The
parameters of the TRACKPILOT/ENGINE INTERFACE itself cannot be transferred by means of the
Config Transfer function. This must be performed by means of the Configuration menus.
Service Report
ztr1_147.gif
It is important to note what work has

been done at what time. The service
report has to be filled in after each item
of repair or maintenance work. Click on
Service Report to view the service
reports which have been filled in so far.
Commissioning Data menu
152
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
5.14
5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings
Motherboard BIOS Settings

The following instructions are valid for the motherboard DFI CA64. If different motherboards are used, this
section will be extended.
NOTE:
To perform the BIOS settings, a PC keyboard with a PS/2 connector must be connected at the Display
Electronics Unit instead of the Radar Keyboard.
5.14.1
Entering the BIOS Setup Menu
The keyboard must be connected by means of

the PS/2 connector in the same way as the
Radar Keyboard (see Section 4.5.3 on page 49
or Section 4.5.9 on page 64).
If the radar is equipped with a Radar Keyboard,
this must be disconnected beforehand.
ztr1_173.jpg
It is necessary to connect a PC keyboard with

a PS/2 connector to the motherboard. Otherwise it is not possible to operate the BIOS
Setup menu.
Fig. 5-19 Soft power switch of the motherboard
1.
Connect the keyboard as described above.
2.
The motherboard has a soft power switch. This switch is enabled in the BIOS settings of a new
board or a board which is configured with the default settings (e.g. after battery exchange). In this
case, close ATX-SW (DFI CA61/CB61/CA64) by means of a jumper, switch on the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor power switch and remove the jumper. With the BIOS settings
described below, the soft power switch will be disabled and from then on, the system can be started
without the jumper. If the system starts without the use of the jumper, the BIOS is not configured
with the default settings.
3.
While the system is starting up, press Del until the BIOS Setup menu appears.
NOTE:
The BIOS settings must be correct to have the radar started by means of the monitor power switch. If the
BIOS settings are incorrect, the radar might not start when the monitor is switched on.
5.14.2
Procedure
To set the correct parameters, first load the default settings and then modify only the parameters which
are different from the default settings.
In the following description, only the parameters which have to be modified are mentioned. All other
parameters must be left at their default values.
5.14.3
Operation of the BIOS Setup Menus

The operation of the BIOS Setup menus is described by means of the help function of the software and/
or help texts which are displayed on the screen, depending on the selected submenu or parameter. The
operation of the BIOS Setup menus might be different for the various motherboards.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
153
Technical Manual
5.14 Motherboard BIOS Settings
For the navigation in the menus, the keys PgUp, PgDn, the cursor keys and the Enter key must be used.
Some entries must be confirmed by means of the Y key. If the keyboard which is used for the parameterization is not a US version, it might be possible that the Y key is not at the correct position. In this
case, the button has to be used which is at the position of the Y key on a standard US PC keyboard.
After the values have been modified, the modifications must be saved before the BIOS Setup menus are
exited. The system is then rebooted automatically.
5.14.4
Parameters of Motherboard DFI CA64
Loading the Default Settings

Select LOAD OPTIMIZED DEFAULTS with the cursor keys and confirm.
All parameters are now set to the default values. The parameters which have to be set differently from
the default values are described in the following tables.
Parameters which have to be set differently from the Default Settings
First set the current time and date (UTC). Then modify the following parameters in the submenus:
BIOS Settings for DFI CA64
Submenu
Parameter
Setting
STANDARD CMOS FEATURES
Drive A
1.44M, 3.25 in
Halt On
All, But Disk/Key
Virus Warning
Disabled 1)
Quick Power On Self Test
Enabled 1)
First Boot Device
SCSI
Second Boot Device
RADAR/CHARTRADAR: Floppy
MULTIPILOT: CDROM
Third Boot Device
HDD-0
Boot Up Floppy Seek
Disabled 1)
ADVANCED CHIPSET FEATURES
OnChip USB
Disabled
INTEGRATED PERIPHERALS
IDE Primary Prefetch
ADVANCED BIOS FEATURES
OnChip Sound
Onboard Legacy Audio
1)
2)
154
Disabled
2)
Disable
2)
Disable
Onboard Serial Port 1
3F8/IRQ4
Onboard Serial Port 2
2F8/IRQ3
POWER MANAGEMENT SETUP
PWR Lost Resume State
Turn On
PNP/PCI CONFIGURATION
Resources controlled by
Auto (ESCD)
Assign IRQ for USB
Disabled
Is the default setting, please check

For motherboards with sound option only
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
5.15
5.15 Upgrade Kits
Upgrade Kits
Switch off the power supply to the system before starting the installation process!
5.15.1
Analog Interface Kit

The Analog Interface kit consists of the following components:
-
Analog Interface pcb (HS10-SIR10T)

Mains cable to the Interconnection Board
Data cable to the Interconnection Board
4 screws M3x6
To install the Analog Interface, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. Ensure, that the gyro is switched
off! The gyro power supply is independent of the radar power supply. The pcb must be installed in the
Interconnection Box.
The installation steps are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the
Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided next to the Interconnection Board.
Connect the power supply cable to J7 of the Interconnection Box and to TB50 (N), TB51 (L1) and
TB52 (PE) of the Analog Interface pcb. See Section 4.5.10 on page 68 for a description of the
Analog Interface and its terminals.
Remove the four jumpers from J5 of the Interconnection Board and connect the data cable to J5 of
the Interconnection Board and to J7 of the Analog Interface.
Connect the gyro or log.
Close the housing.
Start the system and set the parameters for the Analog Interface by means of the System Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.6 from page 98 on for information about the System Maintenance
Manager.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
155
5.15 Upgrade Kits
5.15.2

Technical Manual
RGB Buffer Kit

The RGB Buffer kit consists of the following components:
-
RGB Buffer pcb

Flat cable to the Interconnection Board
Monitor cable to the Graphics And Video Processor (GVP) in the Display Electronics Unit
4 screws M3x30
4 threaded bolts
To install the RGB Buffer, switch off the Display Electronics Unit. The pcb must be installed in the Interconnection Box.
The installation steps are as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Open the Interconnection Box. See Section 8.4 on page 188 for information on how to open the
Insert the threaded bolts to replace the four screws from the holes shown in Figure 4-17 on page 65.
Mount the pcb on the threaded bolts provided, as shown on page 64.
Connect the flat cable to J6 of the Interconnection Board and to J1 of the RGB Buffer pcb. See
Section 4.5.13 for a description of the RGB Buffer and its terminals.
Connect the monitor cable to J2 of the RGB Buffer and to the VGA connector of the GVP unit in the
Close the housing.
Connect the monitor to J3 and the slave monitor to J4 of the RGB Buffer.
Check the DIP switches for correct 75 termination (usually a termination is not necessary, because
the monitor itself is terminated).
Start the system. Further software settings are not necessary.
If more than three monitors are needed, the 5 Channel Video Switch SH3023 must be used.
156
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e05.fm / 06.09.05
6 Setting-To-Work Guide

Technical Manual
Setting-To-Work Guide
The following instructions will guide you through the first setting-to-work of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100 or the radar components of a MULTIPILOT 1100. The workflow description below does
not contain all necessary information for the setting-to-work but it shows the correct sequence of all
settings and adjustments and it gives cross references to the relevant sections in this manual where you
can find information in detail. Settings and adjustments which must be performed by means of the System
Maintenance Manager software are described by means of help texts which appear after a few seconds
when the cursor is placed over a button or which can be called by means of the
button.
Section 6.2, E x a m p l e o f t h e C o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a D u a l I n s t a l l a t i o n w i t h a C H A R T P I L O T , shows the most
important configuration parameter settings of a dual installation in detail.
6.1
Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components

1.
Cabling and Installation
The mechanical installation and the cabling of a radar system must be planned by means of the manufacturers outline drawings and cabling documents. It is not possible to carry out the installation in a
reasonable way without such preparations. The cabling documents describe most of the possible
versions of the system installation. It is advisable to read the general remarks and the remarks printed
on the plans. The outline drawings also contain drawings of components which may not be included in
the delivery of your system. The installation and cabling work must be performed by competent persons.
2.
Preparations
The following checks and settings must be performed before the mains supply to the system is switched
on:
3.
Check whether the mains selector switches are set correctly (Interconnection Board,
mains input unit of the Transceiver).
Check whether the power supply for the Antenna Unit has been connected correctly.
Set the Transceiver No. on the TCU pcb by means of the DIP switch 1. See DIP switch 1
description in the technical manual of the Gearboxes/Transceivers. For a single installation, set the Transceiver No. to "1".
Set the indicator No. on the RDC pcb by means of the DIP switch. See the DIP switch
description on page 53. For a single installation, set the indicator No. to "1". The indicator
No. and transceiver No. of one and the same radar must be identical.
The correct jumper settings for the X-/S-Band version and the transmitter power should be
set ex works.
CAN Bus Termination
For further information, see Section 4.3 on page 42. The radar may work without termination but it
is highly advisable to install the termination to guarantee undisturbed functioning in all environmental conditions.
4.
Ethernet Network Termination
If the system has an Ethernet network, the cabling must be performed in accordance with the advice
in Section 4.5.8 on page 62.
Now switch on the power to the system.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
157
6.1 Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components
5.

Technical Manual
System Layout and Configuration of Subsystems
The system layout of the entire system must be defined by means of the System Maintenance
Manager. The parameterization and subsequent modifications should be performed always at one
and the same Indicator. See Section 5.11 on page 112 for general hints about the menu handling procedure, and, see Section 5.11.5 on page 114 for further information about entering the system layout.
If the system layout has been entered, only the relevant subsystems remain in the menu tree and have
to be configured:
6.
Indicator
Configure each available Indicator (e.g. type of monitor/keyboard) by means of the
Administration menus. See the hints in Section 5.11.6.
Transceiver
Configure each Transceiver by loading the factory-defined parameters from the available
TCUs. This is the precondition for the transceiver adjustment (see 6, T r a n s c e i v e r A d j u s t m e n t s ). Do not press the Save button! Otherwise the invalid default parameters of the
RDC will overwrite the parameters of the TCU which have been preset ex works.
Only the following parameters have to be set in the transceiver configuration menu:
Antenna Position
Frequency Deviation (if necessary)
Blanking Sector (if requested)
Speed Capability single/double
Antenna Motor Frequency
Configure the systems interfaces for the ships sensors. Depending on the interface type,
use the menu item Serial Interfaces of the relevant Indicator, and/or Sensor Interfaces.
For further information, see Section 5.11.8 on page 127.
Configure all ship-specific data, especially the system position in the menu System/Ship
Parameters > Ship Data.
Transceiver Adjustments
Use the Service menu to perform the transceiver adjustments. See Section 5.12.2 from page 145
on for further information. All adjustments of the Setting-to-Work menu have to be performed.
Every adjustment must be stored by means of the Save button. The parameters are stored in the
IDE memory module and in the TCU. Before the performance monitor adjustments can be
performed, the RDC pcb must be adjusted.
7.
Indicator Adjustments (RDC)

-
8.
RDC adjustments (ADC threshold adjustments) as described in Section 5.12.1.2 on page

140. The adjustment must be performed at every single Indicator for all Transceivers.
Backup
The parameter settings must be stored on diskettes in duplicate. One copy should stay on the ship
(it can be stored in the technical manual) and one copy must be sent to the manufacturer.
Use the Commissioning Data menu (Config Transfer) to generate the backup. For further information, see Section 5.13 from page 151 onwards.
9.
Dual or Multiple Installations
All Indicators and Transceivers must be configured at one Indicator. It is possible to load and store the
parameters directly from one Indicator to another via CAN-Bus (without use of a backup diskette). This
can be performed by means of the function Commissioning Data > Config Transfer of the System
Maintenance Manager. See Section 5.13 on page 151 for further information.
158
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
NOTE:
To avoid the mistakes which may be caused by originating different parameter settings from different
Display Electronics Units, the entire system must be parameterized at one and the same Display Electronics Unit.
All parameters must be copied by means of the Config Transfer function afterwards to the other radars.
Restart all Display Electronics Units before changing any parameters at other Display Electronics Units.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
159
Technical Manual
6.2 Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT
Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT

This example contains the most important parameters for a typical dual installation.
6.2.1
System Diagram
SAM
SAM
GEARBOX with
TRANSCEIVER 1
(S-Band)
GEARBOX with
TRANSCEIVER 2
(X-Band, 8 ft)
CHARTPILOT
WP 1
WP 2
WP 3
LAN
Indicator 1
Indicator 2
Display
Electronics Unit
Display
Electronics Unit
AIS
Electronics Unit
ARPA Electronics
Ethernet Module
Interconnection
Box
TVA1 out
LAN
Ethernet Interconnection
CAN 0, Radar bus
CAN Bus
Interconnection
160
TVA1 out
Ethernet Interconnection
CAN Bus
Interconnection
CAN 1, Nav bus

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Ship's Sensors - Indicator 1

Gyro Output 1
Position 1
Log
Wind
Fig. 6-1
Ethernet Module
Ethernet
Interconnection
Box
Serial Interface
Interconnection
ARPA Electronics
Sensor Input
S1
S2
ztr1_190.eps
6.2
Serial Interface
Interconnection
Ship's Sensors - Indicator 2

Gyro Output 2
Position 2
Echograph 4630
System diagram of a dual installation with CHARTPILOT (example)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
System Layout Menu
Configure
System Layout
Indicator
Indicator 1
Indicator 2
Indicator 3
Indicator 4
Indicator 5
RADARPILOT 1100
RADARPILOT 1100
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Transceiver
Transceiver 1
Connected
Transceiver 2
Transceiver 3
Transceiver 4
Transceiver 5
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Interswitch
Not Connected
Sensor Interfaces
Sensor Interface 1
Sensor Interface 2
NACOS Configuration
TRACKPILOT
Not Connected
ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDP.) Not Connected
Planning System
Connected Planning System
AIS
Connected to LAN
VDR
Not connected
Fig. 6-2
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
6.2.2
Not Connected
Not Connected
System Layout settings for the example of a dual installation
161
Technical Manual
6.2.3
Configure (System / Ship Parameters)
Configure
Ship Data
Administration
Vessel
Shipping Company
Flag
MS Test
Mustermann
German
DACF
0087X1120079
0087X1120080
Call Sign
Phone
Fax
MMSI Number 1)
XXX XXX XXX

IMO Number
XXXX XXX
Type of Ship
Passenger Vessel
Type of Ship coded as No.
69
System Position and other Ship Dimensions 2)
Distance to Bow
10
Distance to Stern
120
Distance to SB
8
Distance to P
8
Length at Waterline
122
Nominal Speed
Acceleration
20.0
0.020
Maximum ROT Alarm Limit

Position Quality Check
Minimum Radius
Maximum Radius
Gyro Monitoring
Speed Monitoring
Position Monitoring
200/min
Off
0.4 NM
3.0 NM
Basic Radar
Video Anti Clutter Sea
ARPA Lost Target w.o. Al.
AIS Lost Target w.o. Al.
TB2 Term 15,16, HM turn
On/Off
Position against Redundant
Position Sensor
16.0 NM
Off
Not Connected
Default Wind
Default Weather
162
Off
On/Off
Speed against Redundant
Speed Sensor
Speed against SOG of Main
Position Sensor
Speed against SOG of
Redundant Position Sensor
on
19.5 NM
Startup Sensor Selection Heading

Speed
Position
Time
Time from selected Position Sensor
Differentiated Heading
Default Depth
Fig. 6-3
On/Off
Off
Gyro against Magnetic
Compass
Gyro against COG of Main
Position Sensor
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor
Ignore Gyro against COG
above ROT of:
Ignore Gyro against COG
below Speed of:
Full sensitivity Gyro against
COG above speed of:
Heading Sensor 1
Log 1 3)
Position Sensor 1
Position Sensor 1
Yes
Selected Heading Sensor
Depth Sensor 1
Wind Sensor 1
Manual Weather
1)
2)
3)
Must be entered for AIS!

See Figure 6-4 on page 163.
BSH does not allow GPS as
speed sensor.
Ship Data and Parameter settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
10 m
8m
8m
-4 m 4 m
LT =
Log Transducer, defines the System Position

10 m to Bow, 120 m to Stern, 8 m to P, 8 m to SB
RS =
Radar S-Band antenna, -80 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position
RX =
Radar X-Band antenna, -82 m Distance Longitudinal to System Position
P1 =
GPS Position Sensor 1, -4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance

Longitudinal to System Position
P2 =
GPS Position Sensor 2, 4 m Distance Transversal and -85 m Distance

PAIS =
AIS GPS Antenna, -2 m Distance Transversal and -110 m Distance

-80 m
-82 m
-85 m
-110 m
120 m
- Longitudinal +
LT
RS
RX
P1
P2
PAIS
-2 m
- Transversal +
Fig. 6-4
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
System Position
163
Technical Manual
6.2.4
Configure (Radar > Indicator)
Configure
Radar
Indicator
Indicator 1
Administration
Fig. 6-5
164
Installed Type of Tracking Facility

Connected Monitor
Keyboard
Name
System Fault Alarm
Lost Target Alarm
RADAR 1100 ARPA

16" (AZ 3068)
RADAR Keyboard
Indicator 1
30 sec
Disable
Disable
Disable
Guard Zone Alarm

Disable
Yes
CHARTRADAR Function
Not Available
CHARTRADAR Identification Code

Conning
Radar PPI Radius
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Not Available
IEC 60936-1
Use Default
Use Default
Head-Up PPI Orientation
Bow-up (standard)
Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP
Yes

Double End Ferry
User Controlled
No
Indicator 1 configuration settings for the example of a dual installation, part 1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Serial Interfaces
Serial I/O 1
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Fig. 6-6
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
38400
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Channel of this Gyro

Display Selected Gyro
Heading Sensor 1
No
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer ZDA
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
Serial Output used as
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not defined
165
Technical Manual
Serial I/O 2
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Weather
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
1)
Fig. 6-7
166
Channel
Position Sensor 1
Distance Longitudinal
Distance Transversal
Sensor Number
GLL, GGA Selection
Use Speed from Position Sensor
Use Time from Position Senor
- 85
-4
1
Pos. from GLL Message
Yes 1)
Yes
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
AIS Navigation Data
Set to No for DNV/BSH ships
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Serial I/O 3
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Serial I/O 4
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Fig. 6-8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Not Connected
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Connected
Not Connected
Channel
Log Type
Longit. Speed Filter Const.
Transversal Speed Const.
Log 1
0
0
1 Axis Log
1
1
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not defined
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not defined
167
Technical Manual
Administration
Indicator 2
Serial Interfaces
Fig. 6-9
168
Installed Type of Tracking Facility RADAR 1100 ARPA

Connected Monitor
Keyboard
Name
System Fault Alarm
Lost Target Alarm
Guard Zone Alarm
16" (AZ 3068)

RADAR Keyboard
Indicator 2
30 sec
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable

CHARTRADAR Function
CHARTRADAR Identification Code
Conning
Yes
Not Available
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXX
Not Available
Radar PPI Radius
IEC 60936-1
Use Default
Use Default
Head-Up Display Orientation

Bow-up (standard)
Indicator (COM 1)
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CP
Yes
User Controlled
Double End Ferry
No
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Serial I/O 1
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Fig. 6-10
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
38400
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Channel of this Gyro

Display Selected Gyro
Heading Sensor 1
No
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MTA
OFF
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
Not defined
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
169
Technical Manual
Serial I/O 2
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Channel
Sensor Number
GLL, GGA Selection
Position Sensor 2
- 85
+4
2
Pos from GLL message
Use Speed from Position Sensor

Use Time from Position Senor
Yes 1)
Yes
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
1)
Fig. 6-11
170
OFF
AIS Navigation Data
Set to No for DNV/BSH ships
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Serial I/O 3
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Serial I/O 4
Driver
Baud Rate
Serial Gyro
Position
Speed
Time
Output
Depth
Wind
Weather
Fig. 6-12
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
NMEA183 (IEC61162-1/-2)
4800
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Connected
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not defined
Depth Value
Below Transducer
Transfer GLL
Transfer DTM
OFF
OFF
Transfer VTG
Transfer HDT
Transfer TTM
Transfer OSD
Transfer MWV
Transfer ZDA
Transfer DBT
Transfer ROT
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Transfer MWD
Transfer VBW
Transfer MHU
Transfer MMB
Transfer MTA
Transfer RTE/WPL
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Not defined
171
Technical Manual
6.2.5
Configure (Radar > Transceiver)
Configure
Transceiver
Radar
Transceiver 1
Type of Generation
Additional Information
Frequency Deviation
Sector Blanking
Antenna
RADAR 1100 S-Band

Main Mast
0
Number of Blanking Sectors
Speed Capability
Height above Sea Level
Beam Width
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution
Transceiver 2
Last Modification Date
XX.XX.XX
Type of Generation
RADAR 1100 X-Band 12.5 kW
Additional Information
Frequency Deviation
Sector Blanking
Antenna
Main Mast
0
Number of Blanking Sectors
Speed Capability
Beam Width
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution
1None
Single
- 82
0
25
1.0 (8 ft Antenna)
1920
60 Hz
Height above Sea Level
Last Modification Date
Fig. 6-13
172
None
Single (Low Speed)
- 80
0
28
1.8
415
60 Hz
XX.XX.XX
Transceiver configuration settings for the example of a dual installation
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Configure (AIS)
Configure
6.2.6
AIS
AIS Channel
AIS Sensor 1
Distance of GPS Antenna Longi- -110 m
tudinal (see Figure 6-4)
Distance of GPS Antenna Trans- -2 m
versal (see Figure 6-4)
Fig. 6-14
6.2.7
AIS Electronics Unit Sensor

Interface S1
IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud

Interface S2
IEC 61162-1, 4800 Baud

Interface S3
Not connected
AIS system settings for the example of a dual installation
Configure (Planning System)
Configure
Planning System
Select Radar Indicator for
CHARTPILOT ARPA Targets
Sensor Information via Ethernet
to CHARTPILOT
Fig. 6-15
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Indicator 1
True
Planning System settings for the example of a dual installation
173
Technical Manual
6.3 Important Hardware Components
Important Hardware Components
6.3.1
COM Expander GE3044G210

TP11, TP12, TP13, TP21, TP22
Manufacturers use only. Do not connect wires or jumpers,
do not remove jumpers which have been set ex works.
TB1...5 Function
Sensor interface,
with RS422 plug-in pcb GE3044G218
1
RxD +
2
RxD 3
TxD +
4
TxD 5
GND
For all other plug-in pcbs, see Section 4.5.11.1.
TB7
Function
TB2
TB1
TB4
TB5
TB6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Plug-in pcb 3
1
2
3
F1
1
1
TP22 Plug-in pcb 5
1
2
3
4
S1
ON 8
TB6
Function
1
2
3
4
Digital input 1 (+)

Digital input 1 (-)
Digital input 2 (+)
Digital input 2 (-)
DS1 DS2 DS3
DS4 DS5 DS6
S1
1
Function
Function
DS1...6 Function
red flashing at
0.25 Hz (every 4 s) = normal operation
1.0 Hz (once per second) = normal operation (active COM Expander if two COM Expanders are installed)
5.0 Hz (five times per second) = at least one error is active (highest priority)
Fig. 6-16
2
3...7
8
1 1
1
S1
Jumper on 2/3 = digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 3/4) suitable for 20 mA current
174
PE
N
L1
TB8
Jumper on 2/3 = Digital input (Interconnection Board TB6 1/2) suitable for 20 mA current
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
Mains supply
1
2
3
TP41
TP42
TB8
TP13
TP11 1
1
1
1
TB7
2
3
4
5
TP21
1 1
2 Plug-in pcb 1 Plug-in pcb 2
3
4
5
Termination

Plug-in pcb 4
TB3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
TP23
1
Alarm out 1 make (normally open)
2
Alarm out 1 centre
3
Alarm out 1 break (normally closed)
4
Alarm out 2 make (not used)
5
Alarm out 2 centre (not used)
6
Alarm out 2 break (not used)
The relays are switched on if the pcb is working!
TP12
ztr1_624.jpg
6.3
ON
Function
OFF = COM Expander 1
ON = COM Expander 2
Manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
No function (default = OFF)
Manufacturers use, must be OFF (default)
J7
Function
1
2
3
4
5/6
7/8

5 connected to 6
7 connected to 8
COM Expander pcb
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219
DIP Switch S1/1...4, Indicator Number

On=closed=0; off=open=1
DIP
Switch
S1/5...8
Switch No.
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
All other settings are not admissible
1)
TP162 1/2
Speaker
TP161
E15 E20 E2 TP151 TP152 TP162 DS4 DS6
DS5 DS7
1
1 E28
1 E25
J2
1 1
ON
OFF
Boot from IDE

memory module
(default)
Boot from diskette drive

(the software update
routine is started while
booting).
Monitor resolution
1024x768
Monitor resolution
1280x1024
Monitor frequency
72 Hz
Monitor frequency 60 Hz
Normal operation
(default)
Service mode on 1)
See section S e r v i c e S w i t c h o f t h e R D C on page 57.

Settings for the different Monitor Types
TP161 = CAN0, TP162 = CAN1

Jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus terminated
No jumper on 1/2 = CAN bus not
terminated
See also Section 4.3 on page 42.
Function
CAN Bus Termination

TP161 1/2
Monitor
S1/6
S1/7
Monitor
S1/6
S1/7
AZ3069G040
Off
Off
AZ3066G040
On
Off
AZ3063G04x/5x
Off
Off
AZ3056G04x
Off
Off
AZ3068G04x/5x
Off
Off
AZ3065G040
Off
Off
S1
E10/
1 E11 1
1
DS8 DS10 DS2 E18

DS9 DS1 DS3
E1
E4
DS12
DS11 DS13
1 E27
E14
E16
ztr1_623.jpg
E17
1 E12 1
1 E26
6.3.2
E19
TP103
TP102
TP101
TP100
Termination of
Serial interface 4
Serial interface 3
Serial interface 2
Serial interface 1
E5 E3, ext. reset contact
Motherboard
ztr1_011.jpg
J4
E5/2
E5/1
E20/1
Fig. 6-17
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
RDC pcb
175
Technical Manual
Analog Interface (AI) GE3044G207

For the installation of a retrofit kit, see Section 5.15.
TB
Function
10
AIS RxD, Input 11
AIS RxD, Input +
12
Do not connect!
13
Do not connect!
14
AIS TxD, Output 15
AIS TxD Output +
16
AIS GND
(Rev 03 only)
J1
RS422 Interface
Connector for SH3014G203,

RS422 interface (Rev 03 only)
Function
Alarm out 1, make
Alarm out 1, centre
Alarm out 1, break
Alarm out 2, make
Alarm out 2, centre
Alarm out 2, break
TB
Function
30
31
32
33

TP5
TP1 TP74
1
TB10
TB11
TB12
TB13
TB14
TB15
TB16
TB25
TB24
TB23
TB22
TB21
TB20
TB40
TB41
TB42
TB43
TB44
TB45
TB30
TB31
TB32
TB33
TP78
TB
40
41
42
43
44
45
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8
Termination

TP99
Addresses
Set jumper on 7/8 to address Analog Interface No. 1 (default)

Set jumper on 6/7 to address Analog Interface No. 2 (if also a
second Analog Interface is installed)
TP75
TP90
TP70
TB52, PE
TB51, N
TB50, L1
1
1
1
1
TB
Function
TB
Function
25
24
Common (stepper)
Gyro REF 2 / reference common
(synchro)
Gyro REF 1 (synchro)
Gyro T
Gyro S
Gyro R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Log SP (supply output for zero potential contacts)

Log BT (Bottom Track)
Log WT (Water Track)
Log XPM (+/- longitudinal speed)
Log YPM (+/- transversal speed (drift))
Log VX (speed)
Log VY (speed transversal (drift))
Log GND
23
22
21
20
Fig. 6-18
176
F1
ztr1_080.jpg
6.3.3
DS34 DS35
DS7
DS36
DS33
DS37
J7
TP2

Analog Interface Rev. 03
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Connection of Log and Gyro
LOG
1-axis log connection to Radar
Analog Interface
TB
8 GND (common)
6 VX (speed)
2-Axis Log connection to Radar Analog Interface

TB
8 GND (common)
7 VY (drift)
6 VX (speed)
5 LOG YPM (+/-Y)
4 LOG XPM (+/-X)
3 WT (Water Track)
2 BT (Bottom Track)
1 Log SP
GYRO
( common - ground )
+
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
20
21
22
25
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red
20
21
22
25
In DC stepper systems, the signals can be

switched by mechanical contacts or also by semiconductors. See the following example:
ztr1_124.eps
DC stepper system
( common - high )

( common - high )
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common
AC System 50 Hz
AC System 60 Hz
Analog Interface
TB
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common
R
S
T
common
Analog Interface
DS 33, 34, 35
TB are flashing red
20
21
22
25
R
S
T
common

( common - high )

( common - ground )
-
R
S
T
common
Analog Interface
TB
23 REF 1
20 R
21 S
22 T
24 REF 2 (reference
common)
Gyro (Synchro)
+(-)
Gyro
Fig. 6-19
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
Connection of log and gyro
177
Technical Manual
TB 2, Alarm Contacts
TB3
19
= TB3/5
18
= TB3/5
17
= TB3/5
Double End Ferry:
15, 16 closed = AFT
15, 16 opened = FWD
Audio Alarm Ack.:
14 Alarm Ack. M
13 Alarm Ack. P
Chart Alarm:
12
AL_out4 make
11
AL_out4 centre
10
AL_out4 break
Target Alarm:
(ARPA/AIS Alarm)
9
AL_out3 make
8
AL_out3 centre
7
AL_out3 break
Dead Man Alarm Trig:
6
AL_out2 make
5
AL_out2 centre
4
AL_out2 break
Radar Alarm:
3
AL_out1 make
2
AL_out1 centre
1
AL_out1 break
The alarm contacts are provided by

the RDC. See the RDC description for
technical data and configuration.
15
24V ON/OFF ONN
14
24V ON/OFF ONP
13
24V ON/OFF ONN
12
24V ON/OFF ONP
11
CAN0_A (IN)
10
CAN0_B (IN)
9
CAN1_A (IN)
8
CAN1_B (IN)
7
CAN0_A (OUT)
6
CAN0_B (OUT)
5
CAN_GND
4
CAN1_A (OUT)
3
CAN1_B (OUT)
2
24V ON/OFF ONN
1
24V ON/OFF ONP
IN and OUT for the CAN-Bus
are identical.
TB18
Function
For Remote Keyboard Electronics
6
CAN_KBC GND
5
CAN_KBC GND
4
CAN_KBC B Out ->
3
CAN_KBC A Out ->
2
CAN_KBC B in <1
CAN_KBC A in <-
J5
SB
TVA2 in
3/4
Screen
TVA1 in
3/4
Screen
J9, J91 Function

Supply input for plug-in
pcbs
1
Vcc
2
GND
3
Vcc
4
PE
178
Plug-in
pcb 3
L1 spare
N spare
PE spare
TB6
Function
1
2
3
L1 to interf. expander
N to interf. expander
PE to interf. expander
F2
TB10 Function
1
2
3
1
2
3
F5
S1
F4
230 V
115 V
1
2
3
L1 in, switched
by monitor
N in, monitor
PE in, monitor
LED
Function
DS1 is lit when mains is

switched on at the monitor of
this radar.
DS2 is lit when the DC
voltage is available from the
transformer/rectifier.
Drillings for the RGB Buffer
J6
L1 out, displ. el.

N out, displ. el.
PE out, displ. el.
TB13 Function
T1
1 J100
L1 out, to monitor
N out, to monitor
PE out, to monitor
TB11 Function
J9
Fuses
Drillings for the Video

Selector SH3023G205
F1
Systems mains
fuse
Systems
mains fuse
F3
Mains fuse monitor
F4
Mains T1
F5
24V ON/OFF signal
See also page 190.
F2
J4
Function J3
Connector for the

RGB Buffer. See
Section 4.5.13.
F3
K1
TP11
Function
Mains to Analog Interface

1
L1
2
N
3
PE
F1
Plug-in
pcb 2
Function
Ships mains
1
L1 in
2
N in
3
PE in
J7
DS2
Drillings for the

LAN-BNC adapter
TB3
J6
Fig. 6-20
Function
1
2
3
TB4
to El. Unit (RDC)

1
TVA1
2
TVA2
3
4
5
6
GND
7
GND
8
GND
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
GND
TB15 Function
1/2
J8
SB
SB
1
J4
TB16 Function
1/2
SB
Plug-in pcb 1
J91
TB5
Position of the RKE pcb,

mounting by means of 4 bolts.
DS1
TB17 Function
Screen
Plug-in
pcb 4
Ships sensors RS422

TB1
TB2
20
GND4
19
TXD43/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 1/2
18
TXD4+
17
RXD416
RXD4+
15
GND3
14
TXD313
TXD3+
12
RXD311
RXD3+
10
GND2
9
TXD28
TXD2+
7
RXD26
RXD2+
5
GND1
4
TXD13
TXD1+
2
RXD11
RXD1+
for TTL, 20 mA, RS232,
RS485, see Section
4.5.9.3 on page 66.
3/4
TB18, J100, J8, TP10

These connectors and testpins are
needed for the connection of a Remote
Keyboard Electronics. See the corresponding technical manual for further
information.
Function
TVA1 out

If the Analog Interface

is not connected, the
following jumpers must
be set to enable TB3 for
the CAN bus:
- J5 1/2
- J5 3/4
- J5 5/6
- J5 7/8
1/2
SB = Solder Bridge
These solder bridges must be opened
when the plug-in adapter pcbs are used.
For RS422 no plug-in pcb is necessary.
If one of the plug-in pcbs is used, the
power supply cable GE3050G020 must
be used (J9). See also TP11.
J5 CAUTION
TB1
Function
TP10
ztr1_613.jpg
TB2 Function
J3
Function
to El. Unit serial port

1
n.c.
2
COM1_RXD
3
COM1_TXD
4
COM1_DTR
5
COM1_GND
6
COM1_DSR
7
COM1_RTS
8
COM1_CTS
9
n.c.
J2
Function
Serial interface to monitor

1
LKAP (beeper +)
2
RXD
3
TXD
4
DTR
5
GND
6
DSR
7
RTS
8
CTS
9
LKAM (beeper -)
J1
J2
J1
Function
to El. Unit (RDC)

1
RXD1+
2
RXD13
TXD1+
4
TXD15
GND1
6
RXD2+
7
RXD28
TXD2+
9
TXD210
GND2
11
RXD3+
12
RXD313
TXD3+
14
TXD315
GND3
16
RXD4+
17
RXD418
AL_out1 break
19
AL_out1 centre
20
AL_out1 make
21
AL_out2 break
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
AL_out2 centre
AL_out2 make
AL_out3 break
AL_out3 centre
AL_out3 make
AL_out4 break
AL_out4 centre
AL_out4 make
+5 V
TXD4+
TXD4GND4
GND
LKAP (Beeper +)
LKAM (Beeper -)
CAN0_A
CAN0_B
CAN1_A
CAN1_B
CAN_GND
VGND2
V12R
44
45
46
47
48
49
VGND1
V12M
n.c.
Audio Alarm
Ack. P
Audio Alarm
Ack. N
Alarm-ACK2 P
TP11
Jumper on 1/2 = default
Jumper on 2/3 = must be set
if the power supply cable
GE3050G020 is connected
(plug-in pcbs)
Terminals on the Interconnection Board GE3044G216
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e06.fm / 06.09.05
7 Revision Overview

Technical Manual
Revision Overview
This table shows the differences in the functionality and the necessary prerequisites for the use of the
different revisions of hardware or software components. For a description in detail, see the corresponding
sections in this technical manual. The following table is only an overview. If an item has to be exchanged,
the same revision or a newer one must be used.
Component
(hardware / software)
Extended / different
functionalities
Prerequisites
Remarks
So far, no revisions/versions of
hard-/software
exist.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05
179
7 Revision Overview
7 Revision Overview

Technical Manual
7 Revision Overview
180
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e07.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8 Repair/Maintenance
8.1 Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes
Repair/Maintenance
GENERAL:
The jumper settings and switch settings on a replacement pcb must be

the same as on the defective pcb. The wire connections must be made
in exactly the same way. Exceptions are explained in this manual.
8.1
Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes

For the BIOS configuration, it is necessary to use a PC keyboard with PS/2 connector. For the handling
of the System Maintenance Manager, it is also more convenient to work with an additional keyboard. It
may be helpful to connect a buzzer to the motherboard of the Display Electronics Unit to recognize the
signals described in Section 8.2.4.
8.2
Trouble-Shooting
8.2.1
Hints
In case of the of problems during setting-to-work, the cabling should be checked again. All components
must be supplied with power.
-
8.2.2
Read the system fault messages on the screen to get more information about the problem.
Try to perform the self-check routines as described in Section 5.9 on page 105 to localize the fault.
If no radar video is displayed, the LEDs DS11...13 of the RDC pcb indicate, whether the incoming
signal is correct.
System Faults
The system fault codes are displayed on the monitor together with a short description. To obtain more
information about the system faults and to display the existing faults, use the System Maintenance
Manager with the submenu Telemonitoring Data. For the description of Telemonitoring Data, see
Section 5.10 on page 109.
The system faults of the Telemonitoring Data screen are displayed in four columns. These columns are:
-
Error
Dev.
SubDev.
Info
The column "Error" shows the system fault number. The column "Dev." shows the device which is
causing the fault, and the column "SubDev." gives an indication for the defective subdevice, if possible.
The column "Info" gives more detailed information about the fault. The system faults are also listed in
Section 10 on page 207 in this manual. This information cannot cover all defects. It will be updated as
often as possible.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
181
Technical Manual
8.2 Trouble-Shooting
8.2.3
Red Screen and Following Automatic Reset (RDC Watchdog)

The RDC has a watchdog function. If an error is detected in the electronics units components, a red
screen is generated. By means of the reset wire between the RDC and the motherboard, the motherboard is reset (for the connection, see Section 4.5.4 on page 53). In case of such a reset, the system
reboots. If the reset cable is not connected or the connection is faulty, the red screen is displayed permanently, because the reset cannot be performed.
In case of a permanent red screen, check the reset cabling and perform the RDC watchdog test.
If the system displays the red screen and reboots occasionally or repeatedly, there is a hardware or software problem.
8.2.4
Display Electronics Unit Does Not Start

If the Display Electronics Unit does not start, check the items of the following table.
Symptom/Problem
Remedy
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if

the ATX Power On contacts are shortened
(see Section 5.14).
This happens if the BIOS settings have been lost. In this case, the
BIOS Setup has to be performed as described in Section 5.14.4.
See the next line if this remedy has no success.
The Display Electronics Unit starts only if

the ATX Power On contacts are shortened
(see Section 5.14) although the BIOS
setup has been performed beforehand.
The BIOS settings have not been saved after powering off and on.
In this case, the backup battery on the motherboard may be
discharged or the motherboard is defective.
The ATX power supply fan does not work.
- 230 V mains supply is missing.

- The internal fuse of the power supply (Display Electronics Unit) is
blown.
- The power supply is defective.
- One of the power outlets of the power supply is short-circuited.
- One of the devices connected to the power supply is defective.
The CPUs heatsink fan does not work.
- The CPUs heatsink fan is defective.

- The motherboard is defective.
- One of the pcbs connected to the motherboard is defective or
connected incorrectly.
- The power supply is defective.
- The CPU is defective.
The buzzer sounds continuously with long

beeps.
- The memory module is defective or connected incorrectly to the

motherboard
The buzzer sounds a sequence of one

long and three short beeps (repeatedly).
- The Graphics And Video Processor is defective or connected

incorrectly to the motherboard.
The buzzer sounds one short beep, but

the monitor remains black or displays "NO
SYNC"
- The connection between monitor and graphics and video

processor is incorrect.
- The Graphics And Video Processor is defective.
The Electronics Unit does not start.
The power supply unit is equipped with a protective circuit against

tottering contacts. If the power supply is switched off and on within
0.5 s, the power supply does not start and it must be switched off for
5...10 s until it can be switched on again.
General Guidelines for Troubleshooting with the Display Electronics Unit

Before removing or inserting any component, switch off the power!
182
1.
Check all power supply connectors.
2.
Check if the pcbs are connected correctly in their sockets. If there is any doubt, remove and insert
the pcb again.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
3.
Insert the memory module in another socket.
4.
If one or more pcbs seem to be installed in a skew way (i.e. not vertically, or distorted) then:
Remove the pcbs.
Untighten the motherboards screws (so that the motherboard can be shifted).
Re-insert the pcbs and fix them by means of their screws.
Tighten the screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the pcbs.
5.
Clean the pcbs and memory modules contacts, first using at first a plastic rubber and then a cotton
cloth with some alcohol.
6.
Remove all pcbs from the motherboard and connect a speaker to the motherboards speaker
connector (labelled "SPKR" or "SPEAKER").
6.1 When powering on the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds continuously with long
beeps, because the memory module is missing. If this does not happen, the motherboard must
be exchanged.
6.2 Insert the memory module in one of the memory sockets.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker repeatedly sounds a sequence of
one long and three short beeps, because the Graphics And Video Processor is missing. If this
does not happen, the memory modules must be exchanged.
6.3 Insert the Graphics And Video Processor into the appropriate socket and connect the monitor
directly.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep and the
BIOS copyright message appears on the screen. If this does not happen, the Graphics And
Video Processor must be exchanged.
6.4 Insert the RDC into the appropriate socket.
When powering up the Display Electronics Unit, the speaker sounds one short beep, the BIOS
copyright message appears on the screen and the radar software is started. If this does not
happen, the RDC must be exchanged.
6.5 Insert the remaining pcbs step by step and verify the function of the Display Electronics Unit.
If any malfunctions are detected, the pcb inserted last must be exchanged.
8.2.5
Monitoring the Start of the Processes during Booting (RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR only)

If the service switch S1/8 of the RDC is switched on (see Section 4.5.4.2 on page 57), the sequential
start of the processes is displayed during booting. When an error is detected, the booting is stopped and
the process which causes the problem can be recognized. This function may be helpful to localize a
problem in cooperation with the service department of the manufacturer.
8.2.6
The MULTIPILOT 1100 works in Radar Mode only / Emergency Backup System
If the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT is defective or the file system is faulty, the MULTIPILOT shuts down
and reboots via the IDE memory module or it reboots via the IDE memory module after it has been
powered down manually. This is caused by a modification of the boot sequence which is set automatically
during the booting.
The IDE memory module contains the complete operating system and application software of a RADARPILOT 1100. In this state, the complete radar functions are available.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
183

Technical Manual
If the automatic detection of the defective hard disk drive fails, the MULTIPILOT can be configured to start
as a RADARPILOT by means of the MP1100 Setup CD-ROM. After the repair works has been
completed, the system must be configured to boot as a MULTIPILOT. See the following descriptions.
8.2.6.1
Manual Activation of the Emergency Backup System (Booting as a RADARPILOT 1100):
Proceed as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM

Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display
Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off by means of the power
switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).
The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?
appears, click the NO button.
Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System
(HDD) appears. Click the YES button.
Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.
When prompted, remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.
The MULTIPILOT will now boot from the IDE memory module as a RADARPILOT 1100 until the standard
MULTIPILOT function is enabled again as described in Section 8.2.6.2.
8.2.6.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Manual Activation of the Standard System (booting as MULTIPILOT 1100):

Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM
Enter the Maintenance Menus and start a software update.
The system boots from the CD-ROM. When the query Begin with installation procedure?
appears, click the NO button.
Subsequently the message Click YES to enable Backup System, NO to enable Standard System
(HDD) appears. Click the NO button.
Click the NO button, if the query Enter operating system command mode appears.
Remove the CD-ROM, then switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again.
The MULTIPILOT 1100 will now boot from the hard disk drive as a MULTIPILOT 1100.
8.2.7
Colors, Brightness and Contrast of the Monitor are Faulty

The following information is valid for the TFT monitors AZ3056G042, AZ3063G041, AZ3064G040,
AZ3065G040, AZ3066G040, AZ3068G040.
If the colors, the brightness and/or the contrast of a monitor are not correct or if there are differences
between the monitors in one system, the reason might be that the user default settings which have been
set by the manufacturer have been modified.
Especially for ECDIS purposes, the monitors must be adjusted to the values which have been determined
during the licensing. The values have been stored in a non-volatile memory of the monitor. In case of
uncertainty, these values can be re-loaded by the technician in the following way:
184
1.
Open the OSD menu of the monitor (Menu key)
2.
Load (Factory) Default must be selected
3.
+ must be pressed to open the submenus.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
4.
Load User Default must be selected.
Load Factory Default must NOT be selected. If this has happened, the user defaults must be loaded
again.
When the user defaults have been loaded, the following values must have been set:
-
Brightness = 50
Contrast = 70
Fill to aspect ratio must have been set and NOT Fill Screen
Interferences as well as muddy vertical lines or slight indications of these effects are not permissible.
The fine tuning can be performed by means of the Frequency and Phase sliders. The adjustment should
start with the sliders in centre (50%) position.
8.2.8
Trackball Operation is Erratic

If the Trackball does not work properly, it is advisable to clean it. Usually, the Trackball has become dirty
through crumbs or through spilt drinks.
To clean the Trackball, it must be removed from the Operating Unit. On the upper side of the Trackball
there are three screws which must be removed to open it.
The Trackball and the roll wheels can be cleaned by means of a soft cloth and alcohol.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
185

Technical Manual
8.3 Software Update and Installation
8.3
Software Update and Installation
8.3.1
System Software Installation/Update of a RADARPILOT/CHARTRADAR 1100

To update the software, follow the instructions in Section 5.12.1 on page 140 on.
Please pay also attention to the following sections.
8.3.2
System Software Installation/Update of a MULTIPILOT 1100

The operating system and the application software of the MULTIPILOT are stored on the hard-disk. In
addition to that, the operating system and the software of a standard radar system are stored in an IDE
memory module. Both systems are installed on the MULTIPILOT 1100 ex works. They can be installed
and updated simultaneously by means of the MP 1100 Setup CD. Usually, the MULTIPILOT runs with
the software of the hard-disk. In case of a problem with the hard-disk drive, it is still possible to use the
MULTIPILOT as a radar, which runs with the software of the RDC. See Section 8.2.6 for further information.
For first installation of the software only (formatted or new hard-disk):
1.
2.
186
Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 to the OFF position to force the booting from the DVD-ROM drive or
the hard-disk. Set the boot sequence in the BIOS setup (Advanced BIOS Features) to SCSI,
CDROM, HHD-0 as described in Section 5.14 from page 153 on.
Verify also the BIOS settings referring to Section 5.14 from page 153 on.
3.
Verify that the IRQ of the RDC (first device displayed in the list) is not shared with the LAN network
adapter. Refer to the table of PCI devices which is displayed during the booting. If the IRQ numbers
are shared, the BIOS settings must be checked.
4.
Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on
again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,
it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
housing).
5.
Follow the setup procedure:

Begin with installation procedure?
Select YES
MP1100 application update?
Select NO
Update operating system?
Select NO
Create all new (all chart data will be lost)?
Select YES
All chart data will be lost! Abort?
Select NO
The hard-disk will be formatted, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT 1100 application software will be copied to the hard-disk and the RDC, the TCUs and the interface extensions will be
programmed.
6.
Switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on again to boot from the CD-ROM (if it is not possible
to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch, it must be switched off by
means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit housing).
7.
Perform the manual modification of the boot procedure as described in Section 8.2.6.2 on page 184.
8.
Set the RDC DIP switch S1/5 back to ON position.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.3 Software Update and Installation
For regular software installation (older version of the MULTIPILOT software still installed):
This software installation is an update of an existing software version.
1.
Insert the MP 1100 Setup CD-ROM GE3065G010 and switch the Display Electronics Unit off and on
again (if it is not possible to switch off the Display Electronics Unit by means of the monitor switch,
it must be switched off by means of the power switch at the rear of the Display Electronics Unit
housing).
2.
Follow the instructions of the setup procedure.
If the systems does not allow a regular software installation:

The operating system and the radar software are combined in one and the same program. This program
is stored in the IDE memory module. Under normal circumstances, it is not necessary to install the software. Only if the System Maintenance Manager cannot be started to update the software might it
be helpful to reinstall the complete software to find out whether the hardware is damaged or whether the
software installation was faulty.
It is definitely advisable to rule out any other reason for a defect before the system software is
installed again.
1.
To install the software, switch off the radar and open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit.
2.
Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC in accordance with the description in Section 4.5.4 on page 53.
By means of this switch, the radar is forced to boot directly from the diskette drive.
3.
Put the "Flash Update Facility Boot Disk" into the diskette drive.
4.
Start the radar.
5.
Follow the instructions.
6.
Set the DIP switch S1/5 of the RDC back to the normal position and restart the radar.
7.
Restore the parameters from another Display Electronics Unit of the system or from the backup
diskette. If no backup diskette or no other Display Electronics Unit is available, the parameters
(system configuration) must be entered manually by means of the System Maintenance Manager.
The parameters of the transceiver are stored in the TCU. They can be loaded from there. Check
whether these transceiver parameters make sense.
8.
Test that the radar is functioning correctly.
If the system parameters cannot be stored, even although the system software has recently been
installed, the RDC must be exchanged.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
187
Technical Manual
8.4 Opening the Housings
8.4
Opening the Housings
8.4.1
Display Electronics Unit Housing

The cover of the Display Electronics Unit is fixed with 4 screws. Remove the screws to open the housing.
8.4.2
Interconnection Box
Depending on the version, the Interconnection Box is mounted under the Display Electronics Unit (see
Figure 2-3 on page 22) or as a single bulkhead housing. To open the bulkhead version, remove the
screws in the cover. To gain access to the Interconnection Box when it is mounted under the Display
Electronics Unit, the Display Electronics Unit must be removed. To do this, unscrew (but do not remove)
the 4 screws in the flange of the Display Electronics Unit, lift it about 10 mm and remove it. The cables
do not have to be disconnected.
8.4.3
Console Housing
For service purposes, the console housings can
be opened at the base region.
To remove the cover in the base region, two locks
(1) must be released. A special key is necessary
for the locks.
The cover can be carefully pulled at the relief at
its upper side (1). Then it must be lifted out of its
mounting hole in the base (2).
ztr1_009.gif
ztr1_087.jpg
8.4.4
Fig. 8-1
Locks
Opening the console
SCC C4 Console
The procedure at the SCC C4 console is similar to the procedure at the console housing described
above.
188
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.4 Opening the Housings
8.4.5
Desktop Housing, Monitor, Operating Unit
8.4.6
Operating Unit
The Operating Unit is mounted in the
same way at the console or desktop
versions (not valid for SCC C4
console).
ztr1_123.jpg
To gain access to the Operating Units

interior, 4 screws below the Operating
Unit must be removed to unmount the
complete Operating Unit. The cable
length is sufficient to turn the Operating
Unit without disconnection.
ztr1_023.jpg
The lower shell of the Operating Unit is

fixed by means of two screws which
must be removed to unmount the shell.
If the shell has been removed, the
Keyboard Controller can be removed
or configured. If the keyboards shall be
removed, the metal frame must be
unmounted.
Fig. 8-2
8.4.7
Opening the Operating Unit
Monitor
Removing the Monitor
Screws
Fig. 8-3
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_030.jpg
ztr1_029.jpg
To gain access to the monitor, the front frame must be unmounted. It is fixed by means of four hexagon
socket screws, two on top of the monitor, two under the monitor.
Unmounting the front frame
189
Technical Manual
8.5 Fuses
The screws at the underside must be untightened only. It is not necessary to remove them. When the
screws on top of the monitor have been removed, the frame can carefully be pulled from the housing.
The operating panel of the monitor is fixed at the frame by means of four nuts. It is possible to disconnect
the cable at the panel.
......
The monitor is fixed by means of screws

around the screen which are visible when
the front frame has been removed. The
number of screws depends of the type
(size) of monitor. To unmount the monitor,
all screws must be removed. Then the
monitor can be pulled carefully out of the
housing.
ztr1_031.jpg
......
Fig. 8-4
Unmounting the monitor
Checking the Cable Connections

The monitor and the Operating Unit are mounted onto the base part of the housing. Behind the monitor,
the base part of the housing has a hood. The hood is fixed by means of screws on the left and on the
right.
8.5
Fuses
See Section 8.8 on page 197 for the order numbers of the spare parts.
Interconnection Box (GE3044G216)
No.
Rating
F1
6.3 A slow blow
F2
6.3 A slow blow
F3
4 A slow blow
F4
0.1 A slow blow
F5
1 A slow blow
Analog Interface (GE3044G207)
190
No.
Rating
F1
0.5 A slow blow
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.6 Exchange of Parts and Testing
COM Expander (GE3044G210)

No.
Rating
F1
2.0 A slow blow
8.6
Exchange of Parts and Testing
8.6.1
Exchange of the Main Processor

The main processor is a standard PC Processor. It is plugged in a socket and can be removed without
any tools after the fan has been removed. Different types of processors are in use, due to technical
progress. For the exchange of the fan, see Section 8.6.14.2 on page 196.
NOTE:
At present, spare parts are delivered as a kit consisting of the main processor, the motherboard, the fan
and the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.
8.6.2
Exchange of the Motherboard

The procedure for exchanging the motherboard depends on the version. Switch off the radar, open the
housing of the Display Electronics Unit and disconnect all cables on the motherboard and on the pcbs in
the slots. Remove the slot screws of all pcbs and disconnect them (note the position - they must be
connected in the same slots of the new motherboard again or, if the replacement motherboard is of a
different type, in the slots which are described in Section 4.5.3.2 on page 50). Remove the screws with
which the motherboard is fixed in the housing. Replace the motherboard and wind in the screws without
tightening them. Insert the extension pcbs into their slots and fasten the slot screws. Now tighten the
screws of the motherboard to fix it in the position which has been given by the installed extension pcbs.
For the exchange of the main processor, see Section 8.6.1. For the exchange of the fan, see Section
8.6.14.2 on page 196.
If the motherboard has been exchanged, the correct BIOS settings must be set in accordance with
Section 5.14 on page 153 (if the motherboard is equipped with a soft power switch, this must be disabled
by the BIOS settings before the system can be started).
NOTE:
Some of the motherboards are equipped with an on-board sound option. In this case, the covers must be
removed from the openings for the sound connectors in the electronics units housing.
WARNING
Do not modify the jumper settings of the motherboard. The
jumpers are set ex works.
NOTE:
and, depending on the spare part kit, the memory modules.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
191

Technical Manual
8.6.3
Exchange of the Memory Modules

The memory modules are standard PC modules (DIMM). The radars needs at least 256 MB memory. The
number of modules needed depends on the module capacity. To avoid incompatibilities, it is strongly
recommended that only spare parts from SAM Electronics are used.
8.6.4
Exchange of the CMOS Backup Battery

The lifetime of the battery depends on the use of the Display Electronics Unit. The shelf life of the battery
itself is about 10 years. If the battery is mounted in a radar which is permanently or often in operation,
the life will be about 5...7 years. In radars that are used rarely, the life may be even shorter.
When the CMOS backup battery is changed, the BIOS settings are lost and the settings must be reentered by means of an additional ASCII keyboard.
To exchange the battery, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and
remove the pcbs which are positioned above the backup battery (each pcb is fixed by means of a screw).
The battery is fixed by means of a clamp. The clamp can be bent to exchange the battery. Insert the new
battery with inscription facing up.
Plug in and fix the pcbs in the same slots as before, close the housing and continue with the setting of
the BIOS parameters.
The BIOS settings must be performed as described from Section 5.14 on page 153 on.
8.6.5
Exchange of Graphics and Video Processor (GVP GE3044G213)

To change the GVP, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics Unit and remove
the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Replace the GVP and fix the new one with the screw.
Further hardware or software settings are not necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs is varies, so that the
pressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and an
installation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.
8.6.6
Exchange of Ethernet Module

To change the Ethernet network module, switch off the radar, open the housing of the Display Electronics
Unit and remove the fastening screw which fixes the pcb in the slot. Disconnect the T-connector, replace
the network module and fix the new one with the screw. Further hardware or software settings are not
necessary. The radar can be put into operation.
If the Ethernet module is part of a CHARTRADAR 1100 and has been exchanged, the licensing
must be renewed, because the CHARTRADAR Identification Code has changed.
Different versions of the pcb may be delivered as spare parts. The size of the pcbs varies, so that the
pressure pad at the housing cover may be too long or too short. A kit with suitable pressure pads and an
installation note are fixed inside the housing. See that note for further information.
192
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.6.7
Exchange of Radar Data Converter (RDC)

The RDC contains the adjustment values for the video signals. The values cannot be saved and the
adjustments must be repeated after the exchange.
To exchange the RDC, open the Display Electronics Unit.
1.
Disconnect all cables from the pcb.
2.
Unscrew the fastening screw of the RDC and pull the RDC carefully out of its slot.
3.
Set the jumpers and DIP switches of the new RDC to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4.
Push the new RDC into the socket and fix it by means of the fastening screw. Connect the cables.
5.
Check the software version of the component by means of the menu Telemonitoring Data >
Versions of the System Maintenance Manager. The software version of the component must be
compatible with the software versions of all other components. If this is not the case, a pcb software
update must be performed as described in Section 5.12.1.6 on page 144. For further information
about the software versions, see the "Software Change Notes" and "Technotes" (also available via
the Internet).
6.
Test whether the radar is functioning correctly.
7.
Adjust the video signal amplitudes and offsets as described in Section 5.12.1 on page 140.
8.6.8
Exchange of the IDE Memory Module

The IDE memory module contains all parameters and the system software (operating system and radar
application software) of the system. In a MULTIPILOT, the operating system and the MULTIPILOT application software are stored on the hard-disk. The same set of parameters is also stored on the hard-disk
of the MULTIPILOT. Some parameters (transceiver parameters) are also stored in the TCU, and a
backup diskette with all parameters should exist. If it is not certain that the parameters stored on the
diskettes are current, it is advisable to make a backup (if possible). The parameters can be transferred
from one Display Electronics Unit to all other Display Electronics Units (Config Transfer function). If it is
certain that another Display Electronics Unit of the system has the same (and complete) set of parameters for all units, they can be transferred to the Display Electronics Unit whose IDE memory module has
been exchanged.
To exchange the module, open the Display Electronics Unit.
1.
Disconnect the modules power supply cable.
2.
Replace the module and connect the new one to the power supply. The power supply cable may be
different if another type of module is used, so that it must be exchanged, too.
3.
The new module contains a default set of system parameters, an operating system and a radar
application software. Check whether the module has been programmed with the current system software by means of the System Maintenance Manager (see Section 5.10.2 on page 111). If necessary, perform a software update.
4.
Restore the parameters by means of the Config Transfer function (see Section 5.13), performed on
another Display Electronics Unit or from the backup diskette (some transceiver parameters can also
be restored from the TCU). If the Config Transfer function or a backup diskette is not available, the
system must be parameterized manually. See Section 6 from page 157 on for further information.
5.
Check the system configuration and test whether the radar is functioning correctly.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
193
8.6.9
Technical Manual
Exchange of the Analog Interface

To exchange the Analog Interface, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
WARNING
If a synchro or a stepper is connected to the Analog Interface,
dangerous voltages might be present, even although all supplies to the
radar system are switched off. Short circuiting of the gyro will damage
the gyro output.
1.
Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the Analog Interface.
2.
The Analog Interface is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
3.
Set the jumpers on the new Analog Interface pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
4.
Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
5.
Switch on the power to the radar.
6.
internet).
7.
The Analog Interface contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the
RDC and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are automatically sent from the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface.
8.6.10
Exchange of the COM Expander

To exchange the COM Expander, open the Interconnection Box. Switch off the radar and disconnect it
from the mains.
194
1.
Mark the cables with the terminal numbers before disconnecting them. Disconnect all cables and
connectors from the COM Expander.
2.
Remove all plug-in adapter pcbs from the defective pcb and connect them to the corresponding slot
of the spare part.
3.
The COM Expander is fixed with 4 screws. Unscrew these screws and remove the pcb.
4.
Set the jumpers on the new COM Expander pcb to the same positions as on the defective pcb.
5.
Fix the new pcb by means of the screws and connect all cables.
6.
Switch on the power to the radar.
7.
internet).
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.
8.6.11
The COM Expander contains a number of parameters. These parameters are also stored in the RDC
and on the hard-disk of the MULTIPILOT. When the radar is started, the parameters are sent from
the hard-disk or the RDC to the Analog Interface automatically.
Exchange of the Diskette Drive

To exchange the diskette drive, the drive unit must
be removed as described in Section 5.1 from page
86 on.
ztr1_200.jpg
For the correct connection of the data cable at the

diskette drive, see Figure 8-5.
Fig. 8-5
8.6.12
Connection of the data cable at the diskette

drive
Exchange of the Electronics Units Power Supply

To exchange the power supply, switch off the radar, disconnect the mains supply cable and open the
1.
Disconnect all supply cables (power supply output).
2.
The power supply unit is mounted by means of 4 screws. Two of them must be removed at the rear
(outside) of the electronics unit housing; the other two screws must be removed inside the housing.
3.
Fix the new power supply by means of the screws and connect the supply cables.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
195
Technical Manual
8.6.13
Exchange of Filter Pads

The filter pad of the Display Electronics Units
housing must be changed or washed with a mild
detergent every 3 months. If the Display Electronics
Unit is installed in a dusty environment, the replacement or cleaning must be done more often.
The filter pad can be exchanged without tools. It is
trapped under the metal cover of the Display Electronics Units fan outlet. Remove it at the cover
corner which is not fixed by a screw.
The part number of the filter pad is:
GE3044T030, order No. 2175640.
ztr1_062.jpg
Washed filter pads must be allowed to dry

completely.
Location of the filter pad
8.6.14
Exchange of Fans
8.6.14.1
Exchange of the Fan of the Display Electronics Unit Housing
To remove the fan, open the cover of the housing. Disconnect the fan and unscrew the four nuts on the
housing of the fan. Exchange the fan and fix the new one with the four nuts. Connect the fan to the supply
and close the housing of the Display Electronics Unit. It is advisable to check the filter pad (see Section
8.6.13) on this occasion.
8.6.14.2
Exchange of the Processor Fan
If the fan of the main processor of the motherboard is defective, it is possible that the main processor
itself is damaged, too. The function of the main processor should be tested. Depending on the type of
processor, the lifetime of this component can be reduced drastically or destroyed within a few minutes if
it is allowed to run without a fan.
The method of exchanging the fan depends on the main processor type. Usually, the fan is fixed with
metal clamps which can be opened carefully by means of a small screwdriver. The fan must be
connected to a 3-pole connector on the motherboard next to the processor socket. This connector is
marked by a printed label on the motherboard pcb.
NOTE:
and the memory modules; see the Section S p a r e P a r t s on page 197.
196
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
8.7
8.7 Maintenance
Maintenance
Maintenance Schedule
The maintenance of the radar is limited to the following tasks:
Work
Interval
Remarks
Exchanging or cleaning the filter

pad of the Display Electronics
Unit
Every 3 months, depending on

the dustiness of the environment; operators maintenance
work
Nevertheless, it makes sense to check the

pad whenever maintenance or repair work
has to be done.
Checking the housing fan and the

CPU fan of the electronics unit
Whenever maintenance or
repair work has been done
Exchanging the CMOS backup

battery
Every 5 years.
See the hints in Section 8.6.4 on page

192.
It is not necessary to exchange the gear lubricant oil.
8.8
Spare Parts
8.8.1
Spare Part Concept

Most of the components in the Display Electronics Unit are parts which cannot be serviced. In the case
of a defect, the complete part must be exchanged.
8.8.2
Spare Parts List

Some of the components of the Display Electronics Unit in particular will be modified at short intervals,
so that it is likely that it will not be possible to deliver spare parts which are absolutely identical to the
original part. In such cases, a Technote for the exchange is delivered with the spare part and new
versions of components are added to this manual as soon as possible.
Electronics Unit GE3066/GE3064/GE3065
Part
Order No.
Motherboard with 1000 MHz Main Processor, Fan and Memory Module (Motherboard DFI
CA64-TN) (GE3044G066)
300006104
ATX Power Supply (FSP300-60FPN)
300004624
Fan (3412N for Electronics Unit Housing)
5035335
Filter pad (GE3044T030, 110x110 mm) for Electronics Unit
2175640
Ethernet Module with Y-plug (LCS-8034TB)
300006169
Graphics and Video Processor (GVP) pcb (GE3044G213)
300006090
RDC pcb (GE3044G219)
300005324
Set of Cables GE3044 (GE3062G005)
390001276
DVD-ROM drive (CD-ROM drive), MULTIPILOT only
390001331
Hard Disk Drive (40 GByte)
390000261
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
197
8.8 Spare Parts

Technical Manual
Part
Order No.
Connector (female, supplying Operating Unit / Diskette Drive, T3303100)
5321296
CMOS backup battery CR2032
271126851
IDE Module with software (GE3062G001)
390002052
Interconnection Box VS3034

Part
Order No.
Interconnection Board (GE3044G216)
300005044
Fuse Kit (VS3034G005)
390001271
Fuse, Analog Interface, F1, 0.5 A, slow blow
5070558
Fuses, Interconnection Board

F1, 6.3 A, slow blow
5071038
5071038
5073585
5070551
5070561
COM Expander (GE3044G210)
300004738
Analog Interface pcb (Gyro/Log Interface, GE3044G207)
2571304
Analog Interface Kit (GE3044G059, Log/Gyro Interface)
2576100
RGB Buffer Kit (GE3044G062)
390000923
Plug-in pcb TTL (GE3044G211)
300004562
Plug-in pcb 20 mA current loop (TTY) (GE3044G212)
300004561
Plug-in pcb RS232 (GE3044G214)
300004560
Plug-in pcb RS422/RS485 (GE3044G218)
300004559
Modification Kit for Plug-in Adapter pcbs (VS3034G005)
390002198
Operating Unit BD3027

Part
Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01)
5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00)
5930872
Radar Keyboard (0822/01)
5933833
TRACKPILOT Keyboard (0832/01)
5933831
Keyboard Controller GE3048G200
300004763
Fuse for GE3048G200, F1, 2.0 A, slow blow (SMD, 0454 002)
300005060
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit
2776186
Trackball BD3028
198
Part
Order No.
Trackball Unit (0821/01)
5933832
EMC Cover (0821/01-07-00)
5930872
Diskette Drive Kit (AZ 3053 G 001) for Operating Unit
2776186
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
Technical Manual
8.8 Spare Parts
Interswitch (PCI)
8.8.3
Part
Order No.
Processor Controlled Interswitch Board

(PCI, NG3013G205)
1894740
Spare Parts for Monitors

The spare parts lists for the monitors are contained in the monitor service manuals.
If a monitor is not intended for service/repair, a separate technical manual is not available for this monitor.
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
199
8.8 Spare Parts
200

Technical Manual
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e08.fm / 06.09.05
9 Technical Data

Technical Manual
9.1 Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions
Technical Data
9.1
Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions

The Gearboxes and Scanners comply with DIN EN 60945 (Maritime navigation and radiocommunication
equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results).
The system of protection required for the Gearbox by DIN EN 60945 is not valid for internal parts of the
Gearbox.
All components, except of the Scanner and the Gearbox (in Version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the category "protected from the weather".
The Scanner and the Gearbox (in version A including the Transceiver Electronics Unit) belong to the
category "exposed to the weather".
9.2
Performance
9.2.1
Performance Data of the Radar Data Converter (RDC) GE3044G219
General Characteristics
-
CMOS RAM with 32 kB

4 serial interfaces RS422
4 alarm outputs, 2 alarm inputs
2 CAN bus interfaces for Radar Bus and Nav Bus
Characteristics of the Radar Video Processing

-
Possible RPM of the antenna:

Max. ships speed:
Max. ships rate of turn:
Pulse length:
Azimuth resolution:
Transformation:
Max. PRF for receiving:
Max. PRF for processing:
Ranges:
Off-centre range:
X/Y memory:
DSP clock frequency:
Video transmission to GVP:
23 RPM, 28 RPM, 46 RPM, 56 RPM

70 kt
1200/min
variable from 80 to 1000 ns
1024 sweeps/circle = 0.35
1024 sweeps/360
4 kHz
2 kHz
0.25 / 0.5 / 0.75 / 1.5 / 3 / 6 / 12 / 24 / 48 / 96 NM and
additionally two metric ranges with 250 / 500 m
max. 75%
1024x1024x8 bit
50 Mhz
15 Hz or higher
Characteristic of the ARPA Functionality

Tracks
-
Maximum number of targets:

Range:
Max. speed (HSC, IEC 80/149 (936-2) D.1):
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
50
20 NM
true 70 kt
201
9 Technical Data
Technical Manual
9.2 Performance
Manual
-
target acquisition
Min. distance:
Max. distance:
Time until track stable:
Time until course and speed stable:
Automatic target acquisition:

Min. distance:
Max. distance:
Number of target acquisition rings:
Number of target acquisition sectors:
0.5 NM
20 NM
2
2
Maximum own ships speed:
70 kt
9.2.2
Performance Data of the Graphics and Video Processor GE3044G213

-
9.2.3
Resolution:
Vertical refresh rate:
Color depth:
Bus frequency:
at least 1024 x 768 and 1280 x 1024 pixels

at least 70 Hz in all resolutions
at least 256 colours
compatible with 100 MHz bus
Performance Data of the Analog Interface

-
9.2.4
Microcontroller Siemens SAB 80C167CR with the following specifications:

2 kB internal RAM
2 kB XRAM
56 interrupt sources with 16 possible priority levels and separate interrupt vectors
16 A/D converters
9 timers (16 bit)
2 serial interfaces
Programmable watchdog timer
Bootstrap loader
CAN controller
Data memory 128 k x 8 bit RAM
Parameter memory 256 k x 6 bit EEPROM
Program memory 128 k x 8 bit flash-ROM
AIS interface (RS422) (Rev.03)
Performance Data of the RGB Buffer GE3044G222 (optional)

-
Maximum resolution:
Maximum vertical refresh rate:
Maximum horizontal rate:
Pixel clock:
1280 x 1024 pixels

75 Hz
80 kHz
135 MHz
Current consumption of the RGB Buffer board:
202
0.01 NM
20 NM
about 10 turns
about 15 turns
about 190 mA
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9 Technical Data

Technical Manual
9.2.5
9.2 Performance
Performance Data of the Electronics Units Power Supply

The power supply units conform to the ATX specification.
-
Mains voltage:
115 V / 230 V (switchable or automatic full range)
FSP300-60PFN:
-
Max. mains consumption:

Output power:
Output voltages/currents:
Voltage
Current
+3.3 V
28.0 A
+5 V
30.0 A
+12 V
15.0 A
-12 V
0.8 A
-5 V
0.3 A
+5 V stand-by
2.0 A
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
115 V/10 A, 230 V/5 A, 50...60 Hz

300 W
203
9 Technical Data
Technical Manual
9.3 External Interfaces
9.3
External Interfaces
The Antenna Unit and the Transceiver have no external interfaces. The interfaces of the Display Electronics Unit are described in Section 4.5.9. For the IEC 61162 interfaces, see the corresponding service
manual.
9.3.1
Analog Interface
The interfaces for the analog gyro (AC gyro or DC stepper) and the pulse log can be parameterized for
different systems. For further information about the Analog Interface, see Section 4.5.10.
The gyro interface is equipped with a status input ST1, which can be used as an external error input. If
no signal is measured at the status input, no error is recognized.
9.3.1.1
Analog Gyro
Input voltage ranges:

Bearing resolution:
Sensor type:
Reference frequency:
9.3.1.2
<35 V or >35 V (set by parameterization)

1/6 (typical) or 1/3
AC, DC
50 Hz, 60 Hz
Pulse Log
Number of axes:
Number of pulses per NM:
Inversion of the following signals is possible:
1 (X-axis) or 2 (X-, Y-axis)

125, 200
BT, WT, XPM, YPM, VX, VY
The pulse log interface has the following additional status inputs:
9.3.2
Input
Function
XPM
X-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
voltage can be configured in the service menus.
YPM
Y-axis, speed direction. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external
voltage can be configured in the service menus.
BT
Bottom track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can
be configured in the service menus.
WT
Water track. For zero potential contacts. Polarity and internal (20 mA) / external voltage can be
configured in the service menus.
ST2
External input for log error. Can be configured for zero potential contact or 20 mA optocoupler
input by jumper settings. See Section 4.5.10.
COM Expander
4 serial interfaces which can be converted individually by means of plug-in adapter pcbs to RS232/
RS422/RS485/TTL/TTY.
204
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
9 Technical Data

Technical Manual
9.4 Power Supply
9.4
Power Supply
9.4.1

The mains supply required for the monitor depends on the type of monitor. See the monitor service
manual. The keyboards are supplied with power by the Display Electronics Unit. The maximum power
consumption of the power supply of the Display Electronics Unit is about 115 V / 7.4 A or 230 V / 4 A. The
ATX power supply unit has a maximum power output of 350 W.
9.4.1.1
Operating Unit
The Operating Unit must be supplied with power via the PS/2 connector and the keyboard illumination
must be supplied with power via an additional cable from the Display Electronics Unit.
The voltage supply is:
5 V DC 10%
The following currents have been measured:

-
9.5
All LEDs at max. brightness

Without background illumination,
status display at max. brightness
Without background illumination
and status display
490 mA
110 mA
50 mA
Dimensions and Weights

For dimensions and weights, see the technical drawings. The drawings are shown in Section 13.
9.6
Compass Safe Distances
Standard
compass
Steering compass
Standard
compass reduced
Steering compass
reduced
BD3028 Trackball
2.50 m
1.30 m
Desktop Unit
19", AZ3068
2.25 m
1.10 m
1.35 m
0.70 m
Desktop Unit
23.1", AZ3063
2.50 m
1.50 m
1.50 m
0.90 m
GE3062, GE3064,
GE3065 Electronics
Unit
0.45 m
0.30 m
0.30 m
0.30 m
Interconnection Box
0.50 m
0.40 m
0.30 m
0.30 m
GE3041
Interswitch
1.50 m
0.90 m
0.90 m
0.55 m
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
205
9 Technical Data
9.6 Compass Safe Distances
206

Technical Manual
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e09.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
10
System Faults
10.1
System Fault Messages
10.1 System Fault Messages
The following system faults are indicated by means of texts but not by means of codes.
10.2
Error
Description
CONFIG TP SPECIAL DIFFER

(additional acoustic signal)
The "Special Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP SYSTEM DIFFER

The "System Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
CONFIG TP USER DIFFER

The "User Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond

with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured correctly.
CONFIG TP INTERFACE DIFFER

The "Interface Basic Setup" parameters saved in this Indicator do

not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT.
The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be configured
correctly.
CONFIG TP ADVANCED DIFFER

The "Advanced Parameters" saved in this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
CONFIG TP RUDDER 1&2 DIFFER

The "Rudder 1&2 or Azimuth Thruster 1&2" parameters saved in

this Indicator do not correspond with the parameters saved in the
TRACKPILOT. The TRACKPILOT electronics unit might not be
configured correctly.
CONFIG EI PARAM. DIFFER

The Engine Interface parameters saved in this Indicator do not

correspond with the parameters saved in the TRACKPILOT. The
NEW INDICATOR CONFIG FILE
A new set of parameters has been transmitted to the Indicator

from a second Indicator. The message cannot be acknowledged.
It disappears when the Indicator has been restarted and therefore
the new set of parameters is in use.
INTERSWITCH ADJUST
The Interswitch (PCI) is switched to service mode.
INDICATOR SERVICE SWITCH
The Indicator of this radar is switched to service mode (hardware

switch). Programming of parameters and system configuration is
possible.
AIS Faults
If a UAIS DEBEG 3400 electronics unit is connected, see the technical manual of the AIS electronics unit
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
207
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
10.3 System Fault Code List
10.3
System Fault Code List

The system fault codes are constantly under development. This list will be updated as often as possible.
The list also contains the fault codes for the Transceiver Electronics Unit.
Abbreviations:
General:
CRC
DMA
EOT
LEC
NAK
NMEA
208
Cyclic Redundancy Check

Direct Memory Access
End Of Text
Last Error Code
Negative Acknowledge
National Marine Electronics Association
(standard for interfacing marine electronic
devices)
PCB
PROM
QUEUE
ROT
SIO
WIND
Printed Circuit Board

Programmable Read-Only Memory
Kind of FIFO Memory
Rate-Of-Turn Sensor
Serial Input Output (Serial COMM Port)
Devices:
AIS
AIS system, see AIS manuals
NAVBUS
ARPA
Automatic Radar Plotting Aid (RDC)
PCI
CFG
FSYS
GYRO
LAN
MDB
MON
MSI
Configuration
File System
Non NMEA serial gyro systems
LAN Network
Track Data Base
Monitor
Analog Interface (Gyro/Log I/F) PCB
RDC
RKE
SI9600
SP
TP
TRM
CAN1 Bus
Interswitch (Processor Controlled Interswitch)
Ships Interface
SPEEDPILOT
TRACKPILOT
Transceiver (CUT/TCU)
GYRO
IND
Gyro
Radar Indicator (Display Electronic Unit)
Wind Sensor
Subdevices:
ADC
Analog/Digital Converter
BITE
Built-In Test Equipment
CAN-KBC (Remote Keyboard Electronics
CAN_KB
CAN-Bus)
CAN0
Radar Bus
CAN1
Navigation Bus
COMM
Communication (generic)
CONFIG
Configuration (System Configuration)
Conrac
Monitor Manufacturer
CPOOL
Memory Pool
DEPTH
Depth Sensor
DOLOG
DOLOG Sensor
DPM
Dual-Ported Memory
DRIVER
Device Driver
DRV
Driver
IVSC
Part of RDC PCB
LOG
MC
MPS
POS
PROM
PS/2
QUEUE
RAM
ROM
ROT
SIO
DSP
Digital Signal Processor
SYSTEM
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable PROM
UART
Log Sensor
Microcontroller
Map Planning Station (Planning System)
Position Sensor
Programmable Read-Only Memory
PS/2 interface
Queue System
Random Access Memory
Read Only Memory
Rate of Turn
Serial Input/Output
Internal system resources (e.g. CPU
timer)
UART
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
System Faults:
Error
00131
00132
00133
00134
00135
00136
00137
00138
00139
Device
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
FSYS
Subdevice Info
Root filesystem checksum error
File system error 2
File system error 3
File system error 4
File system error 5
File system error 6
File system error 7
File system error 8
File system error 9
00141
00142
00143
CFG
CFG
CFG
CONFIG
CONFIG
CONFIG
configuration file R10k.sam corrupt

configuration file R10k.sam was corrupt
bad chart function license key
00501
00502
00503
00504
00505
00506
00507
00508
00509
00511
00512
00513
00521
00522
00523
00524
00531
00532
00533
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
RSC1
DRIVER
DRIVER
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
DSP1
DSP1
DSP1
DSP2
DSP2
DSP2
DSP2
IVSC
IVSC
IVSC
device not found

video DMA timeout
timeout error
timeout warning
receive pool empty
send pool empty
received unmatched message type
received unexpected message
reset timeout error
startup BITE failure
PCI-Bus overrun
PCI-DMA failure
startup BITE failure
sweep DMA overrun
antenna azimuth step overflow
sweep read timeout
TVA sync start error
TVA antenna azimuth data error
control fault
00601
00602
00603
00604
00605
00606
MON1
MON1
MON1
MON1
MON1
MON1
Ser1
Ser1
Ser1
Ser1
Ser1
Ser1
NAK received
EOT not found
checksum error
invalid telegram
invalid command
timeout, or monitor switched off
01101
01102
01103
01104
01105
01106
01107
01108
01111
01112
01113
01115
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
receive pool empty

receive FIFO full
receive buffer insufficient
send pool empty
send FIFO full
send buffer insufficient
illegal interrupt
unexpected transmit interrupt
binary: lost block
binary: lost bytes
binary: checksum error
gyro: lost bytes
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Recommended Action
209
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
210
Error
01117
01121
01122
01123
Device
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
Subdevice
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
Info
STXETX: lost bytes
chip: overrun error
chip: parity error
chip: framing error
01201
01202
01203
01204
01205
01206
01207
01208
01211
01212
01213
01215
01217
01221
01222
01223
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
receive pool empty

receive FIFO full
send pool empty
send FIFO full
illegal interrupt
binary: lost block
binary: lost bytes
gyro: lost bytes
STXETX: lost bytes
chip: overrun error
chip: parity error
chip: framing error
01301
01302
01303
01304
01305
01306
01307
01308
01311
01312
01313
01315
01317
01321
01322
01323
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
receive pool empty

receive FIFO full
send pool empty
send FIFO full
illegal interrupt
binary: lost block
binary: lost bytes
gyro: lost bytes
STXETX: lost bytes
chip: overrun error
chip: parity error
chip: framing error
01401
01402
01403
01404
01405
01406
01407
01408
01411
01412
01413
01415
01417
01421
01422
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
receive pool empty

receive FIFO full
send pool empty
send FIFO full
illegal interrupt
binary: lost block
binary: lost bytes
gyro: lost bytes
STXETX: lost bytes
chip: overrun error
chip: parity error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
01423
Device
RDC1
Subdevice Info
SIO4
chip: framing error
01501
01502
01503
01504
01505
01506
01507
01508
01511
01512
01513
01514
01515
01516
01517
01521
01522
01523
01524
01525
01526
01527
01528
01529
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
initialization error
receive pool empty
receive FIFO full
send pool empty
send FIFO full
lost message
message checksum error
lost frame
illegal frame type
transmit request hang
ghost interrupt
receive overrun
chip: warning
chip: bus off
chip: LEC: no error
chip: LEC: stuff error
chip: LEC: form error
chip: LEC: acknowledge error
chip: LEC: bit 1 error
chip: LEC: CRC error
01601
01602
01603
01604
01605
01606
01607
01608
01611
01612
01613
01614
01615
01616
01617
01621
01622
01623
01624
01625
01626
01627
01628
01629
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
initialization error
receive pool empty
receive FIFO full
send pool empty
send FIFO full
lost message
message checksum error
lost frame
illegal frame type
transmit request hang
ghost interrupt
receive overrun
chip: warning
chip: bus off
chip: LEC: no error
chip: LEC: form error
01801
01802
LAN1
LAN1
DRV
DRV
send fifo full (generic)

send fifo full (AIS)
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Recommended Action
211
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
212
Error
01810
01811
01820
01821
Device
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
LAN1
Subdevice
DRV
DRV
DRV
DRV
01851
01860
01870
PIXMAP DRV
PIXMAP DRV
PIXMAP DRV
send fifo full

send error
receive error
01901
01902
MDB
MDB
system track read error

track catalog read error
02011
02012
02013
02014
02015
02021
02022
02100
02124
02125
02130
02131
02132
02133
02134
02135
02136
02137
02138
02139
02140
02141
02142
02143
02144
02145
02146
02147
02148
02149
02150
02151
02152
02153
02154
02155
02156
02157
02158
02159
02160
02161
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
CONFIG
CONFIG
SYSTEM
RAM
ROM
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
Info
send error (generic)
send error (AIS)
receive error (generic)
receive error (AIS)
Recommended Action
checkword timeout
checkword error
protocol failure
receive failure
send failure
X/S-Band mismatch
generation mismatch (R9600/R1000)
clock failure
error
error
invalid message type
setup data 1 incomplete
invalid sector count value
transmit data timeout
invalid frequency deviation
reset handling error
plausibility check failed
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
02162
02163
02164
02165
02166
02167
02168
02169
02170
02171
02172
02173
02174
02175
02176
02177
02178
02179
02180
02181
02182
02183
02184
02185
02186
02187
02188
02189
02190
02191
02192
02193
02194
02195
02196
02197
02198
02199
02200
02201
02202
02203
02204
02205
02206
02207
02208
02209
02210
02211
02212
02213
02214
02215
Device
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
Info
setup data absent
setup data absent
setup data absent
setup data absent
setup data absent
checkword error
checkword error
checkword error
checkword error
checkword error
checkword timeout
checkword timeout
checkword timeout
checkword timeout
checkword timeout
invalid transmit data
invalid mode request
invalid indicator number
invalid PM parameter
invalid PM video (PMV) threshold
setup data 2 absent
setup data 2 absent
setup data 2 absent
setup data 2 absent
setup data 2 absent
invalid SEA (STC) curve
Recommended Action
213
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
214
Error
02216
02217
02218
02219
02220
02221
02222
02223
02224
02270
02271
02272
02274
02275
02276
02277
02278
02279
Device
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
02280
TRM
02281
02300
02301
02302
02303
02304
02305
02310
02311
02312
02313
02314
02315
02316
02317
02318
02319
02320
02321
02322
02405
02406
02407
02410
02411
02412
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
Subdevice
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
ADC
ADC
Info
invalid potentiometer curve
interrupt tune
interrupt auto SEA (STC)
invalid pulse per revolution count
invalid transceiver number
no antenna rotation
no external trigger
external trigger exceeds minimum
external trigger exceeds maximum
magnetron current failure
magnetron fatal error
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
BITE
BITE
BITE
BITE
DPM
DPM
Recommended Action
- Check F1 on the Power Supply

Unit NG3028G202
- Check the correct functioning of
the HV supply switch in the
transceiver housing/Gearbox.
- Exchange the Pulse Generator
NG3028G203 or NG3028G206
- Exchange Magnetron
- Exchange TCU NG3028G201
- Exchange Power Supply
NG3028G 202
- Exchange Mains Transformer
NG3028G007 X-Band or
NG3029G007 (S-Band)
no trigger
checkword timeout
checkword error
invalid CAN object number
send overrun (in progress)
send overrun (in queue)
unknown error
invalid parameter
invalid write max value
standard: checksum error
standard: invalid block count
chip: reset hang
invalid interrupt
standard: lost block
short pool empty
long pool empty
chip: bus off
re-initialization error
test not available
BITE still active
BITE inactive
test not available
select error
lower RAM error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
02413
02414
02420
02500
02501
02502
02503
02504
02505
02506
02507
02508
02509
02510
02511
02512
02513
02514
02515
02516
02517
02518
02519
02520
02521
02522
02523
02524
02525
02526
Device
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
TRM
03010
03011
03012
03013
03014
03020
NAVBUS
NAVBUS
NAVBUS
NAVBUS
NAVBUS
NAVBUS
03101
03102
03103
03104
03111
03112
03113
03114
03115
03124
03125
03130
03131
03132
03133
03135
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice Info
DPM
upper RAM error
ADC
conversion error
supply voltage error
EEPROM checksum error
EEPROM write timeout
EEPROM first time initialization (new device)
SYSTEM
controller watchdog
SYSTEM
stack overflow
SYSTEM
stack underflow
SYSTEM
undefined operation
SYSTEM
protection fault
SYSTEM
illegal word access
SYSTEM
illegal instruction access
ADC
limit error: +5 V
ADC
limit error: +28 V
ADC
limit error: +15 V
ADC
limit error: -15 V
ADC
limit error: +24 V
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
no video
magnetron operation hours limit
EEPROM data compare error
try high speed antenna without option
magnetron heating voltage error
magnetron bias current error
adjust magnetron currents
Recommended Action
checkword timeout
checkword error
incompatible version
no navigation data from sensor master
fast gyro timeout
multiple sensor master
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
RAM
ROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
LOG
error (1..3)
invalid pool
invalid buffer
pool empty
error (1..4)
receive event w/o buffer
invalid queue
invalid buffer
BAB pool empty
error
error
checksum error
erase error
write hang
data error
invalid configuration
215
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
Error
03136
03137
03138
03139
03140
03141
03142
03143
03150
03151
03152
03153
03154
03155
03156
03157
03158
03159
03160
03161
03162
03163
03164
03165
03166
03167
03168
03169
03170
03171
03172
03173
03211
03212
03213
03214
03215
03216
03221
03222
03223
03224
03225
03226
03231
03232
03233
03234
03235
03236
03241
03242
03243
03244
216
Device
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
Subdevice
LOG
LOG
POS
CONFIG
CONFIG
WIND
DEPTH
CONFIG
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
ROT
GYRO
ROT
GYRO
ROT
GYRO
ROT
GYRO
ROT
GYRO
GYRO
ROT
COMPASS
COMPASS
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO1
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO2
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO3
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
SIO4
Info
VX noise
VY noise
reset missing
data changed
double source
double source
SI to SI error
sample start missing
RST phase error
phase jumping
RST oscillating
CAN id 16 timeout
serial data timeout
serial data timeout
C.Plath: serial data error
C.Plath: serial data error
C.Plath: checksum error
NMEA: serial data error
NMEA: serial data error
Anschuetz: serial data error
Anschuetz: serial data error
serial data jumping
Anschuetz: checksum error
reference error
difference error
pool initialization error
pool back
pool empty
buffer insufficient
send timeout
receive error
send error
invalid message length
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
03245
03246
03251
03252
03253
03254
03255
03256
03261
03262
03263
03264
03265
03266
03271
03272
03273
03274
03275
03276
03281
03282
03283
03284
03285
03286
03290
03291
03292
03300
03301
03302
03303
03304
03305
03310
03311
03312
03313
03314
03315
03316
03317
03318
03319
03320
03321
03330
03331
03401
03402
03403
03404
03405
Device
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
SIO4
SIO4
SIO5
SIO5
SIO5
SIO5
SIO5
SIO5
SIO6
SIO6
SIO6
SIO6
SIO6
SIO6
SIO7
SIO7
SIO7
SIO7
SIO7
SIO7
SIO8
SIO8
SIO8
SIO8
SIO8
SIO8
MPS
MPS
MPS
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
SIO1
SIO2
SIO3
SIO4
SIO5
Info
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
send timeout
receive error
send error
checkword timeout
data timeout
checkword timeout
checkword error
track checksum error
checkword timeout
checkword error
unknown error
invalid parameter
chip: reset hang
invalid interrupt
short pool empty
long pool empty
chip: bus off
pool back
pool empty
checksum error
checksum error
checksum error
checksum error
checksum error
Recommended Action
217
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
218
Error
03406
03407
03408
03410
03411
03412
03413
03498
03500
Device
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
SI9600
Subdevice
SIO6
SIO7
SIO8
DOLOG
DOLOG
DOLOG
DOLOG
BITE
Info
checksum error
checksum error
checksum error
sensor timeout
speed timeout
depth timeout
test not available
03614
03615
03616
03617
AIS
AIS
AIS
AIS
SIR10T
SIR10T
SIR10T
AIS
receive failure
send failure
SIR10T timeout
AIS timeout
03701
03702
GYRO
GYRO
03703
GYRO
03704
03705
03706
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
03707
GYRO
03708
GYRO
03709
03710
03711
03712
03713
03714
03715
03716
03717
03718
03719
03721
03722
03723
03724
03725
03726
03727
03728
03729
03730
03740
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
C.Plath: 01 - Failure of gyro power supply

C.Plath: 02 - Reset of the controller
C.Plath: 03 - Computer is in test mode or dipswitch External Synchronisation closed
C.Plath: 04 - RAM internal error
C.Plath: 05 - RAM external error
C.Plath: 06 - PROM checksum error
C.Plath: 07 - Heading error at 2 deg light
barrier
C.Plath: 08 - Heading error at 360 deg light
barrier
C.Plath: 09 - Failure of 2 deg light barrier
C.Plath: 10 - Failure of 360 deg light barrier
C.Plath: 11 - Watchdog alarm
C.Plath: 12 - Heading not synchronized
C.Plath: 13 - Reset after Power-Down-Mode
C.Plath: 14 - RAM-Power alarm
C.Plath: 15 - AD-Failure
C.Plath: sync bit error
C.Plath: message size error
C.Plath: magnetic compass
Anschuetz: second gyro differs
Anschuetz: gyro invalid
Anschuetz: gyro phase < 45 deg
Anschuetz: gyro settling phase
Anschuetz: sensor not available
Anschuetz: heading jumping
Anschuetz: high bit error
Anschuetz: system error
Anschuetz: gyro error
heading jump
03801
03802
03803
03804
03805
03806
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
RAM
ROM
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
EEPROM
error
error
chip: LEC: frame error
buffer error
protocol error
error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
03807
03808
03809
03810
03811
03812
03813
03814
03815
03816
03817
03818
03819
03820
03824
03825
03826
03827
03828
03829
03830
03831
03832
03833
03834
03835
03836
03837
03838
03839
03840
03841
03842
03843
03844
03845
03846
03847
03848
03849
03850
03851
03852
03853
03854
03855
03856
03857
03858
03859
03860
03861
03862
03863
Device
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
MC
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
LOG
LOG
LOG
AIS
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
LOG
UART1
UART1
UART1
UART1
UART2
UART2
UART2
UART2
UART3
UART3
UART3
UART3
UART4
UART4
UART4
UART4
UART5
UART5
UART5
UART5
UART6
UART6
UART6
UART6
UART7
UART7
UART7
UART7
UART8
UART8
Info
system error
RST oscillating
RST combination error
RST step size error
reference timeout
error input
error input
VX input error
VY input error
target overflow
checkword timeout
checkword error
CPOOL error
Pool bad
Buffer bad
Pool empty
Queue error
Rx ev w/o buffer
Queue bad
Buffer bad
BAB pool empty
Configuration fault
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Recommended Action
219
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
220
Error
03864
03865
03866
03867
03868
03869
03870
03871
03872
03873
03874
03875
03876
03877
03878
03879
03880
03881
03882
03883
03884
03885
03886
03887
03888
03889
03890
03891
03892
03893
03894
03895
03896
Device
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
SI1
Subdevice
UART8
UART8
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
UART1
UART2
UART3
UART4
UART5
UART6
UART7
UART8
SI
GYRO
GYRO
Info
Message length ill
Data time-out
No check
Bad check
Bad object ID
Bad transfer number
Send in progress
Send in queue
Unknown error
Bad parameters
Bad write maximum
Bad checksum
Bad block count
Receive buffer too small
Reset hang
Bad interrupt
Lost data block
Short pool empty
Long pool empty
Bus error
Send bool back
Send bool empty
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Configuration wrong
Serial gyro time out
Serial gyro tlgm error
03901
03902
03903
03904
03905
03906
03907
03908
03909
03910
03911
03912
03913
03914
03915
03916
03917
03918
03919
03920
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
RAM
ROM
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
EEPROM
MC
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
GYRO
LOG
LOG
LOG
AIS
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
error
error
chip: LEC: frame error
buffer error
protocol error
error
system error
RST oscillating
RST combination error
RST step size error
reference timeout
error input
error input
VX input error
VY input error
target overflow
checkword timeout
checkword error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
03924
03925
03926
03927
03928
03929
03930
03931
03932
03933
03934
03935
03936
03937
03938
03939
03940
03941
03942
03943
03944
03945
03946
03947
03948
03949
03950
03951
03952
03953
03954
03955
03956
03957
03958
03959
03960
03961
03962
03963
03964
03965
03966
03967
03968
03969
03970
03971
03972
03973
03974
03975
03976
03977
Device
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
CPOOL
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
QUEUE
LOG
UART1
UART1
UART1
UART1
UART2
UART2
UART2
UART2
UART3
UART3
UART3
UART3
UART4
UART4
UART4
UART4
UART5
UART5
UART5
UART5
UART6
UART6
UART6
UART6
UART7
UART7
UART7
UART7
UART8
UART8
UART8
UART8
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
Info
CPOOL error
Pool bad
Buffer bad
Pool empty
Queue error
Rx ev w/o buffer
Queue bad
Buffer bad
BAB pool empty
Configuration fault
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
Read error
Write error
Message length ill
Data time-out
No check
Bad check
Bad object ID
Bad transfer number
Send in progress
Send in queue
Unknown error
Bad parameters
Bad write maximum
Bad checksum
Bad block count
Receive buffer too small
Recommended Action
221
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
222
Error
03978
03979
03980
03981
03982
03983
03984
03985
03986
03987
03988
03989
03990
03991
03992
03993
03994
03995
03996
Device
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
SI2
Subdevice
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
CAN1
UART1
UART2
UART3
UART4
UART5
UART6
UART7
UART8
SI
GYRO
GYRO
Info
Reset hang
Bad interrupt
Lost data block
Short pool empty
Long pool empty
Bus error
Send bool back
Send bool empty
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Checksum error
Configuration wrong
Serial gyro time out
Serial gyro tlgm error
04010
04011
RDC1
RDC1
ARPA
ARPA
04020
RDC1
ARPA
04021
RDC1
ARPA
04022
RDC1
ARPA
04023
RDC1
ARPA
04100
04101
04102
04103
04104
04105
04106
04107
04108
04109
04110
04111
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
RDC1
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
ARPA
azimuth fault
video interrupt timeout
video offset low, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
video offset high, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
video gain low, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust or too much SEA(STC)
video gain high, check RDC ARPA threshold
adjust
target acquired twice
target distance small
no sweeps in video memory
sweep to sweep angle small
unexpected change of sweep to sweep angle
time per revolution small
PRF out of limits
target bearing not in video memory
target bearing disappeared in video memory
target speed out of limit
target size large
shutdown received
05011
05012
05014
05015
05100
05124
05125
05130
05131
05132
05133
05134
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
COMM
COMM
COMM
COMM
SYSTEM
RAM
ROM
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
checkword timeout
checkword error
receive error
send error
clock error
error
error
0 switch error
1 switch error
2 switch error
3 switch error
4 switch error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
05135
05136
05137
05138
05139
05140
05141
05142
05143
05144
05145
05146
05147
05148
05149
05150
05151
05152
05153
05154
05155
05156
05157
05158
05159
05160
05161
05162
05163
05164
05165
05166
05167
05168
05169
05170
05171
05172
05173
05174
05300
05301
05302
05303
05304
05305
05310
05311
05312
05313
05314
05315
05316
05317
Device
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
RELAY
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
IND1
IND2
IND3
IND4
IND5
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
Info
5 switch error
6 switch error
7 switch error
8 switch error
9 switch error
10 switch error
11 switch error
12 switch error
13 switch error
14 switch error
15 switch error
16 switch error
17 switch error
18 switch error
19 switch error
20 switch error
21 switch error
22 switch error
23 switch error
24 switch error
0 i/o error
1 i/o error
2 i/o error
3 i/o error
4 i/o error
invalid inter-switch request
target device overflow
unknown i/o device
unable to release CAN chip
unable to release relay matrix
unable to release i/o relay
checkword timeout
checkword error
unknown error
invalid parameter
chip: reset hang
invalid interrupt
Recommended Action
223
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
224
Error
05318
05319
05320
05321
05322
05405
05406
05407
05410
Device
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
PCI1
Subdevice
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
CAN0
BITE
BITE
BITE
BITE
Info
short pool empty
long pool empty
chip: bus off
re-initialization error
test not available
BITE still active
BITE inactive
test not available
06001
06002
06005
06006
06007
06101
06102
06103
06104
06111
06112
06113
06114
06115
06124
06125
06127
06128
06129
06130
06131
06132
06133
06134
06139
06140
06141
06142
06143
06150
06180
06181
06199
06201
06211
06212
06213
06214
06215
06216
06217
06219
06220
06221
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
checkword timeout
checkword error
cancel timeout
BITE timeout
no BITE response
CPOOL: error (1..3)
CPOOL: invalid pool
CPOOL: invalid buffer
CPOOL: pool empty
QUEUE: error (1..4)
QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
QUEUE: invalid queue
QUEUE: invalid buffer
QUEUE: BAB pool empty
RAM: error
ROM: error
CMOS-RAM: error
Using default paramter for TP
Paramter organization bad
Paramter general failure
Paramter protect hang
Paramter lock hang
Paramter programming timeout
Paramter verify failed
Address overflow
Parameter user & system invalid
Tp settings invalid
Parameter special invalid
Parameter tp interface invalid
Lost data (CAN curve buffer small)
Invalid TP configuration (2*TP1 or 2*TP2)
Slave system displays wrong control mode
Ghost interrupt from PIC
Serial message not send
SIO receive error
SIO send error
SIO invalid message length
SIO checkword timeout
Lost data: SYN TX buffer small
Lost data: TP-SYN buffer small
Lost data: SP-SYN buffer small
Lost data: CHL-SYN buffer small
Track checksum error
Track parameter 1 error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Error
06222
06223
06224
06225
06226
06227
06228
06229
06230
06231
06232
06233
06234
06235
06236
06238
06239
06240
06241
06242
06243
06244
06245
06246
06247
06248
06249
06250
06251
06252
06253
06255
06256
06257
06258
06259
06260
06261
06262
06263
06264
06300
06301
06302
06303
06304
06305
06310
06311
06312
06313
06314
06315
06316
10 System Faults
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
Info
Recommended Action
Track checksum error 1
Track-Data new
Track-Data changed
Track-Data not complete
Equal Waypoints or Turnpoints following
WPT synchronisation disturbed
New recalculation of navigation
Track lat/lon error
WPT-request to fast
WPT-request to slow
NAV-X/Y overflow
NAV-Xrel overflow
NAV-Yrel overflow
NAV-Delta XB overflow
NAV-Delta YB overflow
NAV-Delta XC overflow
NAV-Delta YC overflow
Track checksum error
FPU not available
FPU initialization error
FPU domain error
FPU result error
FPU test 1 error
FPU test 2 error
FPU test 3 error
FPU test 4 error
FPU test 5 error
Position timeout
Course/Speed timeout
Date/Time timeout
WPT-Track timeout
Processing timeout
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
225
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
226
Error
06317
06318
06319
06320
06321
06400
06401
06402
06403
06404
06405
06410
06411
06412
06413
06414
06415
06416
06417
06418
06419
06420
06421
06480
06481
06501
06502
06503
06504
06505
06506
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
Subdevice
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
06507
TP
NAV
06508
06509
06510
06511
06520
06521
06522
06530
06549
06551
06552
06553
06554
06555
06556
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
NAV
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
06557
TP
REG
06558
06559
06560
06561
06580
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
Info
Recommended Action
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
TpIp-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in queue)
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown check
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
CAN send nav pool empty
CAN send nav pool back
MMCI buffer does not belong to the pool
MMCI pool is empty
MMCI message queue error
MMCI pool size too small during initialization
MMCI function address is null
MMCI received event without buffer queue
MMCI interrupt without legal data in receive
area
MMCI message queue clear to send timeout
MMCI invalid message length received
MMCI illegal partition size
MMCI lost data during receive
TpReg checkword timeout
TpReg checkword error
TpReg invalid message type
TpReg BITE timeout
TpReg unknown error code
MMCI pool is empty
MMCI message queue error
MMCI error function address is null
area
MMCI message queue clear to send timeout
TpNav checkword timeout
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
10 System Faults
Error
06581
06601
06602
06603
06604
06611
06612
06613
06614
06615
06624
06625
06626
06699
06701
06710
06711
06712
06713
06714
06715
06716
06717
06718
06721
06722
06725
06726
06727
06728
06729
06730
06731
06732
06733
06738
06739
06740
06741
06742
06743
06744
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
Subdevice
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
RC:
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
06745
TP
REG
06746
06747
06748
06749
06750
06800
06801
06802
06803
06804
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Info
Recommended Action
TpNav checkword error
CPOOL error (1..3)
CPOOL invalid pool
CPOOL invalid buffer
CPOOL pool empty
QUEUE error (1..4)
QUEUE receive event w/o buffer
QUEUE invalid queue
QUEUE invalid buffer
QUEUE BAB pool empty
RAM error
ROM error
Missing EEPROM and CMOS data
Ghost interrupt
Message to IP not send
IP receive timeout
IP receive error
IP send error
IP invalid message length received
IP checkword timeout
IP checkword error
IP data not complete
IP unknown error code
IP control mode not available
RC ROM error
RC RAM error
RC status fault A/D-converter
RC error test signal T1 (AN.-OUT 1)
RC error test signal T2 (AN.-OUT 2)
RC error test signal T3 (+10V)
RC error test signal T4 (-10V)
RC set rudder overflow
RC ser-RX: parity error
RC ser-RX: checksum error
RC ser-RX: invalid message type
serial integr.-control system timeout
azimuth thruster interface error
Actual rudder not equal Set-rudder
Rudder1 not equal Rudder2
Port rudder failure from extern
Starboard rudder failure from extern
Rudder Rate feedback failure
Single rudder feedback not equal backup feedback
Invalid data for backup feedback
Invalid data for single rudder feedback
Invalid data for PRT rudder feedback
Invalid data for STB rudder feedback
ROT prediction error
NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword timeout
NAV-Bus / CAN1 checkword error
NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid CAN object number
NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid message type
NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in progress)
227
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
Error
06805
06810
06811
06812
06813
06814
06815
06816
06817
06818
06819
06820
06821
06830
06831
06832
06833
06834
06835
06836
06837
06838
06839
06840
06841
06842
06843
06844
06845
06846
06847
06848
06849
06850
06851
06852
06853
06854
06855
06856
06857
06858
06859
06860
06861
06862
06863
06864
06865
06866
06867
06868
06869
06870
228
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
Subdevice
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
Info
Recommended Action
NAV-Bus / CAN1 send overrun (in queue)
NAV-Bus / CAN1 unknown error
NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid parameter
NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid write max value
NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: checksum error
NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: invalid block count
NAV-Bus / CAN1 receive buffer insufficient
NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: reset hang
NAV-Bus / CAN1 invalid interrupt
NAV-Bus / CAN1 standard: lost block
NAV-Bus / CAN1 short pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN1 long pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN1 chip: bus off
unknown error from IP
RAM error
ROM error
Can bus LEC error
Can bus buffer error
Can bus STN protocol error
Can bus off or warning level
reserve
System error watchdog, ...
Error power supply +15V
Error power supply -15V
Error power supply 24V
Error hold voltage
TP time out
Low current poti 1 reference
Rudder rate feedback failure (STB or Single)
Rudder rate feedback failure (PRT or Backup)
Rudder3 rate feedback failure
Config of rudder input wrong
Config of rudder output wrong
Rudder relays failure (STB or Single = K1/K2)
Rudder relays failure (PRT or Backup = K3/K4)
reserve
Relays 1 set error
Relays 2 set error
Relays 3 set error
Relays 4 set error
Relays 5 set error
Relays 6 set error
Relays 7 set error
Relays 8 set error
Relays 9 set error
Relays 10 set error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
06871
06872
06873
06874
06875
06876
06877
06878
06879
06880
06881
06882
06883
06884
06885
06886
06887
06888
06889
06890
06891
06892
06893
06894
06895
06896
06897
06898
06899
06900
06901
06902
06903
06904
06905
06906
06907
06908
06909
06910
06912
06914
06915
06916
06917
06918
06919
06920
06922
06923
06929
06931
06932
06940
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Subdevice
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
REG
IP
Info
Relays 11 set error
Relays 12 set error
SIO pool empty
SIO FIFO overrun
Uart 0 error while reading byte
Uart 0 error while writing byte
Uart 0 illegal size for message type
Uart 0 data time out while reading
Uart 0 checksum error
Fan rotation failure
Poti 1 reference short circuit
Course integration error
Joystick fault
Missing position type
Missing position status
Trackmode-data wrong update
Trackmode-data timeout
Trackmode: OFF COURSE for NEW TRACK
Trackmode: NEW TRACK in curve
Trackmode centred
Invalid curve sequence
Filtered XTD too large
Tp gyro fault
RPM PRT missing
RPM STB missing
EEPROM error parameter data
Recommended Action
229
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
230
Error
06941
06942
06943
06944
06945
06946
06947
06948
06949
06950
06951
06952
06953
Device
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
TP
Subdevice
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
Info
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
EEPROM
Recommended Action
08001
08002
08005
08006
08007
08010
08011
08101
08102
08103
08104
08111
08112
08113
08114
08115
08124
08125
08126
08127
08129
08130
08131
08132
08133
08134
08139
08140
08141
08199
08201
08211
08212
08213
08214
08215
08220
08300
08301
08302
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
DRIVER
EEPROM
EEPROM
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
checkword timeout
checkword error
cancel timeout
BITE timeout
no BITE response
checksum error: transfer of system parameter
checksum error: transfer of user parameter
CPOOL: error (1..3)
CPOOL: invalid pool
CPOOL: invalid buffer
CPOOL: pool empty
QUEUE: error (1..4)
QUEUE: receive event w/o buffer
QUEUE: invalid queue
QUEUE: invalid buffer
QUEUE: BAB pool empty
RAM: error
ROM: error
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 TP-DMC1 timeout
CMOS-RAM: error
EEPROM organization bad
EEPROM general failure
EEPROM protect hang
EEPROM lock hang
EEPROM programming timeout
EEPROM verify failed
address overflow
EEPROM parameter configuration invalid
EEPROM user/system configuration invalid
ghost interrupt from PIC
serial message not send
SIO receive error
SIO send error
SIO invalid message length
SIO checkword timeout
SIO checkword error
speed timeout
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword timeout
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 checkword error
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid CAN object number
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
error
version data
Relais device
Hold device
Interconnection board
A/D device
D/A pcb channel 1
D/A pcb channel 2
D/A pcb channel 3
D/A pcb channel 4
D/A pcb channel 5
D/A pcb channel 6
D/A pcb channel 7
D/A pcb channel 8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
10 System Faults
Error
08303
08304
08305
08310
08311
08312
08313
08314
08315
08316
08317
08318
08319
08320
08321
08400
08401
08402
08403
08404
08405
08410
08411
08412
08413
08414
08415
08416
08417
08418
08419
08420
08421
08480
08481
08501
08502
08503
08504
08505
08506
Device
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Subdevice
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
08507
SP
MC1
08508
08509
08510
08511
08520
08521
08522
08601
08602
08603
08604
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Info
Recommended Action
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid message type
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in progress)
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 unknown error
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid parameter
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid write max value
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: checksum error
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: invalid block count
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 receive buffer insufficient
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: reset hang
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 invalid interrupt
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 standard: lost block
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 short pool empty
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 long pool empty
NCC-Bus / CAN-2 chip: bus off
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword timeout
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 checkword error
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid CAN object number
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid message type
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 send overrun (in progress)
NAV-Bus / CAN-2 send overrun (in queue)
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 unknown error
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid parameter
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid write max value
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: checksum error
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: invalid block count
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 receive buffer insufficient
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: reset hang
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 invalid interrupt
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 standard: lost block
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 short pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 long pool empty
NAV-Bus / CAN-1 chip: bus off
CAN send nav pool empty
CAN send nav pool back
MMCI pool is empty
MMCI DPM error
MMCI function address is null
area
MMCI DPM clear to send timeout
MC2 checkword timeout
MC2 checkword error
MC2 invalid message type
SI checkword timeout
SI checkword error
SI invalid broadcast message type
SI invalid message type
231
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
232
Error
08700
08701
08702
08703
08704
08705
08706
08710
08800
08801
08802
08803
08805
08810
08811
08812
08814
08815
08816
Device
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
SP
Subdevice
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
MC1
Info
EI1 analog input fault
EI1 VDIG voltage fault
EI1 VDD_M voltage fault
EI1 VEE_M voltage fault
EI1 VREF voltage fault
EI1 VLM voltage fault
EI1 VLP voltage fault
EI1 high int. freq. at digtal input
EI2 analog input fault
EI2 UKOM voltage fault
EI2 VDD_M voltage fault
EI2 VEE_M voltage fault
EI2 temperature input fault
EI2 lever output fault
EI2 busy relay fault
EI2 lever feedback fault
EI2 watchdog
EI/SP no master
SP lost one of two enable signals
09001
09002
09003
09004
09005
09006
09007
09008
09009
09010
09011
09012
09013
09014
09015
09016
09017
09018
09019
09020
09021
09025
09026
09027
09028
09029
09030
09031
09032
09033
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RKE1
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
MC system error( watchdog, .... )
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 paritybit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
OPERATING UNIT FAILURE
no default Slave found
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
error while reading byte
error while writing byte
illegal size for message type
data time out while reading
uart 1 checksum error
09101
09102
09103
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
check error
check error
bus frame error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
09104
09105
09106
09107
09108
09109
09110
09111
09112
09113
09114
09115
09116
09117
09118
09119
09120
09121
09125
09126
09127
09128
09129
09130
09131
09132
09133
Device
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
RKE2
Subdevice
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09201
09202
09203
09204
09205
09206
09207
09208
09209
09210
09211
09212
09213
09214
09215
09216
09217
09218
09219
09220
09221
09225
09226
09227
09228
09229
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Recommended Action
233
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
234
Error
09230
09231
09232
09233
Device
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
RKE3
Subdevice
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
09301
09302
09303
09304
09305
09306
09307
09308
09309
09310
09311
09312
09313
09314
09315
09316
09317
09318
09319
09320
09321
09325
09326
09327
09328
09329
09330
09331
09332
09333
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RKE4
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09401
09402
09403
09404
09405
09406
09407
09408
09409
09410
09411
09412
09413
09414
09415
09416
09417
09418
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
09419
09420
09421
09425
09426
09427
09428
09429
09430
09431
09432
09433
Device
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
RKE5
Subdevice
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09501
09502
09503
09504
09505
09506
09507
09508
09509
09510
09511
09512
09513
09514
09515
09516
09517
09518
09519
09520
09521
09525
09526
09527
09528
09529
09530
09531
09532
09533
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RKE6
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09601
09602
09603
09604
09605
09606
09607
09608
09609
09610
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Recommended Action
235
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
236
Error
09611
09612
09613
09614
09615
09616
09617
09618
09619
09620
09621
09625
09626
09627
09628
09629
09630
09631
09632
09633
Device
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
RKE7
Subdevice
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09701
09702
09703
09704
09705
09706
09707
09708
09709
09710
09711
09712
09713
09714
09715
09716
09717
09718
09719
09720
09721
09725
09726
09727
09728
09729
09730
09731
09732
09733
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RKE8
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09801
09802
RKE9
RKE9
RAM
ROM
check error
check error
Recommended Action
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
10 System Faults

Technical Manual
Error
09803
09804
09805
09806
09807
09808
09809
09810
09811
09812
09813
09814
09815
09816
09817
09818
09819
09820
09821
09825
09826
09827
09828
09829
09830
09831
09832
09833
Device
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
RKE9
Subdevice
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
09901
09902
09903
09904
09905
09906
09907
09908
09909
09910
09911
09912
09913
09914
09915
09916
09917
09918
09919
09920
09921
09925
09926
09927
09928
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RAM
ROM
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
EEPROM
SYSTEM
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
CAN_KB
CAN_KB
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
PS/2
check error
check error
bus frame error
bus buffer error
bus protocol error
checksum error
Dev1 startbit error
Dev1 stopbit error
Dev1 timeout error
Dev2 startbit error
Dev2 stopbit error
Dev2 timeout error
Dev3 startbit error
Dev3 stopbit error
Dev3 timeout error
Dev4 startbit error
Dev4 stopbit error
Dev4 timeout error
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
Recommended Action
237
10 System Faults
Technical Manual
238
Error
09929
09930
09931
09932
09933
Device
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
RKE10
10001
10002
10010
10011
10012
10013
10014
10016
10017
10018
10019
10020
10021
10022
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
VDR
10023
VDR
10024
10025
VDR
VDR
Subdevice
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
COM1
Info
Recommended Action
offline
no picture written, LAN connection lost
final recording medium data overflow
microphone test failed
error during process load
process aborted
error during picture grabbing
main power failure
UPS fault
audio not found
error during 4300 control process load
final recording medium bit error
final recording medium not connected
final recording medium IP control failure
receive timeout of NMEA 0183 data (IEC
61162-1/2) on serial interfaces or LAN
network error
external alarm
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e10.fm / 06.09.05
11 Index of Parameters

Technical Manual
11
Index of Parameters
A
Acceleration 116
ADC Threshold Adjus 141
Add a Label (Number) to the Thruster Display 137
Add a Propeller to the Thruster Display 137
Additional Alarms Setup Menu 118
Additional Information (Transceiver) 126
Administration 115
Administration (Indicators) 120
Advanced Settings (Service) 148
AFT Bridge is active String 118
AIS 115
AIS Channel 131
AIS Lost Target witout Alarm 118
Alarm Relays Activation Delay (Indicators) 120
Allowed to be Sensor Master (Indicators) 121
Analog Gyro System (Sensor Interface) 128
Antenna (Transceiver) 126
Antenna Information (Service) 149
Antenna Motor Frequency (Transceiver) 127
ARCS Database 138
ARCS User Permit Number 135
ARPA 108
ARPA Lost Target without Alarm 118
Availability of additional Displays 136
Azimuth Pulses per Revolution (Transceiver) 127
Azimuth Thruster 1...4 137
Azimuth Thruster Parameters 137
Azimuth Thruster x 137
B
BAS Device 1(...3) Identifier (Sensor Interface) 133
Based on Specification (Indicators) 121
Basic Radar 118
Baud Rate (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Baud Rate (Sensor Interface) 131
Beam Width (Transceiver) 126
BIOS Settings 153
Blanking Sector X Start Angle (Transceiver) 126
Blanking Sector X Stop Angle (Transceiver) 126
Bottom Track (BT) Input (Sensor Interface) 129
Bridge Alarm System Device 1(...3) (Sensor Interface)
133
Buzzer 105
C
Catalog (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
Central Dimming Adjustment 122
Channel (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123, 124, 125
Channel (Sensor Interface) 131, 132
Channel of this Gyro (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123,
125
CHARTRADAR Function (Indicators) 121
CHARTRADAR Function License Key (Indicators) 121
CHARTRADAR Identification Code (Indicators) 121
Check IMB Alarm IO 142
Clutch Label 135
C-Map Identifier 135
Collapse 113
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
Colored Angle Display Limit 137

Commissioning Data 151
Compress 113
Config Transfer 151
Configure 112
Connected Monitor (Indicators) 120
Connected Planning System 115
Conning 135
Conning (Indicators) 121
D
Dangerous Target Alarm (Indicators) 120
Date & Time 102
Default Depth (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Default Weather (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Default Wind (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Depth (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
Depth Sensor 1 (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
Depth Value 125
Differentiated Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Diskette 104
Displacement 136
Displacement Table 136
Display Pitch Bar 135
Display Power Bar 135, 136
Display Selected Gyro 123, 125, 131
Distance Longitudinal (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123,
124
Distance Longitudinal (Sensor Interface) 129, 131, 132
Distance Longitudinal (Transceiver) 126
Distance to Bow (System) 115
Distance to P (System) 116
Distance to SB (System) 115
Distance to Stern (System) 115
Distance Transversal (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123,
124
Distance Transversal (Sensor Interface) 129, 132
Distance Transversal (Transceiver) 126
Double End Ferry 122
Draught 136
Driver (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
E
ENC Database 138
ENC User Permit No. 135
ENGINE INTERFACE (SPEEDPILOT) 114
Error Input (Sensor Interface) 128, 129
Expand 113
F
Frequency Deviation (Transceiver) 126
Full Sensitivity Gyro against COG above speed of 117
FWD Bridge is active String 118
G
Generator Parameters 136
GLL, GGA Selection (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
239
Technical Manual
GLL, GGA Selection (Sensor Interface) 132

Guard Zone Alarm (Indicators) 120
Gyro (Sensor Interface) 128
Gyro against COG of Main Position Sensor 116
Gyro against COG of Redundant Position Sensor 116
Gyro against Magnetic Compass 116
Gyro Input Voltage (Sensor Interface) 128
Gyro Monitoring 116
H
Heading (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Heading Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128
Headmarker (Service -> Transceiver) 145
Height above Sea Level 126
I
Ignore Gyro against COG above ROT of 117
Ignore Gyro against COG below Speed of 117
IMB Map Storage Test 105
Increment (Sensor Interface) 128, 129
Indicator 114
Indicator (Service) 140
Installed Type of Tracking Facility 120
Interswitch 150
Interswitch (PCI) 114
K
Keyboard 105
Keyboard (Indicators) 120
L
Last Modification Date (Transceiver) 127
Length at Waterline 116
Local Indicator Number 114
Log Type (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Log Type (Sensor Interface) 129, 132
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Longitudinal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface)
130, 132
Lost Target Alarm (Indicators) 120
M
Magnetron (Service) 148
Magnetron Hours (Service) 149
Map Delete 103
Map Transfer 102
Maximum Radius 116
Maximum ROT Alarm Limit 116
Maximum Thruster Power 137
Maximum Thruster RPM 137
Minimum Radius 116
Monitor Adjust 140
Monitor Aspect Ratio 122
Monitor Control Interface 122
N
NACOS 134, 150
NACOS (System Layout) 114
240
Name (Indicators) 120

Nominal Speed 116
Number of Blanking Sectors (Transceiver) 126
Number of Clutches 135
Number of Generators 136
Number of Shafts 135
O
Output (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124, 132
P
Planning System 134
PM Adjust (Service -> Transceiver) 147
PMA Display (Service -> Transceiver) 146
Position (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Position (Sensor Interface) 131
Position (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Position against Redundant Position Sensor 118
Position Monitoring 118
Position Quality Check 116
Pulse Log (Sensor Interface) 128
R
Radar 120
Radar PPI Radius 121
Reference (Sensor Interface) 128
RKE Settings 144
RKE Software Update 144
Route (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
RSC Test Pictures 106
RTE Message Route Identifier (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
RTE Mode (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
S
Scale Generator Power Bar 136
Scale Longitudinal Speed Bar 135
Scale Off Course Bar 135
Scale Off Track Bar 135
Scale Orientation 137
Scale RPM Bar 135
Scale Rudder Display 135
Scale Shaft Power Bar 136
Sector Blanking (Transceiver) 126
Security Unique Identifier (UID) 135
Select Radar Indicator for CHARTPILOT ARPA targets
134
Selfcheck 105
Sensor Information via Ethernet to CHARTPILOT 134
Sensor Interface 127
Sensor Interface Identifier (Sensor Interface) 129
Sensor Interfaces 114
Sensor Number (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Sensor Number (Sensor Interface) 132
Serial Gyro (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Serial I/O Monitor 142
Serial Output used as 125, 133
Service 139
Service Report 152
Settings for Bridge Alarm System BAS40P (Sensor Interface) 133
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05

Technical Manual
Settings for C. Plath and Anschuetz (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125

Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1) (Sensor Interface)
131
Settings for NMEA 0183 (IEC 61162-1/2) (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Setting-to-Work (Service -> Transceiver) 145
Shaft Parameters 135
Ship Data 115
Ship Data for AIS 115
Software Update 143
Speed (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Speed (Sensor Interface) 132
Speed (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Speed against Redundant Speed Sensor 117
Speed against SOG of Main Position Sensor 118
Speed against SOG of Redundant Position Sensor 118
Speed Capability (Transceiver) 126
Speed Monitoring 117
Speed Sensor Channel (Sensor Interface) 128
Squat Coefficient 136
Startup Sensor Selection 118
STC Compensation (Service) 149
STC Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145
System / Ship Parameters 115
System Fault Alarm (Indicators) 120
System Maintenance Manager 100
System Position (System) 115
V
VDR 115
Video Anti Clutter Sea 118
Video MBS (Service -> Transceiver) 146
VX Input (Sensor Interface) 130
VY Input (Sensor Interface) 130
W
Water Track Input (WT) (Sensor Interface) 130
Weather (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
Wind (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
Wind Reference (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124, 133
WPL Remark (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 125
X
XPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130
Y
YPM Input (Sensor Interface) 130
T
TB2 Terminal 15/16 HM Turn 118
Thruster Angle Display Color 137
Thruster Angle Display Mode 137
Time (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Time (Sensor Interface) 132
Time (Startup Sensor Selection) 118
Time from Selected Position Sensor (Startup Sensor Selection) 119
Tools 102
Track Transfer 104
TRACKPILOT 114
TRACKPILOT Track Mode (Indicators Serial Interfaces)
125
Transceiver 114
Transceiver (Service) 145
Transfer of ARPA Alarms to CHARTPILOT 122
Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Transversal Speed Filter Constant (Sensor Interface) 130,
132
Trigger Delay (Service -> Transceiver) 145
Tuning Indication Gain 149
Tuning Offset (Service) 149
Type of AIS 131
Type of Generation (Transceiver) 126
U
Use Speed from Position Sensor (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 123
Use Speed from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132
Use Time from Position Sensor (Indicators Serial Interfaces) 124
Use Time from Position Sensor (Sensor Interface) 132
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
241

Technical Manual
242
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_SIX.fm / 06.09.05
12 Cabling Documents
Technical Manual
12
Cabling Documents
Title
Page
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6
245
Ca ble Dia gram, Ind ex , 2/6
246
C a bl e D i a gram , Si n gl e R ada r, 3/ 6
247
C a bl e D i a gram , D u al R a dar, 4 / 6
248
C a bl e D i a gram , M ul t i pl e R ad ar, 5 /6
249
Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6
250
Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8
251
Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8
252
Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8
253
Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8
254
C o nne ct i on D i agra m, opt i on al C O M Exp and er, 5 /8
255
Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8
256
C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r u p ( Ve r s i o n A ) , 7 / 8
257
C o n n e c t i o n D i a g r a m , Tr a n s c e i v e r d o w n ( Ve r s i o n B ) , 8 / 8
258
X - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1
259
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 4
260
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 1 a / 4
261
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 4
262
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , c o m b i n e d H M a n d A z i m u t h P u l s e r , 2 a / 4
263
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d H e a t i n g c a b l i n g , 3 / 4
264
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r , 4 / 4
265
X - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , c a b l i n g o f I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n B o a r d , b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1
266
S - B a n d , I n t e r c o n n e c t i o n Tr a n s c e i v e r , Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 / 1
267
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 1 / 7
268
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 2 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 2 / 7
269
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r a n d S t a r t U n i t 2 c a b l i n g , 3 / 7
270
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 4 / 7
271
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B w i t h S t a r t U n i t 1 , g e a r b o x c a b l i n g , 5 / 7
272
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , M o t o r , H e a t i n g a n d S t a r t U n i t 1 c a b l i n g , 6 / 7
273
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n A a n d B , 1 1 5 V Tr a n s f o r m e r c a b l i n g , 7 / 7
274
S - B a n d , Tr a n s c e i v e r Ve r s i o n B , C o n n e c t i o n B o a r d i n b u l k h e a d h o u s i n g , 1 / 1
275
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
243

Technical Manual
Grounding
All components of the radar system have contacts such as bolts or terminals for grounding. Grounding is
important for EMC purposes as well as for protecting peoples lives.
Both purposes are covered by the standard grounding of the systems housings to the ships metallic
structure (bolted or welded). Regardless of the type of ships grounding (e.g. star pattern or ground plane
pattern), no potential difference should be measurable between two different ground connectors. Potential
differences cause compensation currents on the cable shields. If the ship has no metallic structure, all
conductively connected metallic parts form an artificial ground.
All ground connections should be as short as possible. If possible, different units should be connected to
individual ground connectors. Whenever possible, metallic housings should be screwed or welded directly
to the ships metallic structure. If a safe grounding contact cannot be ensured, additional conductors are
necessary. Furthermore, all ground connections should have a low RF-impedance, and should be
resistant against vibration and corrosion. Grounding conductors on an open-air deck must be made of
corrosion-protected steel, and inside the ship they must be made of copper.
The grounding should be done in such a way that the connection can be inspected in a convenient
manner.
EMC Purposes
The shields of all cables must be connected at both ends if no other instructions are given.
CAUTION
The screen of the coax cables must be connected to the
cable glands or cable entries of the housings AND to the
appropriate terminals. If the screen is connected to the
terminals only, the signals might be disturbed.
See Figure 3-2 on page 29.
Protective Ground
All removable metallic parts of the housings are grounded by means of separate, flexible cables to the
main structure of the housing. It is important to connect this ground-cable after parts have been
dismounted or exchanged.
244
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-1

&DEOHQR
(TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ
Cable Diagram, General Remarks, 1/6
245
6$0B(B063
'$7(
1$0(

.13
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(
25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
-XQFWLRQ%R[VXSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
FDEOHFRQGXLWRUODLGRQVHSDUDWHWUD\
&DEOHVWREHLQVWDOOHGE\WKHVKLS\DUGLQPHWDOOLF
FDEOHFRQGXLWDFFLQVWDOODWLRQGZJ
6XSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
RQVSHFLDOUHTXHVWRQO\
7REHODLGRQO\LILQWHUIDFHLVFRQQHFWHG
5(3/:,7+
OHYHOPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\ODLGLQGLYLGXDOO\LQ,URQSLSH
0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHWRFDEOHVZLWKKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURQLFV
&$%/(',$*5$0
5$'$5
<<%XVFDEOHV<< FRXQWHGIURP
;;3RZHUVXSSO\FDEOHV
;;'DWDDQGFRQWUROVLJQDOFDEOHV
;;79$VLJQDOFDEOHV; V\VWHPWKDWGHOLYHUVVLJQDO
;;9LGHRFDEOHV
;;5DGDUZDYHJXLGHV
;;6SDUH
;6$01$&26V\VWHPQXPEHUV
5DGDUV\VWHP
'*36SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP
/RUDQ&SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP
'RORJ
5DGDUV\VWHP
(0/RJ
5DGDUV\VWHP
(FKRVRXQGHU
&KDUWSLORW
:LQGVHQVRU
&KDUWSLORW
$,6
&KDUWSLORW
%ULGJH:DWFKDODUPV\VWHP
&KDUWSLORW
9'5
7UDFNSLORW
([WHUQ([WHUQDOV\VWHPVFDEOHV
5(0$5.6

,3

6+
LIQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGE\V\VWHPVXSSOLHU
&DEOH&RGH
)XOOQDPHGFDEOHVFRPHIURPRWKHUV\VWHPV
&DEOHVSUHVHQWHGZLWKRXWGUDZLQJGLJLWVEHORQJWRV\VWHPSUHVHQWHG
)XOOFDEOHQRFRQVLVWVRIWKHODVWGLJLWVRIGUDZLQJQXPEHUFDEOHFRGH
RQO\LQFRQQHFLRQGLDJUDP
*URXQGFRQQHFWLRQ6KRZQ
6+
GLIIHUQWH[WHUQDOV\VWHP
FDEOHLVGHILQHGLQD
'DVKHGOLQH
035;&;[
<<<;;;;
FURVVVHFWLRQ
QXPEHURIFRUHV
SRZHUFDEOH
&DEOHW\SH
)XOOFDEOH1R
1&*<
6SHFLDO5HPDUNV

DWVKHHWVHFWLRQ
RIFDEOH
VHFRQGSUHVHQWDWLRQ
&URVVUHIHUHQFHIRU

%8%8
1&%1
%8%.
2QO\IRU)0.+&[[XVHFRQYHUVLRQWDEOH
1&QHXWUDOFRORXUZKLWHRUEODFNRUWUDQVSDUHQW
%8EOXH
&DEOH1XPEHUV
(TXLSPHQWQXPEHU
ZLWKDERYHFDEOHW\SHVIROORZLQJDSSOLHV

&DEOHFDWHJRU\

(/(&7521,&81,7

,QWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHVE\SDLUQXPEHUDQGFRORXU)RUFRPSDWLELOLW\
/RFDWLRQ
/2&$7,21
522012
3OXJ6RFNHW
FURVVVHFWLRQ
QXPEHURIFRUHV
WZLVWHGSDLUV
&DEOHW\SH

7&;&[[
&RUH,GHQWLILFDWLRQ
6FUHHQ&RSSHUEUDLGZLWKFRYHUDJH!DFFWR,(&
&RSSHUFRQGXFWRUURXQGVWUDQGHGDFFWR,(&&ODVV
+DORJHQIUHH/RZ6PRNH
DFFWR,(&,(&,(&
7ZLVWHGSDLUV)0*&+)0.+&RU7&;&
DFFWR,(&,(&&$7$,(&
3RZHU0*&+06.+&RU035;&;
,IQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGXVHIROORZLQJFDEOHW\SHVRUHTXLYDOHQW
RIWKHFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
7\SHVL]HDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDEOHVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHJXODWLRQV
&DEOHV
UHJXODWLRQVRIFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
FLUFXLWVIURPPDLQDQGHPHUJHQF\SRZHUVXSSO\LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK
1DYLJDWLRQGLVWULEXWLRQZLWKDXWRPDWLFFKDQJHRYHUEHWZHHQH[FOXVLYH
)ROORZLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDORIHTXLSPHQW
$OOHTXLSPHQWWREHJURXQGHGZLWKPPZLUHXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHG
&DEOHVFUHHQWREHJURXQGHGXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGRQFRQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP
LVPHDVXUHGIURPFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHWWRFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHW
&DEOHOHQJWKPD[PXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGLQFDEOHGLDJUDP/HQJWK
*HQHUDO
$/7(5
6FKXW]YHUPHUNQDFK',1EHDFKWHQ2%6(59(&23<5,*+7$63(5',1

;;;;

;;;;
5
9,'(2&$%/(
671?1$&26B?

&$'
Technical Manual
&$'
Fig. 12-2
1$0(

67'5'
.QcSSHO
&2162/(,17(51$/
.13
08/7,3/(5$'$5
&+(&.
'8$/5$'$5

6,1*/(5$'$5
352&
3$*(,1'(;
'$7(
5(0$5.6
'$7(

25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
3$*(,1'(;

&217(17
5
3$*(
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
246

5(3/:,7+

&$%/(',$*5$0
5$'$5

3$*(,1'(;

,3

6+

6+

671?1$&26B?
Technical Manual
Cable Diagram, Index, 2/6

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05

Cable Diagram, Single Radar, 3/6
247
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
+($',1*

&$9$
93++=
6((127(
5$'$5',63/$<
7)7$=
)2533,
257)7$=
)2533,
'$7(
1$0(

96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
5$'$53,/27*(
25&+$575$'$5*(
2508/7,3,/27*(
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
.QcSSHO
67'5'
.13
&+(&.

352&
'$7(

0*&+[
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7

6%$1'&$9$530
%'
:,7+237,21$/
5$'$5$1'733$1(/
23(5$7,1*81,7
63(('
0*&+[
;%$1'&$9$530
2593++=25+=
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
1$9,*$7,21
',675,%87,21
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
25,*,1

5$'$5
0$67
0*&+[

5(3/:,7+

&$%/(',$*5$0
5$'$5
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
5$'$5
6,1*/(
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127
&$%/(/(1*7+2)79$&$%/(0867127(;&(('P
,17(5)$&(3&%,167$//(',1,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
:,7+237,21$/&20(;3$1'(53&%$1'$1$/2*8(
$'',7,21$/6(1625,17(5)$&(6$5($9$,/$%/(
75$16)250(56$5($9$,/$%/(
)2599$1'96833/<92/7$*(237,21$/
127(

,3

6+
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURLQFV
%8/.+($'75$16&(,9(5
79$
79$
$/2)775$16&(,9(5
VHH127(
VHH127(

&2$;$'6
&2$;$'6
212))&$1
VHH127(
212))&$1
VHH127(
&$9$
75$16&(,9(5
;%$1'1*
256%$1'1*
(48,30(17
5220
6%$1'6%$1'&2$;
$17(11$*($5%2;

;%$1'*5
256%$1'*5
;%$1'()/(;:(//
&$%/(
93++=
',675,%87,21
1$9,*$7,21
6((127(
6%$1'&$9$530
;%$1'&$9$9$530
2593++=25+=

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV

0*&+[
93++=25+=
',675,%87,21
1$9,*$7,21

)0*&+[[

5$'$50$67
;%$1'*5
256%$1'*5
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5

)0*&+[[

93++=25+=

)0*&+[[

326,7,21 )0*&+[[

5
/$1
VHHOHIW
671?1$&26B?
VHH127(
PD[P
&$'
)0*&+[[
*<52
326,7,21
6(1625
326,7,21
6(1625

$,6
)0*&+[[
'(%(*
326,7,21+($',1*63(('

:$7&+
)0*&+[[
$/$50
'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0

%5,'*(
)0*&+[[
$/$50
$/$506
6<67(0
5*8
&+$57
)0*&+[[
/2*
6+

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
3,/27
Fig. 12-3
'(%(*
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
25$,6
Technical Manual
&2$;$'6

5*8

6$0B(B063
$/7(5
&+$57
79$
'(%(*
'$7(
1$0(

.13
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(
96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
5$'$53,/27*(
25&+$575$'$5*(
2508/7,3,/27*(
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
25,*,1

VHH127(
212))&$1&$1
5(3/:,7+

&$%/(',$*5$0
5$'$5
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867
0867127(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(
0867127(;&(('P
&$%/(/(1*7+2)($&+79$&$%/,1*$1'
3&%,167$//(',1,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
237,21$/&20(;3$1'(53&%$1'$1$/2*8(,17(5)$&(
$'',7,21$/6(1625,17(5)$&(6$5($9$,/$%/(:,7+
75$16)250(56$5($9$,/$%/(
)2599$1'96833/<92/7$*(237,21$/
127(
VHH127(
/$1

79$
VHH127(
)0*&+[[
5*&8

79$
VHH127(
&2$;$'6
5$'$5',63/$<
7)7$=
)2533,
257)7$=
)2533,
96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
5$'$53,/27*(
25&+$575$'$5*(
2508/7,3,/27*(
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
5$'$5
'8$/

;%$1'*5
256%$1'*5
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5

5$'$50$67
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7
%'
:,7+237,21$/
5$'$5$1'733$1(/
23(5$7,1*81,7

5$'$5',63/$<
7)7$=
)2533,
257)7$=
)2533,
&2$;$'6
&$9$
&$9$
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7
6(1625
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
93++=
93++=

0*&+[

6((127(
6%$1'&$9$530
;%$1'&$9$530
+($',1*
%'
:,7+237,21$/
5$'$5$1'733$1(/

1$9,*$7,21
',675,%87,21
0*&+[
6%$1'&$9$530

212))&$1
;%$1'&$9$530

VHH127(
0*&+[
63(('
23(5$7,1*81,7
63(('
2593++=25+=
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
326,7,21 )0*&+[[
93++=25+=

VHH127(
/$1
3,/27
'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0
VHH127(
25$,6
)0*&+[[
/2*
)0*&+[[
27+(5

$,6
$/$506
6<67(0
)0*&+[[

2593++=25+=
)0*&+[[
*<52
)0*&+[[
*<52
93++=25+=
)0*&+[[
/2*
)0*&+[[
'(%(*
326,7,21+($',1*63(('

:$7&+
)0*&+[[
$/$50

%5,'*(
)0*&+[[
$/$50
326,7,21
6(1625
5$'$50$67

0*&+[
)0*&+[[
27+(5
;%$1'*5
256%$1'*5

6(1625
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5
+($',1*

,3
$,6
326,7,21
6(1625

)0*&+[[
'(%(*

326,7,21+($',1*63(('

:$7&+

)0*&+[[
$/$50

)0*&+[[

'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0
212))&$1

%5,'*(
VHH127(
5
6+
&2$;$'6

VHH127(
671?1$&26B?
)0*&+[[
$/$50

$/$506'($'0$15(6(7
Fig. 12-4

&$'

6+

248
6<67(0
Technical Manual
Cable Diagram, Dual Radar, 4/6

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
79$
)0*&+[[
VHH127(

Cable Diagram, Multiple Radar, 5/6
249

6$0B(B063

0*&+[
&$9$
(48,30(17
5220
'$7(
1$0(

96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
',63/$<
.13
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(
/$1
VHH127(
5*&8

212))&$1&$1
VHH127(
)0*&+[[

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
25,*,1
*(
352&(6625
&21752//('
,17(56:,7&+
79$
93++=+=

23(5$7,21

$/7(5
212))&$1
'(%(*
%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(
+($',1*
VHH127(
$/$506
6<67(0
79$
',675,%87,21

&2$;$'6
1$9,*$7,21
63(('
VHH127(

79$

5$'$50$67
212))&$1
VHH127(
)0*&+[[

79$
VHH127(
',63/$<
5(3/:,7+
96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
23(5$7,21
79$
VHH127(

212))&$1
VHH127(
)0*&+[[

%2:5$'$5
;%$1'*5
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5

&$%/(',$*5$0
/$1
VHH127(
5*&8

212))&$1&$1
VHH127(
5$'$5

96
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
08/7,3/(
)0*&+[[
',63/$<
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
23(5$7,21
P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)(7+(51(7/$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127(;&(('
7(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127(;&(('P%(7:((1
(;&(('P%(7:((17(50,1$7,216
&$%/(/(1*7+2)&$1&$%/,1*&$%/(0867127
0867127(;&(('P
&$%/(/(1*7+2)($&+79$&$%/,1*$1'$1'
5$'$5

&2$;$'6

$'',7,21$/32:(5&211(&7,21&$%/(6$66+2:1)256,1*/(5$'$5$5(5(48,5('
127(
6%$1'*5
,17(51$/&$%/,1*6((6+((7

79$
+($',1*
VHH127(

VHH127(
326,7,21
6(1625

63(('

'(%(*
)0*&+[[
27+(5
&2$;$'6

&2$;$'6

:$7&+

)0*&+[[
*<52
326,7,21
6(1625
&2$;$'6
)0*&+[[
/2*
326,7,21
6(1625
$)75$'$5
)0*&+[[
$/$50
212))&$1
)0*&+[[
326
)0*&+[[
$,6
;%$1'*5
)0*&+[[
27+(5
212))&$1
326,7,21
6(1625
;%$1'*5
'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5
'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0
VHH127(

$,6

VHH127(
$/$506
6<67(0

)0*&+[[
'(%(*
&2$;$'6
)0*&+[[
79$
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5

:$7&+
VHH127(

)0*&+[[
)0*&+[[
27+(5
$17(11$*($5%2;
:,7+,17(*5$7('
75$16&(,9(5
)0*&+[[
$/$50

+($',1*
6(1625

)0*&+[[
27+(5

,3

5
6+

6+

671?1$&26B?
$/$506
&$'
63(('
6(1625
5*8
&+$57
326,7,21
6(1625
VHH127(
3,/27
326,7,21
6(1625
/$1
25$,6
)0*&+[[
27+(5
)0*&+[[
*<52
)0*&+[[
27+(5
)0*&+[[
/2*

:$7&+
)0*&+[[
326
326,7,21+($',1*63(('

)0*&+[[
$/$50

%5,'*(
'($'0$15(6(7
6<67(0
&2$;$'6
)0*&+[[
$/$50
326,7,21+($',1*63(('

%5,'*(
)0*&+[[
$/$50
)0*&+[[
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
%5,'*(
Fig. 12-5
$/$50
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
6<67(0
Technical Manual
Cable Diagram, Console Internal, 6/6

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
'$7(
5
1$0(

.18
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(

32:(5
287

%1&
%1&
P
32:(5
,1
1(7:25.
0286(&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(
32:(5&$%/(

%1&
%1&
+'

25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
&$1121
'%
+'
'%
5(3/:,7+
'%
'%
32:(5
287
6:,7&+('
&$%/(',$*5$0
5$'$5
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;96
+'
&$1121
5$'$53,/27
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6*(
P
.(<%&$%/(

P
1(7:25.
P
P
P
36
P
36
79$&$%/(
+'
P
)&

32:(5
,1
32:(5
,1
5$'$5',63/$<
7)7$=)2533,25
7)7$=)2533,
'$7$&$%/(
)&

)&
P

P
23(5$7,1*81,7
%'
:,7+237,21$/
5$'$5$1'733$1(/
32/(&$%/(
P
P

9*$&$%/(
6(5&$%/(

32:(5&$%/(

%5,'*(5$'$5&2162/(

671?1$&26B?

,17(51$/
&2162/(
32:(5
287
P
Fig. 12-6
32:(5&$%/(
250

,3

6+
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURLQFV

6+

&$'
Technical Manual
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-7

&DEOHQR
(TXLSPHQWGHVFULSWLRQ
Connection Diagram, Remarks, 1/8
251
6$0B(B063
'$7(
1$0(

.QcSSHO
67'5'
.13
&+(&.

352&
'$7(
25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
-XQFWLRQ%R[VXSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
FDEOHFRQGXLWRUODLGRQVHSDUDWHWUD\
FDEOHFRQGXLWDFFLQVWDOODWLRQGZJ
6XSSOLHGE\VKLS\DUG
RQVSHFLDOUHTXHVWRQO\
7REHODLGRQO\LILQWHUIDFHLVFRQQHFWHG
5(3/:,7+
OHYHOPRUDOWHUQDWLYHO\ODLGLQGLYLGXDOO\LQ,URQSLSH
0LQLPXPGLVWDQFHWRFDEOHVZLWKKLJKLQWHUIHUHQFH
6XSSOLHGE\6$0(OHFWURQLFV
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5
<<%XVFDEOHV<< FRXQWHGIURP
;;3RZHUVXSSO\FDEOHV
;;'DWDDQGFRQWUROVLJQDOFDEOHV
;;79$VLJQDOFDEOHV; V\VWHPWKDWGHOLYHUVVLJQDO
;;9LGHRFDEOHV
;;5DGDUZDYHJXLGHV
;;6SDUH
;6$01$&26V\VWHPQXPEHUV
5DGDUV\VWHP
'*36SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP
/RUDQ&SRVLWLRQVHQVRU
5DGDUV\VWHP
'RORJ
5DGDUV\VWHP
(0/RJ
5DGDUV\VWHP
(FKRVRXQGHU
&KDUWSLORW
:LQGVHQVRU
&KDUWSLORW
$,6
&KDUWSLORW
%ULGJH:DWFKDODUPV\VWHP
&KDUWSLORW
9'5
7UDFNSLORW
([WHUQ([WHUQDOV\VWHPVFDEOHV
5(0$5.6

$63

6+
LIQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGE\V\VWHPVXSSOLHU
&DEOH&RGH
)XOOQDPHGFDEOHVFRPHIURPRWKHUV\VWHPV
&DEOHVSUHVHQWHGZLWKRXWGUDZLQJGLJLWVEHORQJWRV\VWHPSUHVHQWHG
)XOOFDEOHQRFRQVLVWVRIWKHODVWGLJLWVRIGUDZLQJQXPEHUFDEOHFRGH
RQO\LQFRQQHFLRQGLDJUDP
*URXQGFRQQHFWLRQ6KRZQ
6+
GLIIHUQWH[WHUQDOV\VWHP
FDEOHLVGHILQHGLQD
'DVKHGOLQH
035;&;[
<<<;;;;
FURVVVHFWLRQ
QXPEHURIFRUHV
SRZHUFDEOH
&DEOHW\SH
)XOOFDEOH1R
1&*<
6SHFLDO5HPDUNV

DWVKHHWVHFWLRQ
RIFDEOH
VHFRQGSUHVHQWDWLRQ
&URVVUHIHUHQFHIRU

%8%8
1&%1
%8%.
2QO\IRU)0.+&[[XVHFRQYHUVLRQWDEOH
1&QHXWUDOFRORXUZKLWHRUEODFNRUWUDQVSDUHQW
%8EOXH
&DEOH1XPEHUV
(TXLSPHQWQXPEHU
ZLWKDERYHFDEOHW\SHVIROORZLQJDSSOLHV

&DEOHFDWHJRU\

(/(&7521,&81,7

,QWZLVWHGSDLUFDEOHVE\SDLUQXPEHUDQGFRORXU)RUFRPSDWLELOLW\
/RFDWLRQ
/2&$7,21
522012
3OXJ6RFNHW
FURVVVHFWLRQ
QXPEHURIFRUHV
WZLVWHGSDLUV
&DEOHW\SH

7&;&[[
&RUH,GHQWLILFDWLRQ
6FUHHQ&RSSHUEUDLGZLWKFRYHUDJH!DFFWR,(&
&RSSHUFRQGXFWRUURXQGVWUDQGHGDFFWR,(&&ODVV
+DORJHQIUHH/RZ6PRNH
DFFWR,(&,(&,(&
7ZLVWHGSDLUV)0*&+)0.+&RU7&;&
DFFWR,(&,(&&$7$,(&
3RZHU0*&+06.+&RU035;&;
,IQRWRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGXVHIROORZLQJFDEOHW\SHVRUHTXLYDOHQW
RIWKHFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
7\SHVL]HDQGLQVWDOODWLRQRIFDEOHVLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKHUHJXODWLRQV
&DEOHV
UHJXODWLRQVRIFODVVLILFDWLRQVRFLHW\
FLUFXLWVIURPPDLQDQGHPHUJHQF\SRZHUVXSSO\LQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK
1DYLJDWLRQGLVWULEXWLRQZLWKDXWRPDWLFFKDQJHRYHUEHWZHHQH[FOXVLYH
)ROORZLQVWDOODWLRQLQVWUXFWLRQVLQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDORIHTXLSPHQW
$OOHTXLSPHQWWREHJURXQGHGZLWKPPZLUHXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHG
&DEOHVFUHHQWREHJURXQGHGXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGRQFRQQHFWLRQGLDJUDP
LVPHDVXUHGIURPFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHWWRFDEOHHQWUDQFHVRFNHW
&DEOHOHQJWKPD[PXQOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGLQFDEOHGLDJUDP/HQJWK
*HQHUDO
$/7(5

;;;;

;;;;
5B$63
9,'(2&$%/(
671?1$&26B?

&$'
Technical Manual
&$'
Fig. 12-8

1$0(

67'5'
.QcSSHO
%8/.+($'75$16&(,9(5
.18
$/2)775$16&(,9(5
&+(&.
237$1$/2*,17(5)$&(

237,21&20(;3$1'(5
352&
67$1'$5',17(5)$&(6
'$7(
',63/$<&211(&7,21
3$*(,1'(;

&217(17
5(0$5.6
'$7(

25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
3$*(,1'(;
5B$63
3$*(
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
252

5(3/:,7+

&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5

3$*(,1'(;

$63

6+

6+

671?1$&26B?
Technical Manual
Connection Diagram, Index, 2/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
*(*
5'&&$5'
SRO
68%'
-
+'
-
P
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
96

+'
[6(5,(//

7%

SRO
68%'
-

7%
Connection Diagram, Display Connection, 3/8
253
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
'$7(
%R[
%R[
1$0(

%1&
%1&
$'$3725
1(7:25.
)520
.13
.QcSSHO

RU$,6
&KDUWSLORW
&+(&.
67'5'
%1&

1(7:25.
7%
32:(5
25,*,1
7%
+'
9*$287
SRO
9'&287
36

)256,1*/(
5(3/:,7+
7UDQVFHLYHU
72
,167$//$7,21
'8$/

32:(5287
6:,7&+('
&211(&7('
)$&725<

,)7+(<67$5725(1'+(5(

,1
32:(5
7%
7%
9
7%
32:(5,1
)86($
9,$
32:(5287
7%

-
-
'%
SRO
68%'
-

3(

25$1$/2*,17(5)$&(
,17(51$/&20(;3$1'(5
0$,1672237,21$/
/

$63
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
6+
FKDSWHU&$1%XV&RQFHSW7HUPLQDWLRQ
PXOWLSOHUDGDUV\VWHPVHH
)RU&$1EXVFRQFHSWZLULQJDQGWHUPLQDWLRQLQD
127(
',5(&7
&211(&7,21
',63/$<
6:,7&+('
32:(5287
32:(5287
7%
+'
9*$,1
7%
1DYLJDWLRQ
)520

5$'$5',63/$<
7)7$=
257)7$=
'LVWULEXWLRQ
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5
%R[
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
QG5DGDU
72
,167$//$7,21
)25'8$/

23(5$7,1*81,7
%':,7+
237,21$/5$'$5
$1'7323(5$7,21
&$1$1'&$10867%(7(50,1$7('
9,'(2&$%/(P
32:(5&$%/(P
75$&.%$//P

.(<%2$5'P

36
5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
%R[
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ
QG5DGDU
72
,),167$//('
352&
'$7(
FDEOHIURP3&,
RU
)520
7UDQVFHLYHU
)520
QG5DGDU
,QWHUFRQQ
QG5DGDU
72
'%
,QWHUFRQQ
,167$//$7,21
)25'8$/
21/<

7%
&20
'$7$
&DQQRQ
&$1
6&5((1
&$1*1'

5*

5*

1(7:25.
P
5*&8

6&5((1

P
',63/$<(/(&7521,&6
*(25*(25*(
6&5((1

P

P
5*&8
&$5'

1(7:25.
$/$50
79$287

213
%8
P
&2$;$'6
211
1&

79$,1

&$1%287
&$1
&$1$287
)0*&+

5B$63
&2$;$'6
&$1*1'
%8
&$1*1'
%8
32:(5
1
1
79$
79$
&$1$287
1&
79$,1

&$1%,1
%8
P
&2$;$'6
P
3(
3(

79$
&$1$,1
%8
%8
&$1
213
&$1*1'
&$1%287
%8
[[
&$1%,1

&$1$,1
1&
)0*&+
211
1&
211
/
/
32:(5
1
/
213
%8
[[
3(
3(
32:(5
1
/
/
1
1
1

3(

0*&+

32:(5
P
671?1$&26B?
[
1
3(
/
/
3(
3(

3(
'$7$
&$'
6+

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
1
Fig. 12-9
3(
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
79$
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
7%
5;'

7;'

1&
5;'
%8

'$7(
.13
.QcSSHO
&+(&.
67'5'

352&

'$7(
)520
)0*&+
/RJ6\VWHP
[[
)520
[[
*\UR6\VWHP
*1'
%8
1$0(
5;'
%8

7;'
)0*&+
7;'
%8
*1'

)520

)520

6(5,$/
25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV

5(3/:,7+

&211(&7,21',$*5$0
6\VWHP
72
:DWFK$ODUP
5$'$5
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
&RQFHUQLQJWKH3RVLWLRQ6\VWHPV
FKDSWHU5HFRPPHQGDWLRQV
VHQVRULQWHUIDFHVHH
)RUUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUWKHSRVLWLRQ
&RQFHUQLQJWKH&RPSDVV,QWHUIDFH
LQWHUIDFHVHH
)RUUHTXLUHPHQWVIRUWKHJ\UR
5HGXQGDQF\
&RQFHUQLQJWKH6KLS
V6HQVRUV
RUPXOWLSOHUDGDULQVWDOODWLRQVVHH
$53$$,6
7$5*(7$/$50
$,6
72
5(6(7
$/$50
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRILQWHUIDFHVLQGXDO
127(
7%
'($'0$1
)0*&+
'(%(*
3RVLWLRQ6HQVRU 3RVLWLRQ6HQVRU
%8
5;'

7;'
)0*&+
7;'

5;'
1&
63(('
[[
6(5,$/
326,7,21
5;'
1&
326,7,21
7;'
%8
*1'
%8
5;'

6(5,$/
%8
6(5,$/

7;'
1&
%8
5$'$5
5(6(7
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
96
+($',1*
63(('
1&
*1'
%8
)0*&+

%8
'($'0$1

1&

72

$&.

+0
7851
$/$50
$8',2

$63
$/$50
&+$57
,17(5)$&(6
67$1'$5'
6\VWHP
%ULGJH$ODUP
1&
5;'
1&
)0*&+
%8
[[

$/$506

)0*&+
5B$63
1&
7;'
326,7,21
[[
%8
[[
%8
[[
671?1$&26B?
%8
Fig. 12-10
1&
&$'
6+
3(

6+

254
+($',1*
Technical Manual
Connection Diagram, Standard Interfaces, 4/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
Connection Diagram, optional COM Expander, 5/8
255
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
7%
5;'
%8
'$7(
5;'
)520
1$0(

6HQVRU
7%
.13
.QcSSHO
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(
352&
6(5,$/
5;'
*(*
*1'
7%
25,*,1
5;'

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
7;'
6(5,$/
)0*&+
3/8*,13&%
7;'
*(*
*1'
5656
6(5,$/
*(*
3/8*,13&%
5656
5;'
3/8*,13&%
5(3/:,7+
7;'
5656
*1'

7%
6(5,$/
*(*
3/8*,13&%
5656
7%
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5
6(5,$/
*(*
3/8*,13&%
5656
-
7%

3(
-
(;3$1'(5
$63
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
ZLWK3OXJLQ$GDSWHU3FEV

-
6+
FKDSWHU6HQVRU,QWHUIDFHV7%7%
VHH
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRIRWKHULQWHUIDFHVWKDQ56
V\VWHP
2QO\&20([SDQGHUFDQEHSUHVHQWLQD
VDPHORFDWLRQLQWKHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
96VLQFHERWKDUHLQVWDOOHGDWWKH
&20([SDQGHULQRQHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
<RXPD\RQO\LQVWDOO$QDORJ,QWHUIDFHRU
127(
5656*(*
56*(*
77<*(*
77/*(*

237,21&20
7\SHRILQWHUIDFHLVGHILQHGE\SOXJLQSFEIRUHDFKVHULDOFKDQQHO
5;'
*(*
&20(;3$1'(53&%237,21
5;'
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
96
7;'

7;'

7;'

*1'

5;'
5B$63
5;'
671?1$&26B?
7;'
1&

7;'
[[
5;'
%8
7;'
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
7;'
Fig. 12-11
*1'
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

6+

&$'
Technical Manual
Connection Diagram, optional Analog Interface, 6/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
7%

5;'

'$7(
5;'

6(5,$/
1$0(

1&

.13
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
25,*,1

5(3/)25
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
10($/$1
$&&20
7%
5(3/:,7+
$/7(51$7,9(/<7210($
6<67(0
$,66<67(0
)520*<52
$/7(51$7,9(/<72
'$7(
67'5'
$,67['1
7%
)520121
[
'(%(*

67(3&20
7%
*(*
$1$/2*,17(5)$&(3&%237,21

63$/2*
7%
,17(5&211(&7,21%2;
96

%7
7%

:7
7%

;30
7%

7;'
%8
7;'
1&
*1'
1&
$,65['1
7%
%8
$,65['3
7%
1&
1&
7%

$,67['3
7%
%8
[[
7%
)0*&+
$,6*1'
7%
1&
567(3
%8
667(3
7%
767(3
7%
7%

$&5()
7%
0*&+
<30
7%
9;
7%
/2*,1
*<52,1
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5
67
67$786
67

67$786
$/7(51$7,9(/<7210($
)52063(('/2*
%8
9<

7%
5B$63
)0*&+
671?1$&26B?
7%
*1'/2*
7%
1&
[[
7%
-
7%
7%
7%

3(
-
,17(5)$&(
237$1$/2*
$63
LQWHFKQLFDOPDQXDO
FKDSWHU$QDORJ,QWHUIDFH*(*
FRPSDVVV\VWHPVVHH

-
6+
)RUFRQQHFWLRQRIGXDOVSHHGORJDQGYDULRXV
VDPHORFDWLRQLQWKHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
96VLQFHERWKDUHLQVWDOOHGDWWKH
&RP([SDQGHULQRQHLQWHUFRQQHFWLRQER[
<RXPD\RQO\LQVWDOO$QDORJ,QWHUIDFHRU
127(
7%
Fig. 12-12
7%
256

6+

&$'
Technical Manual
Connection Diagram, Transceiver up (Version A), 7/8
257
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
'$7(
1$0(

93+
237,21$/

.13
.QcSSHO
&+(&.
25,*,1

5(3/)25

5(3/:,7+
96
'LVWULEXWLRQ

21/<)25
6&5((1

79$287

72
&2$;$'6

$63
3&,
96RU
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
7%

79$
75$16&(,9(5
$/2)7
,167$//$7,216
08/7,3/(5$'$5
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5

7(50,1$7(&$1,),767$57625(1'6+(5(
)520
7%
&211(&7,21%2$5'
6%$1'1*
;%$1'1*
5$'$575$16&(,9(5(/(&7521,&
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
237,21$/

/
/
)520
352&
67'5'
/1
/1
1DYLJDWLRQ
[
'$7(
93+
/

/
213
%8
+($7,1*
+($7,1*
6%$1'*5
&$1B%
%8
3(
;%$1'*5
*1'
%8

3(
5$'$5$17(11$
9
%8
7(50,1$/52:
+0$

527
$17(11$*($5%2;:,7+
,17(*5$7('75$16&(,9(5
;%$1'*5256%$1'*5

527

9((
/
306
/1

/1

/
0*&+
211
&$1
1&

&$1B$
1&
)0*&+
6<1$
[[
211

1&
&$1B$
[
213
%8
)0*&+
&$1B%
%8
&$1

32:(5
5B$63
[[
671?1$&26B?
6+

6+

t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
67$57
Fig. 12-13
1&
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)

&$'
Technical Manual
6$0B(B063
$/7(5
5B$63

'$7(
.13
.QcSSHO
352&
&+(&.
67'5'

'$7(
25,*,1

5(3/)25

)520
96

21/<)25

7%

75$16&(,9(5
%8/.+($'
21/<$76%$1'

,167$//$7,216
7%

&211(&7:,5(%8

08/7,3/(5$'$5
&211(&7,21',$*5$0
5$'$5
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
7%

7(50,1$7(&$1,),767$57625(1'6+(5(
;%$1'1*6%$1'1*
&211(&7,21%2$5'

5$'$575$16&(,9(5(/(&7521,&
7%
&211(&7,21%2$5'
6%$1'*5
;%$1'*5
5$'$5$17(11$
5(3/:,7+
'LVWULEXWLRQ
32:(5
'LVWULEXWLRQ
0*&+
)520
[
1DYLJDWLRQ
6$0(OHFWURQLFV
93+
7(50,1$/52:
/
/
/

/1
)520
[
1DYLJDWLRQ
1$0(
75$16&(,9(5
;%$1'1*
256%$1'1*
/1

/1
93+
7(50,1$/52:
/

/
/
93+
+($7
+($7,1*
+($7,1*
237
237,21$/
237,21$/
/
/
3(
3(
/1
/1
&$1B%
$17(11$*($5%2;
;%$1'*5
256%$1'*5
213
%8

3(

*1'
%8
/

9
%8
1&

6<1$
%8

+0$
1&

527
%8
1&
/1

32:(5
211
1&
&$1
527
%8
&$1
&$1B$
1&
)0*&+
%8
%8
[[

0*&+
*1'
%8
9
1&
6<1$
%8
+0$
1&
527
%8
527
1&
306
1&
9((
%8
9((
[
306
1&
)0*&+
&$1B$
%8
&$1B%
%8
213
1&
[[
67$57
211
%8
67$57
21/<$76%$1'
&211(&7:,5(%8
%8
6&5((1
1&
79$287
$63
3&,
96RU
,QWHUFRQQHFWLRQ%R[
72

)0*&+

6+

671?1$&26B?
&2$;$'6
Fig. 12-14

[[
&$'
;%$1'()/(;:(//
6%$1'6%$1'&2$;

6+

258
79$
Technical Manual
Connection Diagram, Transceiver down (Version B), 8/8

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_407.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-15
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
X-Band, Interconnection Transceiver Version A and B, 1/1
259
ztr1_404.pdf
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.

If a 3-ph motor is used, a separate
mains supply cable must be connected
to supply the transceiver electronics.
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-16
260
X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, 1/4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_404a.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-17
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
X-Band, Transceiver Version A, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 1a/4
261
ztr1_405.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-18
262
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, 2/4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_405a.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-19
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, gearbox cabling, combined HM and Azimuth Pulser, 2a/4
263
ztr1_406.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-20
264
X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Heating cabling, 3/4

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_400.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-21
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
X-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer, 4/4
265
ztr1_408.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-22
266
X-Band, Transceiver Version B, cabling of Interconnection Board, bulkhead housing, 1/1

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_415.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-23
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band, Interconnection Transceiver, Version A and B, 1/1
267
ztr1_409.pdf
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V.

Technical Manual
Fig. 12-24
268
S-Band, Transceiver Version A with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 1/7

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_410.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-25
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 2, gearbox cabling, 2/7
269
ztr1_411.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-26
270
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor and Start Unit 2 cabling, 3/7
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_412.pdf
Only for 1-ph 115 V and 230 V Version A

(transmitter up).
For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):
jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
Technical Manual
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 12-27
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 4/7
271
ztr1_413.pdf
For Version B (bulkhead transceiver):

jumpers (shorting bars) can be used if a
3-ph 230 V motor is used. A separate cable
for mains supply the of the Start Unit 1 must
be connected if a 3-ph 400 V motor is used.
272
Fig. 12-28
Technical Manual
S-Band, Transceiver Version B with Start Unit 1, gearbox cabling, 5/7

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_414.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-29
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, Motor, Heating and Start Unit 1 cabling, 6/7
273
ztr1_401.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-30
274
S-Band, Transceiver Version A and B, 115 V Transformer cabling, 7/7

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
ztr1_416.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 12-31
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
S-Band, Transceiver Version B, Connection Board in bulkhead housing, 1/1
275

Technical Manual
276
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e12.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
13
Outline Drawings
Title
Page
Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ
278
Disp lay Ele ctronic s U nit with mo unte d Inte rc onn ec tio n B ox , GE3 062 G050 MB 1 /3
279
Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3
280
Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3
281
23 " C on so le M on i to r, ya r d m ou nt i ng , A Z3 063 G 055 M B
282
23" Desktop Monitor without operating panel, AZ3063G056MB
283
23" Desktop Monitor with operating panel, AZ3063G057MB
284
C 5 C on sol e St an d- al on e w it h 23 " M oni t o r, AZ3 063 G 058 M B
285
19 " C on so le M on i to r, ya r d m ou nt i ng , A Z3 068 G 055 M B
286
287
288
C 5 C on sol e St an d- al on e w it h 19 " M oni t o r, AZ3 068 G 058 M B
289
SCC C4 Console 550 mm, KS3004O000GZ 1/3
290
291
292
293
294
295
SCC C4 Console 550 mm stand-alone, KS3005O000GZ 1/3
296
297
298
299
300
301
Ope rating Un it (fo r sh ipyard in stallatio n), BD30 27 O000 MB
302
Tr a c k b a l l O p e r a t i n g U n i t ( f o r s h i p y a r d s i n s t a l l a t i o n ) , B D 3 0 2 8 O 0 0 0 M B
303
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
277
13 Outline Drawings
ztr1_321.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-1
278
Processor Controlled Interswitch (PCI), Bulkhead,GE3023O000 BZ

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
GE3062G050MB-001--
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-2
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Display Electronics Unit with mounted Interconnection Box, GE3062G050 MB 1/3
279
13 Outline Drawings
GE3062G050MB-002--
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-3
280
Display Electronics Unit Stand-Alone, GE3062G050 MB 2/3

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
GE3062G050MB-003--
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-4
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Interconnection Box Stand-Alone,GE3062G050 MB 3/3
281
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-5
282
23" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3063G055MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-6
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
283
13 Outline Drawings

Technical Manual
Fig. 13-7
284

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-8
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
C5 Console Stand-alone with 23" Monitor, AZ3063G058MB
285
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-9
286
19" Console Monitor, yard mounting, AZ3068G055MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-10
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
287
13 Outline Drawings

Technical Manual
Fig. 13-11
288

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-12
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
C5 Console Stand-alone with 19" Monitor, AZ3068G058MB
289
290
Fig. 13-13
F
AIR VENTILATION
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M
30
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
1090
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
Datum
Name
0.5
Urspr.
Member of the EuroMarine Group
STN ATLAS Marine Electronics
Name
Het
Hohorst
Freimatoleranzen Oberflche
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
750
670
606,76
1150
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 000 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
1
3 Bl.
Section 550, Monitor Cons.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:15
300005562
AIR VENTILATION
Type of enclosure : IP22
550
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
640
490
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-14
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
566,50
600
63
VIEW B
VIEW A
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
SCC C4
STANDARD
Zust. nderung
HANDRAIL
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
291
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
VIEW B
VIEW A
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 000 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
2
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005562
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
Fig. 13-15
F
470
490
390
190
100
0
20
A-A (1 : 2)
530
550
* EQUALITY ACCORDING TO
DIN ISO 1101
THE VARIATION OF THE EQUALITY
OF THE TOP PLAIN MUST BE LESS
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm.
( THE ACTUAL SURFACE HAS TO
FIT IN BETWEEN TWO PLAINS
WICH ARE LOCATED IN A
DECK
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
50-200mm
FRONT
450
FOUNDATION VIEW
1.0 *
100
0
20
292
B
KS3004O000GZ.pdf
16
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 000 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
3
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005562
HEIGHT OF FOUNDATION ABOVE FLOOR: 50-200mm

DEPENDENT ON CLASS REGULATION
AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-16
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
AIR VENTILATION
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\700_M_AZ3054
30
490
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
0
1090
Zust. nderung
Datum
596,76
740
660
1150
SCC C4
STANDARD
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
293
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
300005563
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 100 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
1
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:15
AIR VENTILATION
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
640
294
Fig. 13-17
F
578
611
63
VIEW B
VIEW A
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
HANDRAIL
Datum
Name
VIEW B
VIEW A
Name
Het
Hohorst
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 100 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
2
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005563
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-18
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
470
490
390
190
100
0
20
0
20
A-A (1 : 2)
100
1.0
DECK
FLOOR LEVEL
50-200mm
680
700
DIN ISO 1101
THAN 1mm.
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
FRONT
FOUNDATION VIEW
600
KS3004O100GZ.pdf
6
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
295
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3004 O 100 GZ
for CRT and TFT
Blatt
3
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005563

AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
SCC C4
STANDARD
16
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
296
Fig. 13-19
F
AIR VENTILATION
P:\MSV42-NAV-COM\Projekte\Scc2002\DNV\550_M_Stand_Alone
30
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
1090
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
Datum
Name
0.5
Urspr.
Name
Het
Hohorst
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
750
670
606,76
1150
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 000 GZ
Stand Alone for CRT and TFT
Blatt
1
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:15
300005564
AIR VENTILATION
550
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
640
490
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-20
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
566,50
600
63
VIEW B
VIEW A
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
SCC C4
STANDARD
Zust. nderung
HANDRAIL
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
297
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
VIEW B
VIEW A
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 000 GZ
Blatt
2
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005564
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
Fig. 13-21
F
470
490
390
190
100
0
20
A-A (1 : 2)
530
550
DIN ISO 1101
FLOOR LEVEL THAN 1mm.
DECK
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
50-200mm
FRONT
450
FOUNDATION VIEW
1.0 *
100
0
20
298
B
KS3005O000GZ.pdf
16
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 000 GZ
Blatt
3
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005564

AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-22
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
AIR VENTILATION
30
490
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
0
1090
Zust. nderung
Datum
596,76
740
660
1150
SCC C4
STANDARD
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
299
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
300005565
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 100 GZ
Blatt
1
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:15
AIR VENTILATION
700
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
640
300
Fig. 13-23
F
578
611
63
VIEW B
VIEW A
CRT Monitor
or TFT Monitor
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
Zust. nderung
SCC C4
STANDARD
HANDRAIL
Datum
Name
VIEW B
VIEW A
Name
Het
Hohorst
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 100 GZ
Blatt
2
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005565
13 Outline Drawings
Technical Manual

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
Fig. 13-24
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
F
470
490
390
190
100
0
20
0
20
A-A (1 : 2)
100
1.0
DECK
FLOOR LEVEL
50-200mm
680
700
DIN ISO 1101
THAN 1mm.
DISTANCE OF 1mm )
FRONT
FOUNDATION VIEW
600
KS3005O100GZ.pdf
6
Zust. nderung
Datum
Name
Name
Het
Hohorst
301
Urspr.
2002 Datum
Bearb. 12.Sep.
Gepr. 12.Sep.
Norm
MSV 42
0.5
Ers.f.
Ers.d.
KS 3005 O 100 GZ
Blatt
3
3 Bl.
Werkstoff
Mastab: 1:5
300005565

AVAILABLE SPACE
FOR CABLE INPUT
SCC C4
STANDARD
16
Technical Manual
13 Outline Drawings
13 Outline Drawings
ztr1_327.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-25
302
Operating Unit (for shipyard installation), BD3027O000 MB

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
13 Outline Drawings
ztr1_328.pdf
Technical Manual
Fig. 13-26
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Trackball Operating Unit (for shipyards installation), BD3028O000 MB
303
13 Outline Drawings

Technical Manual
304
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e13.fm / 06.09.05
Blind Sector / Blanking Sector Record

Technical Manual

0
15
345
330
30
45
315
300
60
285
75
270
90
105
255
120
240
135
225
Example:
165
195
45
315
150
210
180
270
90
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
135
225
Blind Sector
(outer circle)
180
Ships Name:
Antenna Location:
Transmitter No.:
Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company:
Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:

ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05
305
Technical Manual

0
345
15
330
30
45
315
300
60
285
75
270
90
105
255
120
240
135
225
Example:
165
195
45
315
150
210
180
270
90
Blanking Sector
(inner circle)
135
225
Blind Sector
(outer circle)
180
Ships Name:
Antenna Location:
Transmitter No.:
Type:
Remarks:
Installation Company:
Signed:
Location, Date of Adjustment:

306
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_e14.fm / 06.09.05
Notes
Technical Manual
Notes
Space for your notes:
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05
307
Notes

Technical Manual
308
ED3051G542 / 02 (2005-09)
t_eu11_eno.fm / 06.09.05

ED3051G542

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

ED3051G542

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Technical Manual

Display Electronics Units

Item No.: ED3051G542

Order No.: 390001631

SAM Electronics GmbH

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

General Recommendations for Installation, Maintenance and Repair Work . . . . . . . . . . 16

Dangerous High Frequency Radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Compatibility with SAM Electronics Radar / NACOS equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Prerequisite for the MULTIPILOT 1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

"Power On" Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

CAN Bus Concept / Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Termination of RS422 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Display Electronics Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Modification of the Drive Module Fitting Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

CHARTRADAR 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

MULTIPILOT 1100 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

UAIS DEBEG 3400, Setting-to-Work and Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

Configuration Parameters for the Connection of a VDR DEBEG 4300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Menu Structure of the System Maintenance Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Selfcheck Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Telemonitoring Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Configure Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

Start Program (Diskette) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Commissioning Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Motherboard BIOS Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Upgrade Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Setting-To-Work Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Setting-To-Work Workflow for the Radar Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Example of the Configuration of a Dual Installation with a CHARTPILOT . . . . . . . . . . .

Important Hardware Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Revision Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Keyboard and Buzzer for Service Purposes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Software Update and Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Opening the Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

Display Electronics Unit Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Exchange of Parts and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Conformity to Standards, Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

External Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Compass Safe Distances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

System Fault Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

AIS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

System Fault Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Index of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Cabling Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Outline Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100

RADARPILOT / MULTIPILOT 1100